This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the information in books and make it universally accessible.
http://books.google.com
_ In 3"" nlfflf of Q '5, J
'1'!/V5
->~\ Y d-6
;1'I?¢'5" flu 1
4'
W“ .bQ'
6' O £.‘.;_"
-’ »-*..;".\"' P ‘A ' 0 z" ‘.1 "
xll. I VT ¢-Iv» S
--'.‘%~\'v._'_;‘¢ 1,1.‘ _z - 9 .Q\lk0.W o.NcvJ ¢>Q> ~\aoUt0¢ T -I4%\O0 O t 'Anl@ ‘
'§‘:‘§,;‘Y-.‘;;P~ ‘Mu! s. X. .¢ ¢\¢. .8. Will ... - .7. __8,\.
5 M A‘ I-‘¢
I § Q I)... .
a~"" ' l Q » 9 L! 3 A». - \ . I
- \ _, \ I
' 4 ‘ - ~
~ .
.
' 1
4 % //4 / .
D -
. I I
I .
0
0
0
'
Q n 0 0 \ 0
_ \ .
I I
I I -_-.1‘.-.‘-2-.21:::::z::::::===:z:;;:;=¢n1======\-§==1=;:::
GRAMMAR
OI‘
THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE.
\
_fi»—
BY
ALEXANDER CSOMA DE KOROS
1834 IIHHIIIlllll?IHHIWHIWIHIIIIllllVIIIIIIIIIIIIHIIWII KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK EK 0672 7488 P w" I |
GRAMMAR
OF
THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE,
IN
NCBIEZIQEIQ
PREPARED,
UNDER. THE PATRONAGE OF THE GOVERNMENT AND THE AUSPICES OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,
BY
ALEXANDER CSOMA DE Kénés,
SICULO'HUNGARIAN. 0F TRANSYLVANIA.
QIaIrutta:
PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, CIRCULAR ROAD.
1834. ~92 n QR'HR'Q'Q; v a *I'X‘P QWM'WHQ' V a ngq'qu'nng'fi’ n
' (A B) ékararia or grammatical work of the Tibetan Language.) wufi'flfiflwwqiqi‘lmi
(Sans. Namo Raina Trayéya. Eng. Reverean to the three Holy Ones.)
w n sq'fl'l'pé‘éw'flé‘fi'sr fis'm'finvul'lr‘l‘fla'fil I fic'iq'qgfi'q'flfi'é'ilé‘ H ii'fifi'gi'n' wwwvs n
(For understanding well the Tibetan language, according to grammatical rules, the arrangement of letters, which
are the basis of syllables, words, and sentences, in to be explained.)
KONINKL. - BIBLIOTHEEK TE 'SHAOE. ~ ‘WBRTEWAQEQ
--00100:-—
THE wide diffusion of the Buddhistic religion in the eastern parts of Asia, having of late greatly excited the attention of European scholars, and it being now ascertained by several distinguished Orientalists, that this faith, professed by so many millions of men in different and distant countries in the East, originated in Central or Gangetic India, it is hoped that a Grammar and Dictionary of the Tibetan language will be favour ably received by the learned Public; since, Tibet being considered as the head-quarters of Buddhism in the present age, these elementary works may serve as keys -to unlock the immense volumes, (faithful translations of the Sanskrit text) which are still to be found in that country, on the manners, customs, opinions, knowledge, ignorance, superstition, hopes, and fears of great part of Asia, especially of India, in former ages.
There are, in modern times, three predominant religious professions in the world, each counting numerous votaries, and each possessed of a large peculiar literature :—the Christians, the Muhammedans, and the Buddhists. It is not without interest to observe the coincidence of time with respect to the great exertions made by several Princes, for the literary establishment of each of these different religions, in the Latin, the Arabic, and in the Sanskrit languages, in the 8th and 9th century of the Christian ]Era: by CHARLES THE GREAT, and his immediate successors, in Germany and France ; by the Khalifs AL-MANSUR, HARUN AL-RASHID, and AL-MAMUN, at Bagdad ; by the Kings of Magadha, in India ; by KHRISRONG DE’HU TSAN, KHRI DEYSRONG TSAN, and RAL PACHEN, in Tibet : and by the Emperors of the Thang dynasty, in China. But it is to the honour of Christianism to observe that, while learning has been continually declining among the Muhammedans and the Buddhists, Christianity has not only carried its own literature and science to a very advanced period of excellence, but in the true and liberal (Vi)
spirit of real knowledge, it distinguishes itself by its efforts in the present day towards acquiring an intimate acquaintance with the two rival religious systems, and that too, in their original languages. Hence, in the north-western parts of Europe, in Germany, England, France, where a thousand years ago, only the Latin was studied by literary men, there are now fomld establishments for a critical knowledge both of the Arabic and the Sanskrit literature.
Hence, too, has been founded recently the Oriental Translation Committee, composed of the most eminent Orientalists of Europe, from whose labours so much has already been done, and so much more is expected. The students of Tibetan have naturally been the most rare, if they have existed at all, in this learned association. Insulated among inac cessible mountains, the convents of Tibet have remained unregarded and almost unvisited by the scholar and the traveller :-nor was it until “ithin these few years conjectured, that in the undisturbed shelter of this region, in a climate proof against the decay and the destructive influences of tropical plains, were to be found, in complete preservation, the volumes of the Buddhist faith, in their original Sanskrit, as Well as in faithful trans lations, which might be sought in vain on the continent of India. I hope that my sojourn in this inhospitable country, for the express purpose of mastering its language, and ex amining its literary stores, will not have been time unprofitably spent, and that this Grammar and Dictionary may attest the sincerity of my endeavours to attain the object I had determined to prosecute.
Having in the Preface to my Dictionary expressed my respectful thanks to the British Government of India, for its patronage during my Tibetan studies; and having there gratefully enumerated the kindnesses and good services which I have received from seve ral Gentlemen, it would be superfluous here to repeat my acknowledgments. My selec tion of the English language, as the medium of introduction of my labours, will sufiiciently evince to the learned of Europe, at large, the obligations I consider myself under to that nation. I beg now only to state in a few words, that in the preparation of this gram matical work, I have not observed any strict arrangement of the parts of Grammar, nei ther have I introduced the definitions of the several parts of speech, nor have I touched ( vii ) upon the analogy which this tongue has to several others ; since the work would thus have been increased to an immense size. But, for brevity’s sake, I have enumerated only those articles which I thought to be essentially required for a fundamental knowledge of this yet unknown language. I have gone through all the pa.rts of speech, and have given lists of them as frilly as it was in my power to do, together with their derivations and variations, &c., that the learner might at once see and perceive all the constituent parts of the Tibetan language.
Orthography being the most diflicult part of this language, in the Syllabic Scheme and in the Dictionary I have endeavoured, with the aid of authentic grammatical works, to express every word in its proper characters. The declension of nouns, and the conjuga tion of verbs, as in the common Indian dialects, are very simple. A well arranged Dic tionary, with a short introduction on the general forms of declensions and conjugations, will be suflicient to conduct the scholar to a perfect knowledge of this language. For further information on the subject and for the contents and arrangement of this Grammar, the work itself may be consulted.
A. CSOMA DE K6Ro's. Calcufta, December, 1834.
CONTENTS.
‘00:” Page. 5 l-8.—Letters and their several Distinctions, ...... _...... I § 9-42.—Pronunciation, or Orthography and Orthoépy, ...... Q ...... 3 § 43.—Alphabetical Scheme of the Sanskrit Language when written in Tibetan characters, . . . . 20 § 44.--A List of Contracted Words, as written in the small character, ...... 21 § 45-62.—Adventitious Particles, ...... 28 § 63.—A List exhibiting Specimens of the Respectful Language, ...... 32 § 64.-Parts of Speech, ...... 37 § 65-68.——Of the Article, ...... ib. § 69-7l.—-Of the Noun, ...... 38 § 72-74.—Of the Gender and of the several kinds of Nouns, ...... 39 § 75.—Of Diminutive Nouns, ...... 40 § 76-84.—Of Declension, ...... 4| § 85.-—Of the Plural Number, ...... 42 § 86.-—Form of General Declensiou, ...... 56. § 87-93.-—Examples, ...... 43 § 94-103.—-Adjectives, ...... x ...... 46 § 104-105.-—Of Comparison, ...... 49 § 106.—List of Adjectives, ...... , ...... ib. § lO7-lll.—Numerals, ...... 62 § 112-126.—Pron0uns, ...... 65 § 118,—Declension of Personal Pronouns, ...... 67 § l'21.—Possessives, ...... , ...... 69 § 122.-Dernonstratives, ...... ib. § l23.—Interrogatives, ...... 70 5 l24.—-Relatives, ...... 71 § 125,—Reciprocals, ...... ib. § 126.—Pronominal Adjectives, ...... 72 § l27-l75.—Verbs, ...... ‘ ...... ib. § 176-181.—Participles, ...... 94 § 182-183.-—Adverbs, ...... 95 § 184-187.—Postpositions (serving for Prepositions), ...... 101 § 188,—Conjunctions, ...... 104 § 189.—Interjections, . . _ ...... 105 § l90-222.——Syntax, ...... l . . 106 § 223-225.——Prosody, ...... 115 § 226.—List of Verbs, ...... ib. (X)
APPENDIX. Page. § 227-234.—I. Tibetan modes of reckoning Time, ...... 147 The Cycle of 12 years, ...... ib. The 10 Elements, and the Names of the 12 Animals that make up the Cycle of 60 years, . . . , _ , , , 149 Sanskrit and Tibetan Names of the years in the Cycle of 60 years, as they are reckoned south of the river Narmada, in India and in Tibet, expressed in Roman character, ...... l50 The V1-ihaspati Chakra, or Cycle of 60 years, in Sanskrit and Tibetan, and in Chinese and Tibetan, ...... 151 The Names of the years of the Jovian Cycle, according to the Chinese reckoning, ...... 153 § 235.—Tibetan Symbolical Words, used as numerals, ...... 155 ll. Specimens of the Tibetan language, from the Kah-gyur and other classical works. § 236.—l. Attributes of a Virtuous Woman, ...... 158 § 237.—2. Verses against wearing the Veil, ...... 160 § 238.-3. RernAvA1.r's Letter to Snixra, &c., ...... 164 § 239.—-4. Compendium of the Doctrine of Bunnna in one Sloka, ...... 165 § 240.—5. A moral maxim, ...... ib. § 2-ll.—-6. Another maxim, ...... ib. § 242.-7. Why God is called Konchol: in Tibetan, “ The Chief of Rarity," ...... _ , . . , _ 1'6, § 2~'13.—8. Who is the Supreme of all? ...... 166 § 244.-9. Vllho is the true Protector? ...... ib. § 245.—l0. With whom refuge may be taken? ...... 167 § 2461-10. On the same subject, ...... ib. § 247.—-l l. The Address of Ahuuxu to VIBHNU, ...... ib. § 248.—l2. The Nature of the Soul, ...... 168 § 249.-13. How the doctrine of Snixn should be received by the learned and the Priests, . . . . ib. § 250.—l4. Snixra of the Scythian race, ...... - ...... ib. § 25l.—l5. Moral Sentence, ...... , , _ _ _ , , ______169 § 252.-—l6. Remarkable Sayings, ...... ib. § 253.—IlI. Colloquial Phrases, ...... _ _ , _ , , 170 § 254.—IV. Chronological Table, ...... 181 Notes belonging to Ditto, ...... 191 § 25-5.—-V. Epoch of the death of Snixva, ...... 199 Notes belonging to Ditto, ...... _ _ , _ _ , _ _ _ 202 § 256.—Vl. Introduction to the Lithographed pages, ...... 203 1-an 40 LYIHOGRAPBED PAGES. Syllabic Scheme of the Tibetan Language, ...... l Initial Signs, Commas, and lntersyllabic Points, used with the Capitals—Ditto with the Small Characters, ...... - ...... 80 Tibetan Alphabet, &c. in the Bamyik Charaoter.._ ...... 3! in the Brutsha ditto, ...... 36 Tibetan Numerals, ...... 37 The Léntsha Characters. a form of the Devinagari used in Nepal, ...... 38 ERRATA AND ADDENDA.
-—_qu.__
Fag" 001' fin" Page. col. line. I -- 6 after “ name” insert “ and power” 65 _ 20/0,. “.3 read vs 2 — 5f0r @II'NQ read @qw'§ 68 __ 22 s‘l'gwq F‘s/:18, 3 -- 3 Q3!!! Q58] 69 __ 9 “.5? flag 4 - 22 1:5 qg __ __ 10 nsgqqqe Rival-Pg 7 -- l7 Sll'fl/la' Swé/ui _ __ 15 é’vrq‘q-fi ER 1“,“ SI 13 2 27 g a _ _ 25 QR]; Qgg 18 — 5 I] fly _ _ 28 W5; {.8 21 _ _' (g: is, — — — Q'A‘I‘fiiifi i‘l'kf'fi'“‘i — —— 6 a an 70 — 26 ss'slrfiw ns'slrfiw — — 24 if“ £15 72 - 30 és'srfi’ fis's'fi’ -— -— 27 "‘ e" 73 — 16 s2 :6’ N0te.—In a few contracted words in this 75 — 9 V4 R'fd list, instead of‘ or ’ (as the sign of 3, $, or 76 —' 19 Ugli Us: é, 8w.) read '. — — 23 NV 3N 23 __ 6 for sum read a?“ _ _ 27 mm 142,51 - — 27 sfi’nw sfi’nw 77 — 23 Q? “'1‘ 24, _ 4 HEW £15,, 79 — 6 Bis/wills mng'fill 25 -- l rigs: 11;:st " _' 12 “‘15 f1“ 32 - 19 at thebeginning, add § 63. 82 — 22 9‘11 N 36 - 18for inqu read it’qu — — 25 Qi'qfl'sgl 3591' &c. 42 _ 13 fi’mg s‘fnw, £’ 90 — 5’ also 7’ "am! a' 8w 56 2 2 win ass 95 2 22 aflfjwi'wf, add iay'va - -_ 20 qu Q30; 98 1 ll f0r W'Ifi'au read q-mqwx. __ _ 25 Q5" Q55,“ 102 2 25 s: 5;: 58 l 1 E11 é'q —- l 30 arms as.“ __ __ 5 waif“ mag/L l08 —- 28 instead of the dash —, read con. __ 2 11 55-6,“ fiwzq, . \t/ractedly. V __ __ fifivlgq fig'fiq —— ?'QI§I gqru 59 - 4 mm was: 1“ — 29 5‘1?“ fl‘l‘j'q" __ __ 16 a“, if“, 112 — 2 PWPW Ils'wv 61 1 I7 is" if" '- - 8 ’g‘l'w 3151'“ 64 __ 2-2 53—8}; 118 I Qéqu Qéifq xii >
Page. col. line. a Pugh 60L lint 122 —- 7for'QQKI'q read n‘éq'u an ethical work (entitled) “ The Stem of 124 2 9 quq qi'qm; Wisdom.” The work of the Saskya Pandita, 126 __ 3 581‘ £11.“ to which theyare referredin the text, consists 131 1 29 £1.11 glflq ofabout 450$lokas,dll ofthe ‘same kind and 134 2 24 Qggleq QQKW.“ tenor of verses as these here quoted from 135 1 26 qu'aqq Qqaq'q Na'garjuna. These verses were found among 137 2 23 ifiqv-q {In-q my extracts from the work quoted in the 138 l 9 n.“ guq text, and I did not distinguish the difl'erent 141 1 6 Qg’uq Qécq authors. I take this opportunity of correct 142 2 23 qg-q 1415’.“ ing my mistake. 155 —- 6 QGN'IR ng'qr —- —- 20f0r ill'll read £51111 _ - s it,for3; _a, 1014 ; 171 — 21 M111 m3 - _ 9 in is — — 27 QB“ W 156 - 28 add s. Plum'aka. ‘ 178 — 10 Qfi’ Q12 157 — 27 after “ a star” insert mil/1'61], ~— —- 27 in“; 45;“; hkhor-lo,S. Chakra, the circle 174 - 26 Q a of the 27 Nakshatras. 175 — 11 § 158 — 13 for 38W read £81“! 178 — 13 add.- He made grammatical 159 — l5 'ZI/G'qu vii/arm Works, and translated some — - 28 portioned proportioned religlmls tracts. 160 - 17 affection afi'ectation — ——- 24f0r Elia-15' read é’qi’ -— -— 19 Shaddbodana Shuddhodana 179 —- 7 Kllé‘lq mayo] 161 —— 9 Qwrw mam . 180 - 4 a‘s’wog: gapng 162 _ 30 shis she _ _ 20 em 3qu 164 _ 30 yN w 181 _ 4 “35’ ug 165 — 26 51 §1 —— — '23 commanded commenced. - -- 27 91s: firs: 185 __ 2s 1w W 169 —- 2 Svadéshé Sua déshé 1'87 _ 31 142 1427 Note. The Remarkable Sayings, No. 16: are 188 _ 12 a“ iv attributed to kLus grub S. Nogar- __ __ 13 ngmil'msq' QEQNIREI'QSW juna,) a very celebrated anciest sage in In- __ __ M ii” 5N dia. See 113W QQL, “Rival. '5], leaf 165, in 198 __ 7 an“ law“ the work entitled? Nttz :Sjllastra, Prflljnya 200 __ 28 £3,“ qq g6, Hum dan'da, Tib .gtriw'g'qequw'nw'xq'gc'5, _ __ 24 gm“ gsw A GRAMMAR
0F {FEW} WHEIEM‘AQ QANGWAQEQ
~00”—
LE'ITERS AND THEIR SEVERAL DISTINCTIONS. § 1. In the alphabet of the Tibetan language there are thirty simple letters, arranged in eight classes. The forms of them, together with the name of each ex pressed in Roman characters and Italics, may be represented thus : l 7“? ka F kha “lea K ria
k [ch g "g 2 $_ cha 5 chha Eja ‘1'] gnya
ch chh .i ".7
5 ta 2 tha Rda
t lh 41
’4 P3 q pha q ba P pk 6
i tsa é tsha é dsa
is ts/l ds
a zha 32a (\ha
2h 2 1:
Kra Gila fl sha
T l sh
§ h'a w a
h! a § 2. There are five vowel sounds: a, z, u, e, a, pronounced according to the gene. ral pronunciation in Latin, on the continent of Europe, without any distinction into (2)
short and long, but observing a middle sound. The vowel a, when sounded after a consonant, is generally inherent; but when otherwise there would be confusion on account of the prefix, it is exPressed by Q. The vowels i, u, e, o, are expressed by marks put above or below the consonants; thus“ _, ‘ V as in a ki, '3 kn, 5| ké, fi’ ko. These vowel signs are called “ 13 5 gi-gu, A, @qwg zhabs-lryu‘ Qilq'g andei’na-ro. § 3. There are very few words commencing with any vowel, and those are either of Sanscrit origin, or interjections, or corrupt words. The five vowels, when initial in a syllable or word, are expressed in the following manner: in a, Bil i, 9; u, W e, 8Y0 ; they may be expressed also by Q ’a, 3 5,2) ’u, <3 ’0, 5’0. § 4. The above enumerated consonants and vowels are thus divided with respect to the organs by which they are formed: a] F: q a 0, e w are gutturals. s a E a, i at Q a w a a? a -_ _ } are palatials. 5 g n q ,5 a] q are dentals. :1 =4 :1 at ‘3 Q @lrmnbiais.
a is liquid and cerebral.
But Ii' #3' W N, besides what has been stated above, are likewise nasals. § 5. The thirty letters of the alphabet are distinguished, according to their accent or sound, by certain genders ; thus: Kl' 5' 5' 11' 3 are called masculine, (13’ p,ho ;) II' 6' 81‘ '4' $' neuter, (W 3? ma-ning ;) Kl' F' 5' 11' ‘é' 21' 61' a" Q' '8' 51' N feminine, (ii/1110;) I: QI' 16' low or barren feminine, (all' KIRK mo-gsham ,-) and the w is said to
have no gender. § 6. All the thirty letters, in general, may occur as initials, forming the basis of a syllable or word (iiq' Mrs. ming-gzhi). From among the thirty, the following twenty, W 1115' av "s' er 11' a I ll' 74 r 5' £' é' an a: a" u' a r W w never occur as final letters or after any vowel. The remaining ten, M' G' 5' '5' 14' N' Q' 1' ‘II' N, are the (3) only letters that close any syllable, or follow the vowel, whether inherent or expressed. But these ten letters may likewise stand as initials in a syllable or word. § 7. The ten final letters are called affixes, QSKI zhes-hjug) from their being affixed to the basis Of a syllable. With respect to their sound and use, they are distinguished thus: lFl' R' 11' N are masculine, (121’ p0 ;) 65' 1' Q] neuter, (81" 3?, ma m'ng,) and G' it" Q, feminine, (ext/mo ;) when the letters 81' C' Ix' N are followed by N ; thus: B'W' GN' IW' NW ; or the letters 15' 1' <21 by 5, thus 55' 13' <25, then the w and q are called a second affix, WWQEKI, yang~hjuga § 8. From among the ten affixes, the following five. 81' 3' II' B" Q, are also called prefixes, {if Q55], srion-hjug, from their being put before the basis of a syllable. They are likewise distinguished thus : 81' 5' are called neuter, (81' 5i? ma-ning ,-)t[masculine (13' pho ,-) a: very femenine, (136' 13' 3f shin-tu-mo ;) Q feminine, mo.) These prefixes occur in several parts of speech, especially among the verbs. They should always be pronounced, but in common practice are seldom heard. For distinction’s sake, they may be represented by the small Roman characters g, d, b, m, h, when the rest is in Italics or vice versa, and this system will be followed in the present work. This is all that need be said of the letters of the Tibetan alphabet. We will next proceed to the powers of the letters individually, explaining at the same time the plan of writing them in the Roman character. PRONUNCIATION. § 9. 1. Of the thirty simple letters. In is pronOunced like k in king, or 0 before a, o, u, in call, come, cut ; as in ’q'rx Ira-42a, a pillar; in kun,all. Pi is the same letter aspirated ; it may properly be rendered by [ck ; as in [1' I‘ll kha-vo, the mouth. 81 when simple, is generally sounded like It or q ,- but by some it is pronounced also as g. It may always be represented by g ,- thus in 51 gur, a tent; OFF :1 lag-pa, the hand. G is the nasal n or ng in ing. When preceding the vowel in a syllable, it may be rendered by 11 ; after the vowel, by ng' ,- and, when reduplicated by g ; thus : C'LR' fian‘ang, I myself; bq' RN rung-gum, is it convenient? bq'grung-go, it is proper. (4)
3 is sounded like ch in church ; as in 3 chi, what? It may be represented by ch. & is the same letter aspirated. it may be rendered by chh ,- as in Q chhu, water. '15 though by some people is sounded like ch, in choose, may always be repre sented by in just; as in $5413] jo-vo, a master, lord ; i"; jo-mo, a mistress, lady ; a nun. q is sounded like we in new; as in 35' nyung, feW, little ; q nya, fish. It may properly be represented by ny. a is t in tongue ; as in air in tig-men, a ribband ; fiq' £91 tib-ril, a tea-pot. a is the same letter aspirated. It may be rendered hy th ,- as in air q thug-pa a rope; 631w thug-ma, beginning. $when simple, is sounded commonly like t in tool; but by some people it is pronounced also as d. It may always properly be represented by d, and pronounced accordingly ; as in R511 dad-pa, faith, belief; fi'ili' de-ring, to-day. q is sounded like n in noon ; as in 5111. nor, wealth. q is like p in paper ; as in tire: parma, a printed work. 14 is the same letter aspirated. It may be rendered by ph, and pronounced as the p-h in up-hill as in RI pka, father. 1; has three sounds: (p, b, 2;.) As initial in a word, it is sounded by some like 1) ,- as in it's pdt (for Bod), Tibet or a Tibetan. As a prefix, it is silent; as in 13qu lea/i (for bkha), a precept or command. As an additional syllable, or article after the q' ‘2' 1' 01 final letters, or when it has the R prefix, it is generally pronounced as v ; as in i' 1; ré-va, hope ; will; d,vang, power. In the two following cases, G5 and 515' (dvu and duo) the pronunciation is simply as u and 0. With any of the surmount ing 1' or N (r, l, s,) or preceding Q (h) letters, it is sounded b, those letters being then silent. In general it may be represented by b. N is like m in man; as in a? mi, a man; it mé, fire ; Q18; lam, way, road. 3 is the German z or tz. It may be rendered by is (as English and French writers use it in foreign names or words) 5 as in $51 tsug, how P in tsam, how much P how many P i is the same letter aspired. It may be represented by tsh ; as in ii tské, life. éis sounded like the Arabic dsal (0') or the Italian z in mezzo. It may be repre sented by ds ,- as in é'fi dsati, nutmeg. There are no words in Tibetan written by (5) this simple character; but there are many that have it with a it or Q prefix, which are sounded like the simple ii; as in Nés'q mdsad-pa, to do, make; diru hdsin-pa, to seize, take, &c. The Sanscrit ch, chh,.j,jlz, characters (as they are pronounced in Bengal and by Europeans) are rendered in Tibetan books, by ts, tsh, ds, dsh, (5' (if $' Q.) and pro nounced accordingly, as has been explained above. Such is the pronunciation in Cashmir also, and in some parts of the north-west of India. And, as the Tibetan grammarians have observed, it was so anciently in Central India also; though in Bengal the pronunciation has always been the same as it now is, with respect to via, c-k/z,j, ‘31 occurs but in a few words. It is sounded v or w. I: and gotten have the same sound in Tibetan ; as in 11131?! and Qé'lgw“ Vérandsi, Benares. They may be represented thus: I! by v, and Q; by w. e; is the French j. It may be rendered by zh ; as in QQI zhal, the mouth, face. '5 is pronounced like 2 in zeal, or s in as; as in as zan, meat, food. Q is a soft aspirate, and may be represented by k or a. Formerly it was added to every syllable ending in a vowel, thus: RIQ kah, fiQ kih, 3Q ku/i, is keb, ill-2 koh, instead of the modern W ’3' 'g' 51' 7ll]. But now it is left out after the vowel signs, and retained only in those syllables in which the fundamental (or radical) letter is preceded by a prefix, and where there is no closing consonant after the inherent a ; as in these words: KJHQ gzah, a planet; RKIQ dgah, joy; “LWQ bkah, precept; 8W2 mdah, an arrow; QRQ hda/z, to pass away. But, when there is a closing consonant, the Q is dropt; as in QRN' l1 hdas-pa, gone away. It: is sounded like y in yard, you: as in th yab, father; ‘gfl yum,m0ther, matron. 1 is like 1' in rain; as in it; ré-va, hope ; rat ra-ma, a she-goat. It is silent when inserted on the top of a letter; as in a rim, pronounced Ira. Q] is pronounced like I in long; as in 0710, a year. It is silent at the top of another letter; as in 'g lria, (n'a) five. a has the sound of sh in sheep ; as in a; sizing, wood, a tree. is: is the s in saint; as in r:J/"QI/so-so, difl'erent; QNN sems, the mind, soul. At the top of a letter, as also at the end of a syllable, it is silent, according to common practice. 0 (6)
a is the hard aspirated h in heart, horn, as in all. Hor, a Turk.
W is sounded like a in far, father, as in W3, a-chhé, one’s elder sister. The inhe rent a also is not pronounced like the short u in up, cup, &c, as in Sanscrit, but it has a middle sound like the French a in la,or the English in far, father; as in QIN lam, way, road. § 10. Such is the pronunciation of the 30 simple letters. But, besides these, there are many conpound letters, formed either by subjoining one of the following three liquids QI'L'QJ (y, r, l,) to another, thus: gun's]; or by placing one of these L'QI'N (r, l, s,) on the top of another, thus: flat/if, or by both ways at once, thus: 5' 3' it. We proceed now to treat of such compound letters; and first, § 11. 2. Of those letters that have a subjoined RI, 3/, (‘lI'IWIW ya-blags) written thus: t. a They are seven in number 81' r5' 81' w W 11' N, and are represented thus: @ kya, t5 khya, Q gya, Q pya, 5 phya, Q bya, g mya. Their pronunciation is as follows : Q is sounded like t in tube, or in virtue; as in @QI'Q kyal-pa, idle talk. [5 is the preceding character aspirated ; as in [5‘ lrhyi, a dog. 9 is pronounced like d in duke ; as in grail gym-pa, he is become, or grown. H in no word occurs in this simple state. It has either asurmounting N (thus : § spya) or a s prefix, (thus: is dpya) and then, in each case, it is sounded ch, or sh; as in $65 spyan (shan or chan) the eye; 55 dpya (sha or cha) tax, tribute. g is pronounced generally chh ; as in 251's), phyug-po, the rich or rich, (chhug-po.) But in Ladak, and in some other parts, it is sounded also like wph; as in 5 phye, meal, flour, pronounced phé,) as if there were no subjoined y, i]. g is pronounced ch and j; as in fis'q byed-pa (ched-pa or jed-pa), to do, make. 6 is sounded ny; as in iii/TU myong-va (pronounced nyong-va), to taste. § 12. 3. Of those letters that have 1 subjoined (L'IXHKW m blags, written thus: ~‘.) The following fourteen letters Rl' IT 81' w a' 3' ay q' W 11' N' 5' N' 16, subject to this addition, assume the form of 5] km, [a khra, a gm, *4 tra, g thra, s dra, Q ma, 3 pm, 14 phra, Q bra, is mm, 45 shra, N sra, $9 lira: and they should also be pronounced accord ingly ; but, in common practice, they are sounded very obscurely, a], 5, H, are sounded like ta ; 1'5, 9, is, like (ha ; 1:1, S, 5, like ’da or t’a, or all the nine like t: ‘3, N, a, are sounded by some people like a cerebral sh. As this mode of pronouncing the letters, which ( 7 )
have a subjoined r, is very uncertain, it is better to write and pronounce them regu larly, as in other languages. § 13. 4. Of those letters that have a subjoined Ql, la (QI' IIHKW la btags) : The following six letters : RI' 81' 11' H' 1' 4v, with Q] subjoined, have the form of 5] Ida, :1 gla, 13 Ma, 3 zla, a rla, a] sla. All such syllables are pronounced alike, the subjoined I alone being uttered, (the upper letters remaining silent, according to common custom,) with the exception of a zla, which is pronounced da. But this also sometimes is sounded la, as in gflra spun-zla (spun-la), a brother or sister. Note—Besides the three subjoined letters above specified, ( y, r, 1,) there occurs sometimes a small triangle, (called in Tibetan Vazur, an angular v or w, thus: A) placed below some letters. In Tibetan words it has no sound, but it is used only for distinction’s sake ; as in 3. tslza, hot; é tsha, salt: 55' rtsa, root, vein ; i: rlsa, grass, herb. In 'a'filw the A is added to show that the 5 is a radical letter, not a prefix, and to be sounded accordingly. But this A in these and other similar words is not always inserted : many leave it out, the context showing the proper meaning of the word. In Sanscrit words this A is pronounced o in Tibet ; as in Bodhisato, Solid, Om .' Soti Sid/tam, &c. instead of Bodhisatwa, Swalui, Om .' Swasti Sid/1am. § 14. 5. Of those letters that have a surmounting 1, or r, inserted at the top. The following fifteen letters: "I' 51' III' 5' C' 75' ‘3' I" 5' W II' It" g' 3' §, when thus sur mounted by 1, have the form of i1 rim, 5 rkya, i1 rga, 3 rgya, a ma, Erja, q rnya, f» rla, t rda, ii ma, fi rba, 51 mm, a rmya, X rtsa, g rdsa, and should be pronounced accord ingly. But, in general, the 1 0n the top of a letter is silent, except when it is carried to the preceding syllable, terminating in a vowel ; as in {i rdo-rjé, is pronounced dorzjé ; 3'56, u-rgyan, ur-gyen ; ii'iiwv mi-rnams (mir-nams), men. The 51' Q' 5' 5' 'q letters are sounded harder, more distinctly, with the inserted 1 than in their simple state. x rtsa, and E rdsa are now sounded also sa and za, instead of tsa and dsa. § 15. 6. Of those letters that have a surmounting Q] or I. The following ten letters, ‘1' 81' C' 5' E' W R' 14' I" a, when surmounted by Q], ap pear in this form; a; lka, '3 lga, 'g lna, 'g lcha, 'g lja, 'g lta, 1% Ida, “fl lpa, 'g lba, '5} Ma, and they should also be pronounced accordingly. But, in general, the QI is silent, except in a], and when the preceding syllable terminates in avowel, with which it is frequently (8) sounded ; as in these words: 3";11 (chi-liar) chil-tar, how.> RKIQ'QA (dgnh-ldan) gal-Jan, paradise. The 51' E'R'II letters, with the surmounting Q}, are sounded harder or more distinctly, than in their simple state. § 16. 7. Of those letters that have a surmounting N (s) : The following twenty-two letters : ’q' gr 41' :r Q‘ 121' q' ‘3' w 3' a" Q' 21' g' q' tr 5' a' 44' g' ai' 5, when surmounted by 61, have the appearance of a! ska, g skya, g skra, fl sga, ! sgya, fl sgra, 1! s va, 1; snya, g sta, a sda, i sna, “Q snra, fl spa, g spya, a spra, H sba, g sbya, g sbra, a sma, g smya, fl smra, g: stsa, and they should be pronounced ac cordingly, together with the 61, but it is seldom heard. The letters 51' Q' 41' R' 111' 9' a are in the present day sounded harder, or more distinctly, than in their simple state. 3} skr, and fl spr, in some words, are sounded like t or sh. § 17. According to the instructions of the Tibetan Grammarians, all the three surmounting letters (L'QI'N) should be pronounced, as it were, by uttering a short vowel before them ; thus, R| erka, fl elka, at eska : (in one syllable.) But this is seldom done. It is however proper, when writing in the Roman character, to express every letter, whether it may easily be pronounced or not; since orthography only can show the true meaning, there being many words according to vulgar pronunciation, of the same sound. Orthography is sufliciently fixed by the great number of printed works in Tibet. Pronunciation is different in different provinces, none of which can be taken for a standard. Grammarians therefore must be consulted. § 18. Hitherto it has been shown how such letters should be pronounced that have either of the three subjoined, or of the three surmounting, letters. We now proceed to state the number of the prefixes, and to enumerate the letters to which they are prefixed. The following five letters 51' 5' II' at' Q' are called prefixes, {snarl sfion-hjug, from their being put before a basis, or radical letter. They are a sort of prepositive par ticles, used for modifying the meaning of a word, and for forming the present, past, and future tenses of a verb. They may be prefixed to such letters as are specified below. Therefore § 19. 8. Of those letters that-have a 8] prefix ; 8| (ga) is prefixed to the following eleven simple letters: 5' Q' I" 3' 8y i' @' 21' W 8' N, thus; KIBQ' gCha/l, “IQQ' gnyab, (9)
ImQ' grab, ngq gdah, Aw; gnah, KISQ gtsa/z, MQQ gzlzalt, KP-tQ gzah, IMQ gya/z, IIHQ gshah, IWQ gsala. Nata—This III is prefixed only to eleven simple letters, none of which has either a subjoined or a surmounting letter. All the eleven retain the sound they had with out the 51, and the 3 after this prefix is sounded distinctly d. This ‘1, as a prefix, is employed in the formation of the present and future tenses of the verbs, besides occur ring in many nouns. § 20. 9. Of those letters that have a 5 prefix. R da is prefixed to the following fifteen simple and double letters: 81' 5' ’3' 81' Q' 12' G' q' '4' 5' tr 9' s' N' E, thus : \qu dkah, RQ dkya, $5] dlcra, RIIQ dgah, Kg dgya, RIB (lgra, seq dna/l, mo dpah, as dpya,§5' dpra,§'qq dvah, \g dvga, as dvra, 3w: bmah, qg dmya. Nola—R is prefixed to letters only of the first and fourth series of the alphabet. They may have, with the exception of C, also a subjoined ya or ra (Q, q ) ; but none of them can take a surmounting letter. The 5 is also a characteristic letter for the formation of the future tense, in some verbs. § 21. 10. Of those letters that have a prefixed 1; b. 1: ba is prefixed to the following forty-four simple, double, and triple letters: *I' 5y 51. a. ,h. a. a. a. Era. q. #5.“. a. ways #5.“. Yip???” Ty. #3. 3. g. '1' E' a" 3' 2' er ‘1' w' ‘3' 31' thus: rm bkah, as bkya, rm bkra, 1.151 bkla, uh brlca, us brkya, HH bska, n3 hskya, Iii] bskra, 8m. 8w. Note.-—This is the only prefix with which the radicals may have also any of the three surmounting letters. This prefix occurs in many words, especially in the pre terite and future tenses. § 22. 11. Of those letters that have a prefixed at m. 6! ma is prefixed to these fifteen simple and double letters: I'B' [5‘ [5' 81' 9' l' G' 5' F' ‘3' a' 5' 15' 3' 3' thus: NIIQ mkhah, It]! mklzya, In: mkhra, NIIQ mga/z, ate mgya, its mgra, &c. 8w. §23. 12. Of those letters that have a prefixed Q 1:. Q ha is prefixed to these nineteen simple and double letters: rv IB' [5' 81' Q' 151' a' F' a' R' s' 14' s' s' 11‘ s' s' 3' é, thus : qraq hkhah, qr; hkhya, om hkhra, &c. [See the Abstract.] (10)
Nola—The five prefixes above specified (51' 3' U' It' Q), according to common practice, are silent, except when carried to the preceding syllable ending in a vowel; as in $1,113!!! so-gchig, thirty-one, is sounded as if it were *QI/Kl'ifil sog-chig, Q'TPJG' blo bzang, ingenious, by some is pronounced lob-~ang. 8W3? rgya-mtsho, the sea, gyam tsho ; w'miq ya-mtshan, yam-tshen, marvel, 8w. 3 and Q are never carried to the foregoing syllable ; they are always silent. The only change in the letters, to which these five characters are prefixed, is with the third letter of each of the five first series of the alphabet, (i. e, with 51' ‘5' q' 11' §.) They are sounded now distinctly, without any aspiration, as g,j, d, b, ds. Though these prefixes occur also with the other parts of speech, yet their general use is among the verbs, for forming and distinguishing the present, preterite, and future tenses. § 24. Under the above twelve heads, we have enumerated all the different sorts of letters, that precede the vowel, and form the basis of a syllable or word. Here fol low, now, the affixes or those letters that are put after the vowel, whether inherent or expressed, and that close the syllable. § 25. 13. Of the affixes or closing letters. The affixes (fives!!! rjes-hjug) are the following ten simple or single, and four double letters: I] g, 1: fig, 5 d, q n, I! b, it m, Q h, I. 1', Q} l, N s; and SW gs, RN ngs, 1W bs, NN' ms. They should always be sounded accordingly, since the Tibetan Gram marians say, that these letters are affixed expressly to render the words sonorous and significant.— The following are examples of each of the simple affixes, to be sounded as written : It in an nag, 5i!!! mig, girl lug, i!!! reg, all] thog.
1: 1? rang, ill-1' ming, QG' rung, at? theng, 512' hang. g as nad, 13$ yid, QR lad, is med, tit/R god. it QM Ian, 11% rin, ’38) kun, <58) len, {8| don. 1: 11:1 rab, in rib, gm thub, 611:: lab, at: thob. It QJN lam, iii rim, EQN gum, in" zem, it,“ 20m. Q 1W2 bkah, -— —— L It; mar, £1 mir, 51 gur, in. zer, 5/1 nor. ‘8 21¢! bal, 5‘31} Til, 5‘71 gal, 319] shel, 'ZI'QI yol. N QIN las, iw ris, QIN lus, 7W shes, Ill/N gos. (11)
The double ones : :w in new inn sew 511w R’Kw pags rigs lugs legs dogs cw was: dcw gut in: tilt-w sa ngs lings srungs rengs hongs rw arm 31w erw rim: 51w lhabs chhibs shubs khebs hobs aw JLNN iflw QNN firm: It“ rams rims sh ums sems soms Note—Besides these, there are yet, according to ancient orthography,‘three double affixes : es ml or nt, 15 rd or rt, and QIR ld or lt ; as in EWIWLI gsand-pa, he heard ; QLR'LI gyurd-pa, he became; and KIR‘JIQIR'Q gsold-pa, he begged or requested. Though this mode of writing is the more correct for designing the past tense, yet according to modern practice, the R is omitted ; and the above words are now written without the 5, thus: KWWLI, gill and “IQ/WU. §26. Some of the affixes enumerated above are only obscurely heard; some are left entirely silent (as the N in 5W, RN, 1W, 3W), and some change the preceding vowel. In Tibet, the final terminations -4V,‘9N,VN, (as, us, os,) are pronounced in three dif ferent ways, in different parts of the country. As Qw las, work, is sounded las, la, lé; gs! lus, the body., is pronounced lus, lu, lii, (ii, the French u ;) gs: chlros, religion, is pronounced chhos, ckho, chho, (6, the French eu.) And such is the practice with some other letters also, especially with the 8| and R (g and d.) The final 1N and 'W terminations are either pronounced accordingly as they are written, or the N is left silent. As in is], which is pronounced either ris or ri ,- and in 5w is sounded either sizes or she. And this is the case with some other letters also, especially with the It and g (g, d). Such is the practice with the aflixes. [t is proper to write and pronounce them regularly, as has been exhibited above. § 27. In the following abstract, from Nos. 1 to 209, is exhibited, how the basis of every word in the Tibetan language, together with the inherent a, should be written and pronounced ; and in continuation from Nos. 210 to 226, the aflixes or let ters following the vowel, are enumerated, together with their names and powers. The ---- v
(19) abstract, in this form, contains only the radical letters with the inherent a ; but, if to these roots be added the four vowel signs “, J, ‘,",_ (i, u, e, 0,) spelt in the ordinary manner: (viz. RI‘ ii‘ '3' 5|‘ $1’ or 1=I’\1Q' =vfi' 1131' 1451' 11%|’) followed by such atfixes, as may be required, then this abstract will comprehend every word of the Tibetan language. § 28. The several columns of the abstract contain respectively ; I. General num ber of letters in the whole scheme. Il. Particular number of each class of letters. lll. Roots in Tibetan, with the inherent a. IV. The same in Roman character. V. Power of those roots without any vowel taken grammatically. VI. Ditto vulgarly. Ansrnxcr or THE ORTHOGRAPHY AND Orvruonrv or THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. § 29. 1. The thirty simple letters of the alphabet:
I ll III IV v vr I n Ill iv v VI -—~—-' 1 M ka k — 16 1: ma m — 2 in klm kh - 17 3 tsa ts - 3 Kl ga g /c or q 18 $ ts/za ts/z - 4 ‘Z Tia fifllg‘ —- 19 é dsa. ds or dz 5 6 c/Ia ch — 20 Q; wa w v 6 5 c/aha c/zh -_ 21 Q z/za zh french j 7 E ja _j ch 22 "II za z — 8 Q 12 ya ny —- 23 Q /ta it - 9 B ta t _ 24 '8 ya y _ 10 8 t/ca th -—- 25 I, ra r - ll R da d t 26 QI la l - 12 A ml n -—- 27 H s/la s/2. -— I3 Ll pa p -—- 28 N sa s - 1-1 RI p/ta pl: -- 29 16 /z’a /l’ — 15 It ba b p, v 30 W é a —~ Note 1 *1 Ira rl klm K1 ga = *1 or k 2 z cha a c/aha Fjll = 4 or ch 3 r, m 51 1/la R da = R or t 4 Ar pa Hr pha 14 be = K1 or p 5 3 tsa 3, tsha I? dsa = S or ts That is, the three first letters-of each of the five series of the Tibetan alphabet, have nearly the same sound, according to the common pronunciation in Tibet, when heard by a stranger or foreigner whose ear cannot distinguish immediately the sharp or fiat, (13) aspirated and hard, letters. But it is expedient for the learner to write and pro nounce them accordingly ; since by this means only can a fundamental and correct knowledge of the Tibetan language be obtained.
§ 30. 2. The sewn letters having a subjoined '0,y. I II I“ iv v V] I II I" IV v V! 31 1 @ Icy“ ky _ _ 35 5 g phya phy = chh 32 2 rs k/tya [thy —- 36 6 Q bya by ch, 33 3 @ gya g3; - 37 7 g mya my ny 34 4 g pya py sh or ch
§ 31. 3. The fourteen letters having a subjoined 1, (r or“). 38 1 m km kr = t’ 45 8 2-] pm pr = t’ 39 2 r5 k/LTG Ichr t’h 46 9 IA pkra phr t’lt 40 3 51 gm gr (1’ 0f 1’ 47 10 5 bra br ’d 41 4 5 tra tr t’ 48 11 if mm mr —— 42 5 g tiara thr t’h 49 12 *3 s/zra shr $7; 43 6 S (Ira (11' ’d 50 13 N sra sr 8% 44 7 Q 11111 n? -— 51 14 $ h’ra h’r s’h
§ 32. 4. The six letters with a subjoined Q}, 1. 5'2 1 kid [cl = l 55 4 a 210. 21 = dor l 53 2 5] gla g! l 56 5 a rla rl l 54 3 fl bla bl l 57 6 xi sla sl 1
§ 33. 5. The fifteen letters having a surtnounting 1., r. 58 1 1h rka rk = I: 66 9 i rda rd = d 59 2 Q rlcya rky kg 67 10 3 ma rn 60 3 it rga rg g 68 11 fi rba rb b 61 4 Q, rgya rgy g3] 69 12 5' rma rm m 62 5 a riia rii ii 70 13 g rmya rmy my or ny 63 6 1‘ Ija j or 211 71 14 3‘ rtsa rts is or s 64 7 Q rnya my my 72 15 g rdsa rds ds or z 65 8 i rta rt t (14)
§ 34. 6. The ten letters having a surmounting 21,1. 11 111 1v v v1 1 11 111 1v v V!
73 l q llca lk = k 78 6 'g lla lt = t 74 2 a lg(1 lg g 79 7 a lda Id d 75 3 '2 liia Iii ii 80 8 '15 lpa lp p 76 4 'g lcha lch ch 81 9 “H lba lb 1) 77 5 ’g lja 82 10 'g lha lh 1’ § 35. 7. The twenty-two letters with a surmounting N, s.
83 l a ska slc = h 94 12 'g snm snr —.= nr 84 2 g skya sky hy 95 13 u spa sp p 85 3 a skm skr kr(t,s’h) 96 14 g spya spy py sh or ch 86 4 it sga sg g 97 15 fl spra spr pr, t’ 8 7 5 a sgya sgy gy 98 16 fl sba sb b 88 6 fl sgra sg'r gr ’d 99 17 g sbya sby by,jorzh 89 7 1; siia sit ii 100 18 i sbra sbr br or ’d 90 8 q snya say my 101 19 a sma sm m 91 9 g sta st t 102 20 g smya smy my or ny 92 10 {I sa'a sd 103 21 ! smra smr an 93 11 'g sna sn n l 104 22 *3: stsa . stsa s § 36 8. The eleven simple letters preceded by a 81, g. 105 1 1162 gchah gch = ch ' 111 7 Kifiq gzhah gzh = zh 106 2 BIQQ gnyah gny ny i 112 8 KIZTQ gzah gz 1 07 3 Km gtah gt t . 113 9 Iraq gyah gy 108 4 KIRQ gdah gd (1 I 114 10 5W2 gsha-h gsh sh 109 5 Kim gnah gn n l 115 ll KWQ gsah gs s l 10 6 KIZQ glsah gts is ' § 37. 9. The fifteen simple and double letters having a R d, prefix.
116 1 g’qq dhah dk = k 121 6 RE] dgra (lgr gr d’ or 117 2 R5 dkya dhy ky 122 7 REQ diiah (in ii 118 3 R5] dkra (lkr hr t’ 123 8 RUQ dpah dp p 119 4 RKIQ dgah dg' g 124 9 Kg dpya dpy py,sh or ch 120 5 Kg dgya dgy gy 125 10 as dpra dpr pr or t’ (15)
It In IV v VI 1 II III w v VI 126 11 5.112 dual; dv v w 128 13 sq (lvm dvr 111'
' 0 129 14 RNQ dmah dm m
127 12 Kg dvya dvy vy or y 130 15 \Q dmya dmy my, ny § 38. 10. The forty-five simple, double, and triple letters having a “q, or b prefix.
131 1 mm bIcah bk = k 154 24 um blah bl =t 132 2 1513 bIcya bky Icy 155 25 “qt, brta brt l 133 3 1151 bkra bkr kr, t’ 156 26 111'; blla blt t 134 4 I13] bkla bIcl Icl or I 157 27 11!! bsta bst t 135 5 11m brlca brIc It 158 28 IIRQ bdah bd d 136 6 try brkya. brky ky 159 29 111* brda brd d 137 7 I13 bsIca bs/c /c 160 30 11'! blda bid d 138 8 1:13 bs/cya bslcy kg 161 31 It! bsda bsd d 139 9 H3 bsIcra bskr Icr,t’(sk) 162 32 1;; [mm [,m n 140 10 IIKIQ bgah bg g 163 33 11% bsna bsn n 141 11 Its bgya bgy gy 164 34 trio blsah bts is 142 12 1113 bgra bgr gr, (1’ 165 35 1113 brlsa brts ts, a 143 l3 Itil brga brg g 166 36 It? bstsa bsts s 144 14 115 brgya brgy gy 167 37 It? brdsa brds z 145 15 NH bsga bsg g 168 38 1iqu bzhah bzh zh 146 16 151:5 bsgya bsgy gy 169 39 IIZQ bzah b2 2 17 rig bsgra bsgr gr, ’d 170 40 113 bzla bzl d 147 18 111% briia brii ii 171 41 In brIa hr! 1 148 19 I“; bsiia bsr‘i ii 172 42 1132 bshah bs/z sh 149 20 1182 bchah bch ch 173 43 IWQ l)8(l/l bs s 150 21 qt brja brj j or z]: 174 44 11W bsra bsr sr, s’h 151 22 ‘q‘é brnya brny 11y 175 45 81 bsla bsl 152 153 23 U3 bsnya bsny ny § 39. 11. The fifteen simple and double letters having a it, m, prefix. 1 £er mkhah m/c/r = kk 179 4 NKIQ mgah mg = 176 g 2 1:;{5 mkhya rnkhy Icky 180 5 HQ mgya mgy 177 8'? 3 N15 mkhra mkhr khr, t’It 181 6 its] mgm mgr gr, ’d 178 (16)
11 Ill Iv v VI I II III IV v V!
182 7 “=2 miiak mii ii 187 12 8W2 mdalt md = (1
183 8 an mchhak mchh = chk 188 13 W2 mnah mn 71 I84 9 N52 mnyahmjah mymny ny 189 14 area m tshak mtsh tsh 185 10 use 190 15 use mdsak mds ds 186 11 NEW mlhak mlk th 12. The nineteen simple and double letters having a Q, h, prefix. 191 l QF‘Q hkkak hkh = kk 201 ll ‘23 hdm lldr = dr, ’d 192 gwchaoiaww 215 hkhya hkky khy 202 12 am lip/rah hph pk 193 Q75 hkhra hkkr kkr, t’k 203 I3 as hpkya hphg/ play, ckk 194 QNQ Inga/z hg g 204 14 Q! hpkra hp/tr phr, t’k 195 10 (a hgya hgy g9 205 15 QIIQ hbah hb b 196 hgra hgr gr, (1’ 206 l6 Qs hbya hby by,j 197 lickhak hchh chh ' 207 l7 Qs hbra hbr br, ’11 198 hjahhtkah hjhth tit 208 I8 QéQ htskak htsk tsk 199 209 19 QEQ lidsa hds ds 200 hdah hd (I § 4]. 13. The ten simple and four double affixes.
210 ga g = k or q 217 8 JL
211 ~10>°Its°°ie~ iia fig 218 9 R]
212 da d t 219 10 w sa s mute 213 na n 220 ll Kw gs the s is
214 ba b p 221 12 as: ngs mute 215 ma m 222 13 as bs in all
226 ha —h 223 14 aw 7" S these To which may be added the following:
224 15 as nd or nt 226 17 815 Id or It
225 16 LR rd or rt OBSERVATIONS. 1. 1n the above abstract of the orthography and orthoépy (of this language) forming 209 combinations, classed under 12 heads, is exhibited the basis of every word in the Tibetan language. (l7)
2. Many of these syllables, as they now stand, are significant words; others become so by the addition of' any of the aflixes (enumerated under the 13th head). 3. In all these syllables the vowel a is inherent, and must be pronounced with the same tone, as in ‘ far’ or ‘ father’ in English. It must be remembered that every syllable in the Tibetan language, where there is no apparent vowel sign, must be pronounced with the inherent a; as in G r‘ia ; LG rang; 215W lags; new“: bsams, 8w. 4. This inherent a is visible, and expressed by the letter Q, in such syllables, as have a prefix before the simple radical (or fundamental) letter, and when there fol lows no consonant closing the syllable. But when the radical or fundamental letter is a compound one, or when there follows a consonant (or two consonants) after the radix, the a vowel is inherent, and must always be pronounced. It is visible in syllables like the following words:
mm ktah, pawn, pledge, bail. NRQ mdah, an arrow. 3qu dgah, joy, pleasure. l QKIQ hgah, some, any. two bkalt, a precept, commandmentl
and inherent in such syllables or words as follow : as] dgra, an enemy. 115W bkas, split or cleft asunder. rm bska, bitter (taste). awng mdang's, the forehead ; yester Q5 lidra, like, similar. day R511. dgar, a separating. Q'aflt llgram, the jaw, 8w, are written 5. All and words pronounced or syllables, as has in thisbeen tongue, explained. having Those the that inherent have orany visible of the a four vowels (i, u, e, 0,) marked thus :“,¢,‘,", are formed of the same'209 syllables, as have been already exhibited in alphabetical order, by adding the vowel signs. Thus the whole may be formed into a syllabic scheme, to which if the afiixes (enumerated under the 13th head) he added as may be required, every word in the Tibetan lan guage will then be comprehended in this scheme. The whole may be spelt in the same manner, as here is exhibited with the first syllable of each of the 12 heads : as, (18) 1x11... ski flku fiké film 2 g kya a) kyi g kyu 5 kyc' :5] kyo 3 s [cm ti kri 3 km s lrré if km 4 s kla £1 Mi 5 1.1.. a me 51’ Ho 5 ti rka Iii rki #1 rku *‘I rké *i’ rim 6 9;; 11m Q lki a llcu it lhé if lko 7 at ska it ski gsku i ské till sko 8 IIle gchah =13 gchi 515 gchu 513 gché Biz gcho 9 am dkah 58 dki sag dku an dké vil’ dko 10 um bkah qfi bki rm him as bké nfi’ him 11 atrBQ mkhah an? mkhi N3 mkhu mi mkhé ani' mkho 12 QFQ llkhah Q13 hkhi QB hkhu Q15 h/rhé Qli'hkho 6. With respect to the affixes (enumerated under the 13th head, from the 210th to 226th number) it must be remarked, that these are the only letters of the Tibetan alphabet that close a syllable, or follow any vowel; they likewise enjoy the office of initials : but thatthe 20 other letters of the alphabet, (as ‘1' [I T 5' 6' F' q I 17' a r q' 147 5' 8' 5' ‘21 T 61' ‘3' '41 fit W W I) never close the syllable, or never are put after any vowel, but only occur as initial letters. § 42. The following is an Abstract exhibiting those simple and compound let; ters that have a similar sound, according to the common practice in Tibet. a ka Kr tr ar a' We saw rur as = "l = ka e' s -- 3 R152 as as' as e kya :1 3' Rs' rm 'rta (v' a' H' RH' fl') 5] Pa
3] I“ (a. H. 34 a. a. I“. ,8. Q) q [a a kha [i' am' we a 1.1... [5' we as re khya w my es (s' s' as) rs Ma 81 ga II when simple, in general It“ 01‘ 90 er *I' a' tr 5812' 1w: stir rut'mle' Q‘lQ' e g“ e' e' g' as we as' It! 812' as gya er s' \s' as" my wa' 2216's) ‘1’“
* Pronounced both la and da. (19)
a (see 31 and Q1) 11 la ‘2 via 'i' 5' 11] 1' “2' It?" 11% iia 6 cha z' '3' MQ' new (32' g) cha 6 chha as new em (5' es) chha Fja when simple, commonly . . c’ha 15' t' 'g' “752' QFQ Q'QQ' g . . ja q nya q' is s' new as as e" 5' we nya
fiv if lav “v vqfiv avgv qgv 11 ta ta 2; (see ’3) . . - t t’a atha a' WEQ' QEIQ' tha sda R when simple, commonly K ta s' b 11' e' W? Itaq'flsq' QsQ' 1:" 1W} 1n" s; a da 5' Q3 (see I51) . . d’a 11 na q' 1r '1' MQ' 1W my me a, nu Q' 'g . . . . ma '4 [m s' u' it W2 (1:) q pa H (see 5]) . . . , t’a 53' g = sh or ch, see 6 and ‘1
14 pha 74' QUQ 0 0 0-. H 5' Qg (see 3) . . . . chha
‘5' Q'fi (see 1'5) . . . . t’ha 'qba when simple in the beginning pa 11' fi' '8' it we 1;; - ba
Ti' R'QQ' $1 - - va forQseeF; H seen; Eiseeslandq It' 5v 31' Raw . . . . e' i" a' as (see *1) ~ nya a' a . . . . mm i tsa 3' HZQ' m (s' '3' as s) - - sta it tsha 8' miQ' QiQ .. .. tsha é dsa é' néq' Qi-“Q' I} . . dsa {ja} (29)
95 wa <21‘ we rt . va or wa ti] zka @' =1@<2' Iraq (fig) .. zha
‘Z0 2' =1aQ' um (Ir qi) . . za 5 see 5 and Q1 . . . . Q ha Q‘ w . . .. . a '0 ya vr Iraq. (as) ...... ya
1 ra 1 ...... ra Q1 la Q1 (tr sr tr s' tr was aw) - . la» Fl slza rr =1eQ' nee (sag) . . . . . s/z ‘B (‘T $9 s’h . . . . s’hra
‘Vsa Wa er Q ...... a From this extensive catalogue, the student of this language will perceive, what a great difference there is in writing and pronouncing Words (according to common practice), and how essential it is to know the words in their proper characters, to be able to judge of their true meaning. ALPHABETICAL SCHEME OF THE SANSKRIT LANGUAGE, WHEN WRITTEN IN TIBETAN cnsascrens. § 43. The Tibetans having early adapted their own characters (formed in imitation of the Nagari letters), to write the Sanskrit, the student of the Tibetan language should be acquainted with this scheme also, that he may distinguish the two different languages, and read the Sanskrit accordingly. Here follows a scheme of the Sanskrit Alphabet, as it is generally known to Europeans, both in Nagari and Roman characters, rendered by their equivalents in Tibetan. Vownns. Sans.'ita$nt'tIiiiquqfiflriqgrialigli Tib. w 1+; vi vg vs Q 1 5; Q? 5,1, Sans. 1;; e 1: 0s at . an —\ 0 wt \ an it - Mg W11/t Tib. 15: Q 1.? it?’ st wt 4. .a._..-_ _ __ _ (21) , CousoNAN'rs. Rik [Ikh Klg agh Gng; its gtsh éds équh any; qt’lst’h for fifth @Ich Itg sigh fi'ng; flCh Echh Srj Hf jh Sing; Z't’ at’h Pd’ ,fd’h Fn’; Fit ath 3d I'Snlih am,- Np Idph Ill) gbh Wm,- ltty JLrQIl ed’tad’h Ill'n’;1‘1‘l nth Kd adh an; up flip/l ab 111111 arm-11y Ira! it v or w 11 sh F! s’ N s a ll, ’25 Icsh, 9% jr‘iyd. avorw arsh 'qs’ as 1h, laksk, 5r jiiyd. The Sanscrit Vowels are joined to the Consonants, thus : 8| kit I}; 1ch file? 53‘ hi ’3 kit 52’ In? 5' kr‘e’ L51: hr? ii Icé it'lkai Iii/[co fig/can Kikang K18 kale and so on with all the thirty-four consonants. The 3, 'r l w are subjoined thus: g Icy a hr :5] [cl '2 kw, and so on with the rest. The nasal ii is expressed variously by i, 713/, 16,12, m, accordingly as it is followed by letters of different classes (with respect to the organs). One letter is placed above another (or is doubled) thus: I}; kk 1; khIch 5‘1 ggg ghgh I-‘i 115, &c. The sur mounting r is placed thus: i rb, it rm, *1 rk, i1 rg 1 1% Ngdi Sarva mangalam. § 44. A list of contracted words, to show the manner in which such contrac tions may be made in writing (especially in the small characters), and how such words should be pronounced entirely : 51,31 for gwatisiq, all-knowing. its] _ Qq'fiw, omniscient. firm — QQ'MQMN, all-seeing. gab -- news}, from every place. fiffi _- gii'él'q, entirely vain, not real. fin] __ gq'sfiw, misery, natural corruption. Ilitfii — FNN'KIQN, the three regions or worlds. E‘s/Q -— aria, the cheek. Q’s] _ g'itgll, the chief of any herd or flock; a bull, ram, &c. a BUDDHA. @: — QQ'iq', extension and length. gs, - @6'34'5, Without extent. G <22) EN'QIR, name ofa star or constellation. for gram, a tent’s top, or upper part. yin, be it, let it be, may it be. gauge, a harbour, port, haven. g'fi'q, a boattnan’s fee. g'qfi, quadrangular; a square. strait, one that has found the supreme perfection, a sage, a saint. 5:151, a town, a city. ilxlw'mt, a volume, a book. 51521 Kig'nm, importance, matter. 115‘: ngq'fia', a pestle. new V naw'if, fierce, cruel. Kiss nst'az, a shrine where relics are deposited. 813% ¢\/ Kiss'qéq, ditto. 5135 ngq'g, a bracelet, a ring ; an ornament. ngq'iqll, a head-band ; an excrescence on the head. £151. K1511 1:} gain, an arched roof. K15 6w Ing'qi’wv, a fathom, two yards. 5185 V rid/$5, young, a young man. Kris — mg'fiq', a lever, a bar. as V — Bla'it', straight, upright. mafiq'qsa— 513619812351, it aches, it is in pain. ail. 51381'5'1. or $1111, pain, dolour. sang . KIBKIN'g, the image ofa BUDDIIA, 8w. mange .- KBKW'gII, a handsome body. n55 Inglww‘m, incorporeal. K1511 IISWIJI, chief precept; sacred scriptures. gl'fil'l, faint red colour ; a garb of ditto. 6'3W,a part, portion. Q'RZ‘Q‘QI, the middle of a river, Sac. (93) s __ Q'iiq, a crocodile, a dolphin. .< a! £12501, a miraculous change of one’s self, Ste. _- 3'5, twenty. a“), 619'3-‘09 — t‘a‘q'sc, mid-day, noon. aq'atqlv, misery, sin. J)3‘9 1'1J1 Z — (\ 119 .91\ __ fiq'qéq deep meditation, ecstasy. ait'q, entire, integral. aatw'ss, all, the whole. Q'W'fil, generosity, liberality. grw'ttfi, mercy, love, affection. ga'ttii, the four watches of night. fi-rté‘s'niqvu, a Tathdgaza. 5W3, in the time of, at the time of, &c. SEQ/G, an hermit, a rishi. QG'v‘lKl, a clerk, secretary, amanuensis. KNIFE/<11, porcelain, China-ware. sh'q'fis’n, God. ski/XXL, wealth, riches, treasure. 55mm}, 1, a circle, mandal. Rflfi'all, the meridian line. REI'QZA, the clergy, priesthood. Rfi'E‘I/G, a priest, monk, friar. sfi'anw, virtuous manners. \e/N'grt, natural, real. gqm'rsq, noble, illustrious. magma, assembled troops; an army. gqq'glq, IsIm-ara, Jupiter. 33'5", a turban; a crown. RNKI'Ril'q, a general. as: '(flfit'figfi, a troop of soldiers or warriors. (24) for swam, the void space above, heaven. jqié'lqw, the wmtnm quarter of the world. $335 a gem. gag/Kw, perfect, best. . gn'qtim'df, reverence be to, or I adore, &c. Iafi'QlN, affair, business, commission. gs'afi', fuel, wood for fire. gs'a‘m, the female sex, a woman. iii-1'5, an ass. 5’31“: s'glw, a flock of birds. 51w gc'é’lw, the northern quarter. g'q swan, a Bodhisatwa. é’el'tvlli, a beast, a quadruped. Q: sat \ sari, a brahnian. gs Early, a fool, idiot. first fil'lfilw, prudence, understanding. as as fi/Q'Ql, an officer, magistrate. Nil“: Itfil'a‘v, blessings ; glory. 14%“ qg'llilq, eleven. as“! ngfiw, twelve. as“ qg'filgat, thirteen. 1:3. qg'qé), fourteen. use qg'fil-q, sixteen. as!» UQTISFI, seventeen. was V qz'qéq, eighteen. 1134i qi'at'gq, BHAGAVAN. saw V0 qi'et'stfi'Q’i‘V. Ditto all qfiq'tml, respect, reverence; civility, politeness. nfilw Hfi'IlleW, a Sugata, BUDDHA. qgs'ii, the food of immortality, nectar. i sis "‘33: ng'fi'tv, any od0riferous incense. age gfirqi QY, distress, misery, afiliction. (25) was for fli‘h'ng, industry, diligent application. risé'w Wat/R'QNN, moral merit, happiness. 11%“! \"l ‘IIQI/R'Q/NN, alms. R531. fin'vu, the planet Mars. sew g'gfiw, a Tirthika, a Hindu, not Buddhist. 3'51, famine. g'filq, a pearl. grim, name of a precious stone. it'filfil, a flower. it'd/K, a mirror, a looking glass. 5'“, misery. ' JIle Q'si', walking in the void space above, a D’d/cini. st'iq, a holy shrine, fane, a Chaitya. atqwzt/R, name of a city (S. Shravasli). aaQ'ngrt a barbarous country. Marga, perfect, arrived at perfection, emancipated. NQQ'JYG, common. arit'fi’c, the thumb. Mai/EN, Swerga, paradise. uéa's‘is, criterion, definition by its criteria. 501'“, sandal wood. gags, regular. éQI'rgew, morality ; good morals. 6",“51, a beam of light. avg ‘11, white brightness. Q‘i'il, letter, a letter or epistle. aims, is it P wQ'QJKl, a number, limb; part. it‘iw, fore-knowledge, wisdom. 'Zr'iraa, good quality. iii‘isa, of great value, precious metal. a (26) “"g I 2:a \ for fungal, a country having many defiles. M4 I“! é'atg, the sea, ocean. QQJ'iI', a prince, king. ngtwuaQ<é ZZ06g231, 2 3‘am itat'iw, cognition, knowledge. fiat'qu, enumeration, specification. $81M, the plural sign g'QgQI, a miraculous change ; juggle, Evin, born in a miraculous or supernatural manner. (inw'gl, elegant or fine composition ; Sanscrit. J‘)4 d’cw‘g’q, wealth, substance. Qltw'g, an emanated person (of the divinity). 515W, iron, fetters. anvfi’n, chains or fetters of iron, for the feet of a malefactor TW'L‘q, wit, understanding. iw'g, what is to be known, science, learning. NRN'QN, the most perfect Being, a BUDDHA. tilt-1'51, a lion. Raw, the soul. new“, animal being. iINN'RLJQ, a valiant soul, a saint. dicta/'q, different, various. shied/1, asunder, differently. 2g, QQtN‘EIKI, let him mind or reflect on. “fi’’5’{.35it15it fi’q'qfi/q, a teaching master, professor. ii’wqfi's, one desirous of learning. fill'fiq, a scorpion. *g'ilw, all sort of, various. QMN'NEII, a menacing finger. (27) gv-qiinivfor yi'LN'Kl‘g'IW, Chan-ras gzigs (vulg. Chenrézi,) (S. Avalokitee warn.) iii; -- gn'ii, honey. @q __ gain, together, in company with. gs: -- 'QQ'QN, a colleague in an office (that uses the same seal with his colleague). £81“! —— gig/KW, the southern quarter or corner. ABBREVIATION or Names 0R. Worms. gfi’q'fi’q -- fiiq'sfi/Q'Rq's‘jiq'u, the master and the pupil. Q‘f'up — fil'é'q'fiq'lig'fi, Lotsdva (interpreter, translator) and pandit. w'qp _- N'g'qgfi, Sa-s/rya pandita, (a celebrated poet, learned man, and LAMA, in Tibet, in the 13th century.) @Qrfi'q —- BQI'l‘ll'Rl-I'fillfi'ill, the king and the officers (or ministers). BYQ'Q'QRN — file'fif'RG‘QIU-IN'QI'ii, the ofl‘icers and the subjects, or people. egg-5;, __ qq'q'gc'gq'q, light and darkness. rfiaratoiai -- iiq'if'sq'atéwif, day and night. N‘KMN —- N'Kla'sfi'fllqlt'q, earth and heaven. Q55] -- IZ'RWQR'N, husband and wife. 14'“ -- U'RR‘B, the father and his child. at'“ — N'RR'B, the mother and her child. g'qg' - $'1i"5c'(qq'k\i’, a grandchild (or nephew) and maternal uncle. m'qfi'q — iiw'il/Rfi'i'tl', grandfather and grandchild. qzwgq __ inn-ng'gc'glq'it, verse and prose. qxlq'qgs -- qnq'gq'qgarqgv, the Kah-gyur and Stan-gyur, (S. Veda and Shastra.) g'fi’g -- a'lqrqt'ir's, India and Tibet. or @‘QKI'RR'IiiR, China and Tibet. gii'fizq — gir'q'st'Qqu, virtue and vice. qwsygq _ gtqw'qqxrqqc'fiq'q'gqq, the acquiring of virtue and purifi cation of sins (or confession). E'silq —- E'N'Rfi'tiilri'fl, the LAMA (or Guru) and his disciple. (23) Qill'ii/q for Qii'q'gt'is'q, going and sitting (or remaining, tarrying). grid/g — i'su'rtfifs'qew, life and moral merit. 51.0}qu _ niifq'fil'gzz'qfiq'ill, the living and the dead. fiw'tu, -- fiw'af'st'ux'fl, a written book or manuscript, and a printed book. sprain — fin'é'st'g'fl, ink and pen. *gq'iilfil —— ‘gil'i'fiq'ifq'g, ink and paper. m'gq __ wq'ga'gw or fl'at'st'sj/II'N, father and son, or the master and the pupil. qpiquvv_- Qli/L'II'RR'EC'QRN, rotatory migration (or worldly existence) and deliverance from pain (or from bodily existence). Such is the method which the Tibetans observe in contracting syllables or abbreviating words. § 45. Some ADVENTITIOUS PARTICLES. There occur frequently among the parts of speech some adventitious particles, many of which are oflike meaning, differing only in orthography, on account of the final letter of the preceding word. Some of them require a short explanation in this place. § 46. RI' [1' Klz—All these three denote a sort of definitive article. They are used thus: Kl after 11' R' 11' N‘; as in 581W all the six; qéq'sl the spring season; g‘qwl the west or the very evening ; Blfwwl both, or all the two. 7 [I after JI'L'QJ ; as in ir/Irrl the autumn ; Karl's the summer season ; $2111 the gaining the field, the being victorious. These (and other words of the same nature) occur either thus: gqs'n, RQLR'RI, and QQIR'RI, according to ancient orthography, or without the R as above given. =1 after ‘2‘ N' Q, or any vowel ; as in 51%“! the gut or the entrails; 51381"!!! all the three; i'll the mountain, hill ; 813'!!! both. But they are frequently confounded. § 47. QR' QG' WE', are conjunctions; too, also; though, although; QR' is used after 51' 5' WM; as in an'gli' though there is (or be) ; [as'gq' thou also ; EIIYJ'QG' though he finds; FW'QG' although he knows. QR is used after any vowcl; as in R2: lalso; 32? whatever; ‘2‘!)qu though he go or goes. (29) w; is used after G'Q‘N'Q'L'Ql, as well as after any vowel; as in Kiq'vaa, whichsoever; idi'Qtr-t, the very price; qu'sta, never; G'mz, 1 also; NL'WG, butter also; mm'wc'fi'qsn, inha bited place even is not to be found there (or there is even no village). §48. 51 '31 $1 6 or Vii are genitive signs, denoting ’s, of, or pertaining, belonging, relating to. {j is used after 5' 111' N 5 as in of Tibet; art'fi of the west, western ; Qatari) of the soul or the soul’s, 8:0. 1‘91 is used after 81' G' ; as in mq'lii of me, mine ; 3G"?! ofa wood. 3‘ occurs after 6' it' 1' 0.1; as in £Q'é‘, of the price; Qtfl'é, of the road; Klfil'fi, of gold ; igqré‘ ofa country ; 516 or 51w“ ofa man, a man’s, human. I § 49. 56 I 5‘15 I §Jn ‘36, or '36 correspond to the English participial termination -ing. Put after the root of a verb, they, form, with the auxiliary QSKI, the continuative indica tive present ; as in §Y§qulbhe is doing; til/M'fifi'QSKI, he is reading; ga'é‘fi'qsll, he is ShOWing 01‘ teaching ; 251,511, 01' Qi's‘is'qsll, he is going. 'They are used _after the same letters respectively, as have been enumerated above for § 50. 5‘11 3N1 §NT 6N, (or instead of it, JV), and Iain, are the signs of the instrumental case, signifying, by, with ; as in lg/S'fiw, by thee ; HRII'E‘I‘N, by me ; qfil'élv, with or by gold ; 5W or it"tiw, 'with or by fire. They are used after the same letters as said abme ofg“ &c. @111 &c. §51_ up," ca," gar qu' rm" New th' 1W QIN' Wit and W are all of the same power, and are formed of the preceding word, by reduplicating its final letter, and affixing the It. They are interrogative signs, or expressadoubt; whether? whether or not P The term alt is used only in the perfect tense after I" 1' Q] (for AG' 131' Q15) ; as for example: Q5ll'8181,is there P Q/G'CN, is gone P QYR‘RN, is there F 136131, is it P Eq'qu, have you found P Q'Q‘EIIQN, shall 1 go P or whether 1 go P MQIL'LN'qsqi, whe. ther is it gold or silver P RstII'QIN'W-KW, Silver or copper P AW'NN, do you know P EWW‘BN (for KWQR'BN), have you heard P {51:30: (for réxg'aa), has he carried away P Elsi/wait (for Wayne), has he begged or asked P ‘ § 52_ IE" 3,4 $1" $1" Y' grand if are likewise all of the same power, and are formed of the preceding word, by reduplicating its final letter, and adding the o vowel sign (V). They have the power of the substantive verb, am, art, is, are; l (30) or of do, have. They are frequently used with the present, perfect, and future tenses. The term TY ought to he used only in the perfect tense, after 6' L' Q! (for therea? 13' is; 25') v‘iq'i, : for it example is; : hasQSKI'EII, found; is, there QM'J‘J’, is it; ifq'el, is a road; is gone; 515/, iC'al,it is a it man; is long G'Qil/Q, ; I go, or am going; I will go; qgl'i', it will become; llt'illm'il. l beg,l request, 81.0. ; emu“): it is well, well! nwrfi’ (for ans'if). l have heard; gl'fi' (for gls'if), he has become ; EWIQI': (for Kid/213%), he has begged or requested. §53. (351' $181, after a substantive denote the indefinite article : a, an, any. After the imperative, conjunctive present, or hortative mood, they may be ren dered in English by, let, may. '38] is used after II' R' It (and sometimes after the inherent 0) thus : gn'glq, a sheep ; 524531", a vessel ; still, an evening. a night ; l'l'gll, some, somebody. And again, in verbs: 51’81'351, read, let him read, he may read; A/R'iil, explain, tell, let him explain ; 1111'381, make ready, prepare, let him prepare, 8:0. (381 is used after G' 8r 8i" Q' I: 21 thus: [It'd-1‘81, a house ; Qlfi'ail, an answer ; Qlfl'é‘lq, a road; QIIQ'QKI, anybody; a‘i'r‘q‘n, a man; Nill'fill, a fort or castle ; fi-Il'é‘il, a crystal. And again, with verbs, thus: nd'vdn (for KIQIIAR'SII), hear, let him hear ; flit'fq‘q, let him die, perish ; N'I'riill, say not, let him not say ; ifl'é‘lil (for :YLR'ERI), turn round, let him turn; BIKYQI'é‘II (Md/Qtfi'gll), beg, ask of him, let him beg. fifil is used after N thus : BYN'AII, a garment; RI’NN'fiM, let him mind. § 54. 3W (3? 3G express the participial termination ing in English, and are a sort of statistical adverb. They are used after such letters as has been stated above for in? an' $11!]. Examples : Fit/Q'SG', reading; nanw'fic, having read over or perused ; g'r'q‘q, speaking or saying; IN'fiG', having spoken or said. § 55. S'QNT G'QN t it'Qlt thus, or or a sort of adverbs. Example: Qa'fifi' 3'5T 5'5]! 5'2], thus so, thus says he, 8m. 3N'1N'fzi',he said so. 3m (Irv; 5w, so, thus; 3'6151'4515'8“ conjunction for: indeed,l pray, pray ; as in S'Es'i'q, what do you, I pray ; 2'§1'<§'q, why I pray you ; gar Klng'irq, pray by whom was it ordered, (or said,) commanded. In all the particles, thus enumerated, the 5 is used after Fr 3' II ; the @I after (31) c' 65' 84' Q' 1' OJ; and the fi' after N', in the same manner as We have seen above, in SKI é‘m an. § 56, 5' 5' is or 1' g are dative, adverbial, infinitive future, and gerund signs, sig nifying: to, for, &c. a is used after WI! and fi'l'QI (for IF" 15' <15) ; as in 51'81'3, for reading, or to be read; Sit'n back, towards the back or behind ; 5pm (for 3851;) everywhere. 3 is used after G' 5' 8r it' 1' Q] ; as in KIG'S whither, to what place? {$3, to Tibet ; qu'g, in answer to QIN's'QQf'II, going on ajourney ; 81's, to the east ; 311135, into India; “Q’WQ'QQI'S Eli/=21, I beg to commend me, &0. 5 or I. after Q or any vowel, thus: QN'NIBQ‘Q or Mt'itllr le'n, flying to heaven, (or into the air above ;) Qa'b or an. hither ; ifs or £1 thither. g is used after N, thus : Kl'tw'g, to the right (hand or side) ; sn'é’lw'n, to, towards, on at, the western quarter or corner of the world. § 57. if i' i joined to the participle present, or verbal root, form a sort of statistical adverb; as qglq'fi, sitting, or in a sitting posture ; in like manner with the perfect participle, as gw'fi, having said. The i is used after WL'Q'N; the a after 5, and the§ after Br c' W N' m Examples: “WW5, hearing; QBl'h, carrying; qq'i, lying (on the ground) : QNW'E, meditating; til/Ti, being ; gxl'fi, running; Qiq'i, stand ing erect; iii/Iii, teaching; {its}, imagining ; g'fi, saying. ' § 58. q}are participial, adjective, verbal noun, and substantive terminations, or a *4 sort of article. :1 is used after KI'R' 81' II' W'N; as in it’sl'll, reading; "YEW, being; $611, showing; iii/“Q11, teaching ; iit'u, restraining; A'v'u, knowing. _ 'q is used after G‘ W L' Q! ; as in <‘2/G'It, coming ; QRQ'", passing away ; Qrfi'wq, going ; Qgrq, changing; QQQJ'H, offering, presenting. But in many substantives (not ver bal) the 14 is used after every consonant ; as in aq'qfivalley; itaQ'qpnedwelling on the boundary of a country; first, one of the east ; QQI'LI, a country man, villager. § 59, u1}are dative, adverbial, and infinitive signs, signifying : to, for, &c. They are 1111 used respectively after the letters before stated. Examples: qn'qx, into the hand ; NQ’IW'QL, speedily ; 51/5131, to read; i'ql, into the ear; qwqaql, clearly ; é'q'ql, to come. i (32) § 60. 1w}pron. vulg. pé are comparative signs, signifying : than, more than ;and an vé the pluperfect participle also is sometimes formed by these particles added to the perfect participle. Examples: é'fl'qw'q'qn'dl'v‘iq, I am more black than thou (or you) ; G'IW' afi'fifil'fil'fiQ, thou art more white than I; éw'giv'nw, after having said thus, or thus having said; gira'isql'wv, after having given into his hand (or presented to him). The terms KW and TIN 3180 are used With the same distinction (with respect to the preceding final letter) as before stated. § 61. £1, express the definite article ‘ the.’ Ll’is used, in general, after consonants, and ii 13/ after vowels. But in verbal nouns that denote an agent, the I; may be used after a vowel also; as in Qi'll'zl/ (for Qil'q'af) the, or a, walker. Examples of the if being used after consonants: 518111,, the eye ; Elli'l‘ll, the tree or wood ; the indigent, poor; NPWQ', the master, teacher ; deep or the deep ; QIN'Q’, the road, way ; 311.111, the canal ; word], the country, inhabited place. Ili'after vowels is used thus : [1'15' the mouth ; i'tl'the mountain ; 3'15, the water or river ; it'fi/ the fire ; Nif'fi'the head. § 62. aq'Qt-I'I 56'111-1'1 (ll/Q'fiq't conjunction—though, although. In all these, the terms @G' i aq' I 5!? may be used indiscriminately. SPECIMENS or THE aEsPECTrUL LANGUAGE. The Tibetans employ different words from those in common use (especially for denoting the several parts of the body, meat, drink, clothes or garments, furniture, equipage, and various actions of men) when speaking respectfully to, of, or before superiors; and such terms frequently occur in their books also. To give an idea of them, here follow some specimens of the respectful language (é'wfi'as' zhé-saki skad) together with the common or vulgar idiom NQN'KIBN, mnyam glam (speech used to equals.) Respectful term. Common term. Respectful term. Common term. um, father, . . a yawn, the body, . . nasw (u) not, mother, . . at avast, ditto, . . gut-LY were}:5w, son, daughter, . . I. . .. 5g'h' g'Q/s, of the the body, upper part or . trunk . 2“?le win, name, . . . . iiq' gag, the lower part of ditto, swan, 3, person, the body, . . NBKW (if) g'gq, the back of ditto, 51-1 (33) Est-2', the breast, . . . . 5" Hungry, the bone, relics, . . 5N“! H's), the belly, . . . . fig/'21 g'i, one’s life or age, ..é H'n, the flesh of the body,. . It 311111, a great man’s resi g'NQQJ, the blood of ditto,. . [551 deuce or castle, . . . . arm. and in like manner many other words denoting parts of the body, or having relation to a great personage, may be formed respectfully, by prefixing the. particle g, sku. The following are other specimens of the respectful form of expression: 55, the head, . . . . N81, ,gswq?’ the tip of the tongue, 'll‘ii‘ qg'g, the hair of the head, . . 1g; ’EKW'X, the root of ditto, . . 'i'g 55g, a hat or cap, . . . . q'dir’ FIRM, the nose, . . . . 1 55'55,a turban, a crown, . . g5 ewv's, ditto, . . . . ditto. 55'Né5, a president, a head HCN'g‘, the tip of the nose, . . T1? man, ...... Qlfi'w 15551155, the nostrils, . . FL‘BC 55255, a capital letter, . . . . Nil/'56 go, the eye, . . . . 5i!!! 55115, a small character, . . “1514515 gq'st, the apple or ball of 5338», a headman, a master, . . stfi'gfi'ill the eye, ...... 51$in RB'QR, a mate, . . . . Qirq'gc'q gawk/8|, the eye-lash, . . 51511159 await-z, the face, .. .. qfi’c'i-q sees... the eye-lid, .. i‘m'aaw 6121, the mouth, _ |z gs, the ear, . . . . 3'1: QQI'QFW, the lip, . . . . rv'gmw “'55:, the ear-hole, . . . . 3'35 esrélv, $31101, the flap ofthe ear, . . #1121 }meat, food, . . ZN or WEN @‘Zi'atv, qum», hearing with the ear, #51,“! @QI'Q/N, drink, . . . . all/N girl, the hand, . . . . QIKIT-LI awaits, a spittle-box, . . £32815 SKI'EI‘IW, the righhhand, . . 2151112121 qorimw, testament, last will, ll'iipv gn'm‘i’q, the left-hand, . . summits qqrmvw, advice, counsel, . . swarm-u 581'51, the wrist of the hand, ‘1181'51. iaw, the tooth, . . . . 5), QQ'55C, the arm of ditto, . . 53511 gird/1.,garug‘q, the the finger forefinger, of ditto,. . .. Qill'dlll,"$11111, iuw'fic, a tooth-pick, . . £14315 'gliw, the tongue, . . . . '5 seven, spittle, . . . . naisrai grinds, the nails of the finger, Kiwi." saviwaiarat, ditto, . . . . ditto. 551551, hand—writing, .. was“: x (34) gq'sfi, a book, manual, . . sfi'astsfi QIW'QQQ, heart’s wish, de gll'wg'é, Vajra Pdni, . . swat-we sire, wish, . . .. Qi’s'u sq'QéL a handkerchief, a QKW'SN, contented heart or napkin, . . . . -- smut? mind, content, satisfied,. . fiq'gu QIW'N It, tedious, irksome,. . will w'l'fi'lw, a glove for the “I ~9 Q hand, ...... Owen“: Hm], sleep, rep05e, . . . . KI‘RR NJFH'U, sleeping, . t . . Kl‘fifi'filil'll SKI'QIIL, a walking stick, .. Qru'q QKI'E'QQQJ'H, to give into his atw'm‘iwv'q, ditto, .. ditto. hand, ...... mwurnfi’wrt atW'flL'atés'u, ditto, . . ditto. @1161, the foot, . . .. mm; JMQI'QJN, a dream, . . . . 5"!“ @PIW'NL, V the toe, . . .. *ir-z'fii NQQI'QIN'BIQKW'LJ, to dream, Z'int'a'q or qrw'fiq, the nail ofa toe, . . fliq'fiq i'wwatéfc'tt qu'até‘qy, the sole ofthe foot, kit-I'Né‘qi uqq'gv, token or sign of a QUN'QIW, stockings, . . Ma'ng dream, . . . . il'gw qu'gu, a shoe, boot, QQ'QW, affair, business, com mission, . . . . QJNTQWW qtttv'§q', the heel, . .. . i=1: qw'iijtv, a foot-step, track, . . kiwi“! fifi‘iill, a letter, an epistle, . . '3'5 @‘EW'i‘iq, a foot-stool, . . swim art, water, any liquid thing, {by QHN'U‘QQI, water for washing gq'sq, the tears ofthe eye, . . Ng'at the feet, ...... RtC'Q swam, spittle, . . . . Ngql'fl qqlv'qaslq'q, to walk on foot, mn'uN'Qlfi‘It IWC'é‘q, urine, . . . . Elsa Ol' Q65?“ ifll'fil, bilious moisture, the aqvqmss'u, to bow down aq'gfi, the o 0 necessary a 0 or 0 0 to, or at one’s feet, - . Wm: Q5511 gun, the heart, the mind, . . iq' privy, . . . . QIW'N :Bq'fil, the door or gate, . . i gliw'g, mercy, generosity, . . Qt'é aq'it’n, a diploma, . . . . 'an'i'li glwi'zq, generous, .. fifi'i'éli gsiv'qgr'q, affection, love, . , ic'qs'ri asq'gs, an hour, a clock, git-W381, heart-pleasing, .. fir-z'glq watch, . . . . g'gs ¢\ ' V gsw RnQ'II, of a joyful heart, astw, a horse, a carriage, . . time It's! eg‘qtv'l, a stable for horses, . . fi'L glad, . . . . -- is'wq'u I (35) aqw'all, grain for horses, . . fi'éil grqg'q, to burn a dead £‘qm'6w, horse furniture, . . 2'5“ body, .. .. . Elwin-q gtw'fl, a saddle for a ssc'q‘z’, a year, one’s year, or horse, . . . . - fi'fil‘l age, . . . . sawmabridio, .. . sq RSG'E, a month, . . . . g ain'v'q'riiq'u, to mount a RBG'QKI, a day, . . . all horse, ...... fi‘m'rmqu g“, flesh, . . . . fl| ng'mtv'né'qrq, t0 alight from Hit/N, meal, meat, dinner, . . III chw, ditto, . . ditto. a horse, to dismount, .. g'QlW'Qqq'Ll EISKW’i/R, ditto, .. . . ditto. Q'UHQ, a garment, dress, . . El'w Q'UHQ'IIK‘I'Q'R, to put on a UKN'Mir/Ql'fl, to dine, eat, . . aq'a'n qfi’wwi‘rlldqu, not to dine, . . Hfi'aii'it'q garment, to dress one’s self, ...... Iii/vita": HSEI‘V, 3a, disease, sickness, . . its NJ? N, are substantive verbs game, diseased, sick, . . qg'zq NCQ, signifying, am, QSKI 3651161}, the cause ofdisease, . . qs'lqé‘ KIRQ, art, is, are, there fin EQ'd‘i‘NGQ'II, not to be sick,. . fifi'ifi'll Qllw, is,thereare;lhave, lit/R g awn-15211:, recovered from Qeiql, ldo, 8w. . . KM“! \9 sickness, . . . . qs'mw'lifq'q amid", 31w, fire, . . . . a? Néi'q, to do, make, 8w. is gnw'orqéaru, to burn in used of, and to, superiors, 515": fire, . . . . it'q'qs‘ilq'q 115351;, to do, make, &c. is used fix or 31, a corpse, a dead when speaking of one’s self body, . . . . i] or of others, before a great gL'IIG, a burial place, a small personage, . . - - 5% building in which a corpse Both these verbs are frequently added is burned or buried, a to common ones, to make them more com vault, a grave, . IYTLC plete and respectful : as 51181, a coflin, . . . . il'uu, Qfi'ru'ltéfi'q, to write, de 1133:, wood for burning a scribe, . . . . Qi'qor Q§' dead body, . . . . i'fiq Itl'éfi'q (36> Qfi‘UL'UQR'QJO write,describe, Qfi'rl or “WWII, to grant, give, . lib/G"; Qinrés'q q'prq, to take, put on, . . QQ'R'YHG'IU mqn'nravég'u, to grant, per ii’q'u mit, . . .. KIWI: qéw'u, to accept of, . . HWII urgww'u, born, . . .. gw'umi'v'u qqugyatéw, to discourse, sir-2'11 g'ung'u, ditto, .. ditto. gil’qw'qlfiql, a commentary, . . Q5911! qng'nx, ditto, ' o n qi’nw'q, to see, to look on, re Bldtv'q, to exist, live, .. Qi'q gard, . . ng'mavé’wq QiI/CW'N, to die, decease, . 08'1113'1‘1 misrq, to know, understand, iW'QIJ‘IKI'LI Klinw'q, ditto, deceased, -- Qafl'msam Kliit'q, to sleep, to rest, . . qqi'qmifig' Iii'ql'niwv'q, ditto, .. ditto. 61’ Km nwswfinw'u, ditto, . . ditto. atfi-ot'q, to be tired, . . mm d'nrnfinw'u, ditto, .. ditto. g'ml'rt, ditto, .. ditto. fiq'm'im'q, ditto, .. ditto. iKW'lJ, to fear, be afraid, . . Qérw'q g'i’wv'u, ditto, .. ditto. QN'LI, to weep, . . 5'13 115111, to grow old, iw'qrqgl'rt gq'qia'q, to invite, call, . . od’vq 23w“ §to command, or- il'q gq'sc'tl, ditto, . . ditto. N91“, gmwo, invited, called, . fi’w'q le'iWn, \ d 8" say’ t 6 11 ’ an ' gq'u'scw'u, uninvited, . . N'IYN'Q rwam, to hear, hearken to, . . Wu gq'av'scw'qx, without being invited, . . . . N'UVN'LJL qu'q, to hear, perceive, . d’vu qgnu'q, to sit ; to be, . an'u 311, to beg, ask, request, . Q51: qéqw'q, to stand erect, - Qfis'q neifm'n, ditto, .. ditto. morn, to lie, lean to, -- w": gw'u, begged, asked, . i‘w'q Qasl'l'q, to walk, .. ogqrq Rial/0111, ditto, . . ditto. qgs'q, to depart, .. Qi’srt QBQJ'II, to offer, present, nfinw'u, to go a“ ay, to go, Qfi‘miv's'n give, . . . . Kiri/WU QEQ'YJ, \I to come, arrive, . é'q'q atom, offered, presented, 1211411, to arrive, u 811's: given, . . - - new: ng'q, to generate, beget, . . 11255511 ng'qrg'q, to be offered, V - $211!, to give, . . niis'q 8w. . . - - SI'FIK'ZII'Q'II (37) PARTS or Seneca. §64. The parts of speech will be treated in the following order: article, noun, (including substantives, adjectives, and numerals,) pronoun,verb and participle, adverb, pestposition, (which occupies the place of the preposition in the Occidental languages,) conjunction, and interjection. OF THE An'rlcnn. § 65. The particles below enumerated, put after any noun, as an additional syl lable or syllables, may be considered as articles either definite, or indefinite, denoting the very person or thing; male or female; or as a sort of emphatic particles. They are frequently dropt, especially in composition, and in short and indefinite expres sions. § 66. Enumeration of several additiVe particles, used as a kind of article, illus trated by examples. Articles. Examples. 1 q qlq'q, a, or the, hand ; fi'q'q, reading. 1:: Rl'rt, a, Or the, pillar; QIK'TJ, coming. 3 at an, the end, 5W; a superior. 4 if QN'KY, the way or road; fis'ill, the maker. 5 .1}, QTY, the water or river; ir'qv, the man. 6 if wall, the mother; RWY, a or the cow. 7 u'q flit/awn, a man residing in a monastery. 8 AF“ REI/Q‘ll'il', a female person ditto. 9 will fiqul’, a, or the, doer, maker. 10 Q'a‘f QR'Q'JY, a, or the, female ditto. 11 It's Qi'rru, v the, or a, goer, walker. 12 =1 :7 Qfi'w'w 13 we thw, \l 14 We: V Qn'aw, ., V the, or a, goer, walker. 15 RI fié‘fi'xl, the spring season. 16 la Ral'l'l, the summer. 17 5] i'il, the hill or mountain; Ilfiit'll, the heaven. L (38) 18 I; ‘l‘tl'li, the, or an, egg. 19 it 'TIG'IFI, the, or a, lion. 20 IE % 'E, deep, or the deep. 21 3i 5‘13, the man. (N0te.—Amongst the double particles (from 7 to 14) the last 11 and at, find all, are properly articles, denoting the male and female person ; the first, LI and It, being a sort of adjective, or participial termination, that is generally dropt in composition.) § 67. The following particles 5;, 5, 5, 5, 3, likewise are a sort of articles either definite or indefinite; or diminutive signs; as in 3'3, the, or a, little child ; Qq's, the small or little; Kid/Jr}, the, or a, young man ; “'5, the, or a, little sack ; $3, the, or a, little man, a dwarf. § 68. The indefinite article, properly so called, is expressed by either of these particles £18, (iifil, 351, put after the noun respectively according to its final letter; they signify, a, an, any, some; as in gllrgll, a sheep ; 531381, a man ; g'é‘ll, any one, some body ; fi/N'iixt, a garment. OF THE NOUN. § 69. Many of the Tibetan nouns, whether substantive or adjective, appear very frequently as monosyllabic words ; and often a single letter, with the inherent a, constitutes a whole or entire word; as in the following instances; *l, a pillar: II, snow or the mouth ; C, l; a, part, portion; F, tea ; q, fish; a, end ; s, now ; q, sick ; u, father; 1:1, a cow; it, mother; 3, hot ; é, salt ; =3, fox ; q, a cap ; it, he eats; ‘8, upper; 1, a goat ; a, a horn; Q], a passage over a mountain ; q, a kind of garment; fl, fiesh ; Iv, earth, ground, soil. § 70. In many instances, a single letter, with either of the four vowel signs, makes an entire word, the article being dropt ; as RY, leather ; [5, juice, sap ; uncle ; KY, armour; shield ; 15', nature; the face ; 3 what? {3, water ; is], master, lord ; a, sun ; g, principal, chief; i, that ; if, male; 8?, man ; all, female; 3: life; (3', curds; 6', milk; kiss ; i, a hill; if, a corpse ; 61, mixed metal or bell-metal ; 3, death, dead ; 5, who P (if, the tooth. § 71. But the greater part of monosyllabic words have two or more consonants with the inherent a, or the expressed vowel signs ; as in QIKI, hand ; kit-7, foot; “LP-IR, (39) good ; :6, bad ; “11, white; 81351“: body ; awn, soul; 'Q'IW, strength. All such words become dissyllabic as soon as they assume any of the above enumerated arti cles; as wit, the pillar; I'B‘I‘I’, the mouth ; urn, snow, &c.; kll'tt, dressed leather; QTY, uncle ; Wit], the mother, &c. ; Iliq'fi', the good ; grw'fi', the strength. These and other similar words occur more frequently without any article. There are many compound nouns and consequently polysyllabic words, some of which consist of many syllables; as Iii/W'EQ'QRN, Bchom-ldan-hdas, S. Bhagavan: i'q girl-‘JFQBW'Q, Dé-bzlzin-gshegspa, S. Tathagata; F'Q'N'a'q'fiR'Q, kha-na-ma-tho-t-a med-pa, sinless. OF THE GENDER. § 72. With respect to gender in nouns : for things in general, there is no dis tinction.a large drop; Several down nouns or areé‘FW'N, found a drop with ; either é‘qw'g, article a small indifferently drop. applied; as The terminations, if and “51/, are a sort of definite articles or emphatic particles, denoting a person or thing especially or in an eminent degree ; as gtsv'itl, the body ; it"qv, the man. With some nouns, if and 15/, as articles, denote the male, and if, the female ; as éql'it', the or a king, prince; QQJ'JY, the or a queen, princess; i'il' a younger brother ; 5'51, a younger sister. With respect to animals, the gender is expressed either by different names, or by distinct articles; as it, for the male, and if for the female, which may precede or follow the primitive noun ; as 5mm, the male bos grunniens or yak of Tibet; Qfi'ai', the female of ditto. They may be expressed also thus: IE/‘KMKI, a male: and (aiming, a fe male yak ; t, a horse ; gs'at, a mare: or E'illor Flt/'9, a horse ; fi‘al’lor it"t», a female horse: 1151, a swine ; 5111481 or 1481'14‘1’, a male hog ; 51"le or H8111, a female hog or sow ; a, a bird, fowl; 5'12), the cock; g'ir', the hen ; é, a dog; é'it’a male dog ; a female dog, a bitch. The un-castrated male of quadrupeds is frequently expressed by 14, pre ceding the noun, thus : was", a bull ; a not castrated elephant ; WKIQIKI, a bull yak, or not castrated yak ; 74%, a stallion ; WWII, a boar. The terminations, N or 8}], denote a female, or any thing of an ambiguous gender; as 1‘", a she~g03l ; if"); a door; aiww, a drop. The IL and g are diminutive signs, and denote a quality or thing in a small degree. (40) q and I! are common terminations to participles and adjectives, both for male and female, and for nouns denoting a thing in a middle or indefinite sense; as SN'N, one being able; Qfi'fl, one walking ; NFW'U, a u ise man ; Itéw'fl, a beautiful female person. But all such nouns may be taken substantively also, as: the being able, a walking ; or in a general sense ; as: the wise, the beautiful. § 73. There are some nouns that are taken both adjectively, and substantively, and which have but one termination, in N: as yer, prior, former, antecedent ; in, posterior, latter, an inferior; 581'", lower; KTG'IJ, (or E'N) upper, superior, a superior; qu, inner, inward ; @‘N, outer, outward. § 74. By the addition of L1 (sometimes of for males, and by that 0va' (some times of at), for females, several nouns may be formed, denoting a male or female person, of any country, place, nation, tribe or caste, religion, profession, sect, or a follower of, &c., as 15511, a Tibetan ; ii'rn‘f, a Tibetan woman; Q'KIL'LI, an Indian; 8111'“, a female person of India; a'qu'q, (or 8'3), a Chinese man ; é'qrrar, (or $17), a Chinese woman ; 'zllll'l‘llfll Mongol ; Q’q'a‘v’, a Mongol woman; iii-51’, a Turk ; lit/1's}: a Turkish woman ; IIQI'EII'KI, a man of Nepal or a Nepalese; IIQJ'a‘v', a Nepalese wo man ; ii's'iI-I'q, a European ; fi'iili'fl, a female person of Europe; é'd'rIJ‘I-I't-ll, m. grfi fiG'I-N, f., one of British India, or a European residing in India; W311, (or 11%), a Cashmerian; 5'5", a Cashmerian woman ; swirq, one of the Brahman tribe, ora fol lower ofthe Hindu religion; su'i'a‘v', a Brahman’s wife, or the follower of ditto; qu'gsn-q, m. N, f., a follower of Buddha, a Buddhist ; 5:11, a trader; gcw, a she trader; oryma man of the Sa-skya religious sect in Tibet; 61'3"“, a woman of ditto. §75. Diminutive nouns may be formed, generally, from primitives, by add ing to them the particlegu, small or little ; as llt'tgq', a small or little house. But there are many diminutives that are formed by turning the a or o vowel of the primi tive into é, and adding to the ends (with or without the above QG'), as from it a horse; £3, a colt; from It, a cow; 133, a calf; from Q, a bird £2, a little bird; from i’, a door; £3, a little d00r ; from 2’, a stone; i3, a little stone; from Ni, a lake; “is, a little lake, Sac. Some are formed by adding the u vowel, and so making two syl. lables of the former one; as from ya, a sheep; Q's, a lamb; from aq'q, a rope; (41) as, a cord; from gift, a child or young, g'g, a little child, the young of an animal. And, some are formed by adding to the primitives the particle 5; as from 145, asack ; 1:53, a little sack : or by adding 3 ; as from i}, a man ; £3, a dwarf. Or DeanssmN. § 76. There is no irregularity whatever in the declension of nouns, adjectives, numerals, pronouns and participles; they all are declined in the same manner by the addition of certain postpositive particles. As the nouns, &c. may be with or without their respective articles, the postpositive particles, in the genitive, instrumental and dative cases, must be selected in accordance with the final letter of the nominative; in the other cases they follow the nominative indiscriminately. § 77. In the nominative the person or thing is named simply without any additional syllable. The other cases are formed by certain postpositive particles, thus : § 78. The agentive or instrumentive case is formed by either fist, 15“], @V, 6N, or silk; (or instead of 3N by 4v, the (2" being dropped according to modern orthography) signifying, by, with. § 79. The genitive or pOSSessive case is formed by the same particles with the omission of the final N, thus: 5, fi, @, 6, or it, signifying, ’s, of, pertaining, relating, belonging to. Note. After a vowel the adjuncts 6 or ii may be used indiscriminately, (as also A: and its: ;) the first making but one syllable with the preceding, and the last a dis tinct one; as :5, fia’i (pron. 1145,) G'Ii‘r, iia yi, mine ; RN, fias, or G'il'v, fiayis, by me, I. § 80. The dative is formed by QI, applied to the nominative indiscriminately, signifying : to, on, upon, into, unto, with regard or respect to, for, &c. Or by one of these, a, 3, b or -I_, 3, put after the nominative, according to its final letter, signi fying (in addition to what has been said before of Q1), motion or progression to, into, or change, turn into, promotion, &c. This case is used sometimes for the locative also; that is to say, the above enumerated particles denote frequently, rest in, at, on, a place. § 81. The accusative or objective case is the same with the nominative. It seems sometimes to assume the Q] of the dative. M (49) § 82. The vocative is the same with the nominative, except that the vocative particle Q (signifying O !) or some other of similar purport is put before it. But, in general, address or exhortation .is made without any such particle; as i=lN'§"3'R=l, gentlemen! =,5l'§j'~‘-2'38], priests! - ~ § 83. The locative is formed by 6| and Q1, signifying, rest in, at, on, a place. This case sometimes is expressed by the particles enumerated above under the dative. But properly they signify motion to, or towards, a place. § 84. The ablative is formed by adding to the nominative 8w‘ or QIN, signify ing, of, out of, from. OF THE PLURAL NUMBER. § 85. The Plural signs in general, are : $81, RM, iawv. The first, -811, or 5fl'|'&6t*V, is peculiar to the personal pronouns, which have likewise ‘iii, KNN, or §1r|~&a;.v, Besides these, occasionally occur Zn, sg, us, 3v'&Q'RKl, 514, awvwss, '5'?-vv, §1'=w i, and gnu, all of which denote a collective or plural number. (Note. The Sanskrit duals have been, generally, rendered by RKI, in Tibetan, but in this language there is no dual, and the term RBI is used as a plural sign, except when it is added to a personal pronoun, speaking respectfully to one. But here also, it is used mostly in a plural sense.) Any of the above particles put after the nominative singular, may form the nominative plural, and the other cases of the plural are made up by the same post positive particles as in the singular ; but here the particles forming the agentive or instrumentive, genitive, or possessive, and dative cases, must he used with respect to the final letter of the nominative plural. i § 86. The following is the general form of declension, according to which may be declined adjectives, numerals, pronouns, and participles, as well as nouns. Smcumn. ~ - 1 Nominative. ~ 2 Inslrumentive or agentive, iv, 1§|‘ 5 Accusative or objective, like the nominative. 6 Vocative, 5, O. I 7 Locutive, a or <1; ; in, at, on. 8 Ablalive, 8w or mu; from, of, out of, from on. Pnunxn. l Nominative, new or an (an) 2 Instrumentive or agenlive, saw'fim sl'riiw 3 Genitive or possessive, swv'é‘i vréi‘ 4 Dative, RIN'QHRKTQI 5 Accusalive or objective, SNNI Re 6 Vocalive, 8,3311 5'35] 7 Locative, ENN'JH R511 or—QI I or—QI 8 Ablative, mw'wr sKrw or—QI‘V or-QN § 87. Example: Singular. Plural. l Nam. NGN'QN Buddha. NCN'iW'WN the Buddhas. 2‘ Inst. wcw'ew'é‘w by Buddha. wsw'av'fiatw'fi'v by the Buddhas. 3 Gen. NCN'QN'Q‘ of Buddha. NRN'QN'ENN'fi of the Buddhas. 4 Dat. “News; to Buddha. ww'ew'swv'm to the Buddhas. 5 Accus. art-Tera“: Buddha. NRN'QN'fiNN the Buddhas. 6 Voc. é'ivcw'ew 0 Buddha. é'wsw'ew'fiuw 0 Buddhas. 7 Locat. NCN'QN'JI on Buddha. NGN'QN'SNN'Q 0n the Buddhas. 8 AM. NCN'QN'QN fromBuddha. NG'V'QN'FWN'QW from the Buddhas. (Note. In the examples given hereafter, the vocative and locative cases may be omitted: since they may easily be formed when required, according to the scheme of general declension .) . § 88. The particles forming the 2nd, 8rd and 4th cases (see the form of general declension), are used in the following manner. (44) 5&1 and § are used after a nominative terminating in R, rt, or N ; as from |§'s, thou; 51:1, the back ; ‘AN, the body, are made |§'R'.’§N, by thee; 5q'§ QN or 8‘l"ll"V, and Or QM OI‘ §"2l*\T, and or ii“; or irilw, and or 8?"?! ; QIIRI or i:"*¢‘?v, and K75 or Q1 is the general dative sign, applied to any nominative. 3 is used after l=|'1J, as QIEF3, into the hand; grrg», to the west. And after q'1'QI (for Ira, 1.3, QIR), as §1<1|'§ (for £MR‘2a), every where; 81:5 (for F\1=,'g;), to the east ; 14'i/QI'I'a (for Wl’Q1"\'Z-1), to the other side. 3 is used after t, R, 8|, N, 1, <21 : as ail!-V5,, for a name; 15’§'_'5, into Tibet; iq'3, for a price; stirs, to a Way, (wad journey ;) n=v1'5, into gold; mi-5, into, to a place. I 5 0|‘ 1, after Q 01' 11")’ WW6] ; as '£\]"50I‘ ‘ll;/1, to the south; till, into a man; 511. into, to, fire; £51., into water; “g1, into a god. 5, after a nominative ending in N ; as A'|'qN'g, to the right (hand or side). Examples of Declension. § 89. All sorts of declinable words terminating in the letters R, Ix, or N’, as lg/R, thou; 93/3, a vessel, (an utensil ;) 55, shine, lustre; I111, a needle; Qrq, father, (respect fully ;) (iii, fine flour or meal of parched barley, (satu ;) IN, cotton cloth ; 3N, time, season; FIN, part, division ; €r'5,*v, wisdom ; gal, religion; may be declined after the following paradigm. (45) Singular. Plural. l Nom. as, the body, gw'iaw, bodies. 2 Instr. gw'fi‘w, by or with the body, gw'tuw'é‘w, with bodies. 3 Poss. QN'SJ, of the body, aw'wtv'fi, of bodies. 4 Dat. aver, to the body, aw'sus'w, to bodies. 5 A00. as, the body, gw'sartv, bodies. 6 Abl. Q‘V'JW, from the body, sw'twv'w, from bodies. § 90. All sorts of nouns terminating in any of KI'G' may he declined after the following example : Singular. Plural. l Nom. i‘m, the eye, fitn'taw or farm, the eyes. 2 Instr. fin'liitv, by or with the eye, é‘rn'twv'fitv, by the eyes. 3 Pass. iiKl'él, of the eye, a‘iil'fiflw'é‘, of the eyes. 4 Dat. a‘iKt‘QI, to the eye, a‘iq‘SNN'QI, to the eyes. 5 Ace. £81, the eye, a‘lq'saw, the eyes. 6 Abl. NII'JW, Q from the eye, fiq‘fiflvqw, from the eyes. Examples to be declined .- It'll/ll, a servant, subject : £515], a whole piece of cloth ; 8M8], the Tibet yak, (Bos grunniens;) am, the hand; 2181, a sheep ; 351, a louse; ill, touch; an, thunderbolt ; LR', one’s self; in, wood, tree ,- 3G, a pair, couple ;‘§l|'§G', a line of letters ; ai'ith', a looking glass, mirror. § 91. All nouns ending in the letters Jr W 1. 'Q, (as: QM, answer ; '53,, a reward, fee; wit, way, road ; wit, a matron, mother : will, gold ; Qll't'tir'L, the hand’s finger ; gm, place, country ; th‘Ql/Q, porcelain,) may be declined after the following example: Singular. Plural. 1 Nom. is, price, ilristw, prices. 2 Instr. iii'av, with or by a price, iv fiww'ii'v, by prices. 3 Poss. ilt'é‘, of the price, iq'iwv'fi, of prices. 4 Dat. ifi‘q, to the price, iq'ifiN'Qt, to prices. 5 A00. is, the price, _ is'sww, prices. 6 Abl. firm, from the price, iq'svrv'w, from prices. N (46) § 92. All nouns that end in Q, i. e. in any of the five vowels, as: am, precept; It, mother; 8?, man; 5, limit; #2, fire; and all, a female, may be declined after the fol lowmg example. Singular. Plural. l Nom. éqrif, a, or the, king, ém'tll'ilw, kings. 2 Instr. SQI'JW, by the king, SQI'QI'MN'é‘Q, by kings. 3 Pass. was, the king’s, emit-wet kings. 4 But. aw'ix’w, to the king, éQI‘iliiiNN'QI, to kings. 5 Ace, QQI'LY, the king, éq'itl'iiaw, kings. 6 Abl. ZIQI'QII'QN, from the king, QW'QI'KNN'Q‘V, from kings. § 93. All words ending in a vowel, or having any of the 21 articles enumerated, may be declined after this form. Such as are, 14, father. a‘iil'fi; the eye. It, mother. KIBKW'QJ', the body, object. it, man. the mountain. 5, child, son. ital/'15: the head. a}, fire. £34,, the figure, image. all], the head. QG'K‘I, the lion. Qf, the tooth. 555w, the spring season. 61/, a year, &c. 59111, the summer. th'q, the hand. in, the hill, mountain. ii'at, the sun. git/Q'Q'LI, resident in a monastery. wit, the pillar. grq'a‘tl, a hired working woman. QN'AY, the body. ADJECTIVES. § 94. Adjectives can hardly be discriminated, in many cases, from substantives, having the same terminations or articles; and being used sometimes adjectively, and sometimes substantively ; as, first, the bad, bad, a bad man. Adjectives, when put before a substantive, are invariable in all cases of both numbers; but, when taken absolutely, or when they stand after the substantive, they are declined exactly according to the form of general declension, the substantive (47) being then invariable; as slaw, dry land ; “Ingmar, the white or enlightened half of the moon, or of a lunation; all'élll'v, the black or darkened half of ditto; (fwd, the great ; unw'u, the learned; £16, a bad man; rm'rF-tq, a good house; gq'q'qq'ii'or grail, the black valley. But it is very seldom that the adjective is used before a substantive; when it does, the adjective stands either without any additional particle, or the article is put in the genitive form ’i, or has an a annexed ; as war-vii or qaq'rrfi'a‘i 0r Hawaii's}, good man, a good man, the good man. §95. The primitive adjectives appear very frequently without any of their ad ditional terminations, which are in fact a sort of articles; as rraw, good; as, bad ; 3811, white ; M1, black; RRIQ, difficult ; s1, easy, 8w. But they may have also their respec tive articles, as : WWII, UHG'Q', rat-2'31, a, or the, good; film, CA'KY, first, a, or the, bad ; star-q, serif, viral], a, or the, white; qrrv, “Fir/WWI 8, or the, blaCk ; VIQ'E swfi. fi’flQ'd‘t’, difficult, hard ; aftt, si'il, si'itl, easy, &c. In all such adjectives the termination q and 1:; denotes a thing or person, or they are substantive signs. But, in general, when taken substantively, so as to denote the abstract quality, they should have the particle, <33, after them thus; Iraq'q'fifl, goodness; aqu'as, blackness; an'q‘aq, dif. ficulty, hardship; si'tt'ijs, easiness. §96. Some adjectives have but one termination, namely, the article It : as if“, former, prior ; fi'it, latter, posterior, outer ; MW, inner, interior, inward ; §W or fi'i’qrat, outer, outward; 581w, lower, inferior; all?“ (or 5'85) upper, superior; "56'1", anterior, fore; iitz'lt or Qq'u, posterior, backward ; as in Qilqrés'i'lt'iwv, former or ancient interpreters; Qiql'fifi'é'fl‘iiflw, latter or modern interpreters. § 97. Many adjectives may be formed from substantives, adverbs, 840., by adding either of the genitive signs; as from 94M, the body; gw'fi, of or belonging to the body, bodily ; from Kim, war; sun'fi, ofor belonging to war, warlike ; from fiq', wood; ass, of wood, wooden; from KIIQ‘JL, gold; Klfil'é, of gold, golden; from 5}, man ; at}, of man, human; from a'iq, to-day ; i'ii'ii, of this day, this day’s ; from fi'fll, now ; R"§L'§, of this present, this, &c. § 98, Various affirmative adjectives are formed from substantives by adding some one of the following particles : sq, as, ‘gier, Item-q, NRQI-It, it'fiI-q, signifying : (48) having, possessing, -ed, -ful, full of, -eous,-ous, -y, 8:0. ; as in RBZBQ or 891458;, having a head, headed, capital (letter); gir'gq, p0ssessing wealth, wealthy ; Ktfil'qn'zq, full of moisture; Q‘KI'U'RG'HSN'LI or 3111651, sinful; E‘I/Q'BJI'NCQ'U, talented, talentful ; {Wit/Kw, intelligent, reasonable ; from Raw, power ; stares, saw-ea, g'qq'lgq'zq, RIIR'IMN, RUK'NCQ, RHG'It‘t/R, powerful, mighty; from 5'1, wealth, riches '. 3,11%, ifrzq, :1'i5'lq, i’L'IISN, 17mm, S'rvir's, wealthy, rich, opulent. § 99. Negative adjectives are formed by in, Sims, i‘ramq, 5m, aw, £, a, signify ing: -less, wanting, not having, without, destitute of; in (il, im, ir,) un, dis: as gg'ai's or NK‘II'QR, headless or without a head, (small, not capital, character ;) Si'ii'ng or Kris, having no wealth, destitute of wealth; Q'wii'ath, without defects; gw'qm, incorporeal; flaQ‘IW, infinite ; suKl'QW, immense ; ém'a‘vg, irregular, immethodical ; a'dw'q, unbecoming ; aii'bfi'rt, inconvenient; N'glv'q, unheard ; arfiq'q, unripe, immature, not ripe. § 100. Adjectives terminating, in English, in -able, and -ible, may be expressed by 51:11, fit, convenient, apt for, put after the gerund of a verb ; as, qgt's'bq'q, Pom. ble or drinkable; a; or IIHL'QG'U, edible, esculent ; a‘llil'a'bq'tt, legible, that may be read or perused. The negatives of these are formed by putting 5‘: between them, thus; am'a'a‘t'au'n, illegible. The gerund sign is frequently dropt before bq'q, together with the 1; termination, as QQC'QC, potable. § 101. Some adjectives are expressed by the participle future in g, as Qg'g, for Qirrrzq, mortal, obnoxious to death ; QQL'E for agrq'zq, mutable, alterable: the negatives of which are formed, thus: Qg'rl‘ifi'q or Qg'itfi, immortal; an'q'aiq'q, or le'im, immutable. § 102. When an adjective is reduplicated, with any of the particles Qq' qq' raw put between the reduplication, it denotes a kind of superlative degree, and may be expressed by “ very ;” as, Néw'QG'NIE-N, very beautiful ; SQG'g, very great; ngmigg., very short. § 103. When the :last or final letter is reduplicated with the e vowel over it, followed by the articles It or N ; it denotes it to be taken in a small degree, and may be expressed by ‘ somewhat :’ as wéw'firu, somewhat beautiful; QG'E'R, somewhat little ; ilil'fil'fl, petty or sophistical reasoning. (49) Or COMPARISON. § 104. In adjectives the comparative degree is expressed sometimes by i, more, and the superlative by 1.11, most; as, ital, high; i'ital, more high or higher ; Ltt'iti most high, or the highest. But this form seldom occurs. Degrees of comparison are properly expressed by the terms QIN, km, or 1w, (sig nifying, than, more than) put after the name of the person or thing to which comparison is made; as, 'qgll'QW'li/R‘é or tramps: (or G'Iw), li/R's, thou art (or you are) greater than I; Qfi'om'i'uzq' or Qa'tw'i'm, that is better than this. The superlative or a com parison with totality is expressed by auw'zs'qw or gq'ow, than all; as, i'lgaqu or aflw'zfi'qw'afil, that is greater than all, or that is the greatest. The particles, gq'qx, more ; and (in, by a great deal ; are also in use for expressing any great degree of excellence or of the contrary. § 105. The superlative degree, without comparison, is expressed by the following adverbial particles; L'Q'a, eminently ; darn, very ; go's, altogether, entirely; Jig/Ira, chiefly; it'mv'g, wholly ; WG‘RII'LIL, thoroughly; idt'ltx, especially; as, IJJFB‘NIIW'KI, eminently wise, or the wisest; gwa'qaq'it', entirely good, or the best ; dawn-61“); very clear, or the clearest. § 106. Lts'r or ADJECTIVES. 33:1, (u, 51’, if) crooked. 51.1 @1131, round, circular. 3511181, very crooked. grit V gq'grl, V V curved, crooked, . bent. 138;, all, whole, entire, every. 5W7 Q’q'fg’q', oblong. {lg/NI Qfl'filit', soft, pliant, flexible. flat, (q, if, if) contracted, cringing. iii/tr, (q, 1}}, concave, not plane. 51151'51, feeble, weak. Iii/w ifs, ditto. 5“ \l l NR'L‘ll-i', V V standing . inI an erect po's gs]; glq'gq, thick, run into clots. ture. gin'fi’q, curve, crooked. tl'n, bitter. {gt-1', ('q, 8“") straight, right. p'sn, mighty, powerful, potent. QG'QG', straight all along. ri'zq, gainful. gr. I 51:91, fiat, not globular. fi‘fiq, profitless. grit/J1, weak, feeble. tiwv'zq, haughty, proud. QQII QQJ'QQI, long and flat, not globular. ricw'gq, ditto. 0 (50> ritw'ils, void of pride. nat'q'zq, swampy, marshy. tisw'sqi, ditto. erat'zq, shadowy, full of shade. r531.“ [gg'qr'zsb special, particular; emi g'zq, having corners or angles. nent, excellent. g‘it‘li, having many angles, polygonal. [5’8], curved, crooked; cunning. QN'LI, broken, maimed. fiuw'gq, lawful, legal; of good morals. til/Nasal, careful, cautious. fiatw'itfi, illegal; unusual. 15/ vols, careless, heedless. (Boris, bashful, modest. is, (L1, 13, it?) foolish, stupid. Blzfi'l‘ll, clever, dexterous. fiqrzq, ditto. fiq'n‘r’q, ditto. 5128], (q, 81;) homogeneous, consisting ofone. law'alq, impudent. qiq'si, consisting of one; single, alone. fi/"q'idi, angry, wrathful; cruel. Mill's, alone. Ilq', (q, full, replete. 81311-5, simple, naked. M3‘V, (11, ill, N, 8‘6) dear, beloved. naw'zq, snowy, icy; full of frozen snow. BM'QQI, supine, lying with the face upwards. slaviq, both. Klein“, important, of consequence. ll’i‘W'll, second. 52', middle. Elfitv'il', consisting of two. 58111586, respectful. Blgll'il', natural, not artificial. fil'q'zq, intelligent, sagacious. Kleiit'il; opposite, adverse, contrary. Ef'srzq, having a rank or dignity. tqfirat'zq, full of wrinkles. git-1', upper, superior. qfi'g'zq, strong, vigorous. EIINN'KJ, accustomed, wonted, wont. Malq'a‘fi, weak, feeble, languid. Q'g'zq, crafty, sly, deceitful. ingot, a?) fierce, cruel, furious. aq'q, curved, crooked. 815811118“ mischievous, hurtful. é’q'fil, hard, rough, rude, impolite. KMQ', ancient, old, of old time. anvq'sq, illustrious, famous, celebrated, qqg'q'zq, \I hurtful. renowned. ai’vqss'aw'q, ditto nqxwflgq, ditto. qi'qt-qsw, ditto. aa',(1t, 51'. 9f.) cold Elia", (It, KY, 8, 51],) clean, pure, clear; holy. QCN'zq, numerous, numeral. n3, " (II, v chief, . principal. . . qu'itfi, innumerable. new. (1!. a.) other <51) Haydn, another. IWG', (1;) secret, not common. nqm's'a‘vs'u, immeasurable, immense. 8W1, (q, if, new, fresh, virgin. KIQQI'ifi, ditto. BWQI, ('q, 211%,) clear ; evident. Kqui'iw, ditto. BISN'KI, all the three. ngit'fil, consisting of three. Klg'zfi, arched ; having a bow. afic'zq, broad, wide. Kligfl'q, the third. Ilfiq'ifi, void of breadth, narrow. Klfil'é‘, of gold, golden. 816/5, (at, 8,) young, not old. tqfir'zq, golden ; gilt. malt/#5, (85) young, virgin. 511%,, (q, £1; N, 57,) living, alive. nest, bright, shining. q'gqrzq, proud, arrogant. straight, right ; upright, honest. qq, (n, 21’, 37,) bad, ill, wicked. Blg'ggat'zq, inconsiderate, rash. “8’s, mean, pitiful, very bad ; coarse. nng'zq, corporal, bodily, material. 1:123:33 strong, vigorous ; hard, sharp. qgnw'im incorporeal, immaterial, spiritual. aria, weak, blunt. NEC'S'IZIIR'U, comprehensible, conceivable. RL'GL'Q’, hoarse, disagreeable. Mga'g'fivq, incomprehensible, inconceivable. GQJ'H, tired, fatigued, weary. BMW-68;, lucky, fortunate. qqi'q'a‘wi'q, indefatigable. ERR-Vim, unlucky, unfortunate. qqi'a‘tq, ditto. qwq'q'zq, itchy. Earn, certain, real, true. 8M1, 51],) borrowed, adopted. $438,, natural. 8PM], (L1, 8,) the right (hand or side). Z'Z'zq, shamefaced, bashful, modest. q‘gq', (q, if, 5,) tame, domestic. zE’yi'd’g, ditto. Kl'zifi'q‘éq, inattentive, negligent. E'£'AN, ditto. fil'é'ak'q, shameless, impudent. Bird/'38,, crafty, cunning, deceitful. qurg'aq, ditto. :‘z’wirzq, wonderful. qq‘r'qu'q, covered. Zflw'q, satisfied, not wishing more. Ilia/6,258“ crafty. fi’am'a‘fi, insatiable. ain‘t/q, (a3) crafty, the left hand or side. x348), noisy, clamorous. qfiq'q, good, excellent, fine. 2'31. for g'SL, bald, having no hair on the nfiq'z‘xl, the dead. head. 8153., (It) moist, wet, fresh; recent. auras, VV not flat or globular; acuminated. (5‘2) aw, (52's, 5:1,) small, little, the younger. gm, (11,) soft, tame, mild. ‘ QR'QG, very small, little. a'évat'zq,‘ doubtful, dubious, uncertain. 3, (511,) great (the great, the elder); ac', iii) lame, cripple. 50;, (51’, iii) great, large, big. 581, (L1, L7,) clean, pure, sincere. gusts, irreligious, impious. gq'z‘f, first. Kiwis, religious, pious, godly. 5mm], pure, clean, clear; sincere. 22', tgs's, little, few. RR'LJ'zq, faithful, believing. tat near, not far distant. fifi'i'i, faithless, unbelieving, infidel. a'iq'aifl'q, impartial. fifl'll, excellent, holy, saint ; noble. fiarzq, dangerous. \N'EJ’, strict, not loose ; exact. fiu'q'zq, faulty, wicked, sinful. 3%, (II, it], 37,) still, quiet, slow; soft. Q’q'a‘fizw'zq, corrupt, wicked, sinful. 3'“, many, much. HQ'BTI/CN'QR, sinless. 35%;, bent, inclined, prone. fi'gll, bad, mean, silly. gapzq, diligent. an“, (L1,) contrary, opposite. 31:11, tired, weary, fatigued. a'amrq, vulgar, common, mean, plebeian. 3Q 58;, tiresome. alq'iq', far, distant, remote. swim, unwearied, not tired, indefatigable. ac', open, plain ; clear. 3Q], (II, LY, 3‘12) soft, gentle, tame. amu'zq, whole, entire, all. {a}, (if, narrow, not wide, needy. £11.11, free, freed. SKI, all.) strong, stout ; brave, valiant; aqrzrss, dusty, full of ashes. fierce, cruel, furious ; heavy. éin'o‘rzs, spotted, full of spots. en'gqrss, violent, cruel, tyrannical. fin, (if, 3:?) dense, thick, close, compact. gq', (if, it?) right, straight, upright. g, (til, chief, principal. fisivq'zq, arrogant, proud. ng'i‘s'sq, generous, liberal. i’ti’s'l‘ft Zs'a‘v’, warm. gllw'i'ss'iq'u, ditto. W2, (1;, 151%,) hard, difficult. gsvi'aq, illiberal. “1, (q, 57,) white. gqvqir'q'zq, affectionate, loving. gfi’q (q, £1). rare, scarce, dear. QlW'fYq, heart-trying. qu, (It, glad, merry, rejoicing. QR' I Q1765, short, brief. smarts, joyful, cheerful. \/ ,ngq, general, common. snows, ditto. (53) slglré, of winter, wintery, hyemal. ggcw'zq, harmonious, melodious, vocal. $51, (LY, £1) crooked, bent, curved, crooked fifll'é‘, of or relating to the summer, estival. backed. afilq'yq, wealthy, rich, opulent. REI'Q'3J), virtuous. Kirk, indivisible, inseparable. RAH/(WU, necessary, needful. Rats, (L1,) low, mean, humble. gii'w'q'zq, ditto. Ram, (tr, I‘ll, low, mean, not high. gr‘l'w'zq, ditto. flux, (1;, iii) red. \ni’w'q'is'q, unnecessary. ssm'sq, dropsical. sil’w'im, ditto. sgq'wzq, dim, stupid. qéw'q, joyful, merry, glad. 68], (:1, KY, black. fiQ'fi/‘zq, hostile, inimical. '5qu qq'l‘l, inner, inward; domestic. \g'zq, ditto. qq'q, intrinsic, esoteric ; orthodox. figm'é‘, of silver, silver. “'56, sick, diseased. Re/N'zq, material, real. qq'im, not sick, healthy. ga/q'is, immaterial, not existing. 511'51, occidental, western. fiqll'b'a’lfi'll, measurable, that may be mea QN'LJ'zq, efficacious, strong, nutritive. sured. gw'q'a‘rq, ineflicacious. ngq'g'a‘qg'q 1 gqq'fi's, immeasurable. Sin, (:1, £11) obscure, gloomy, dim. \qq'gqi, measureless. {Era/81, very obscure, gloomy. qqlq'QW, immense. {qw'wzm faulty. gqq'qzq, courageous, brave; strong. {115% wealthy, opulent. gqq'zsq, ditto. Sign, ditto. glitz], (if, noble, illustrious; prosperous. 14'18‘, of the father, paternal. §§§'R|, of spring, vernal. ward}, of the father and mother, parental. 511G185 mighty, powerful, potent. uq'q'zq, useful, wholesome. gqc'qq, ditto. 1401, (q, ll}, 96) common, vulgar ; mean, 55%!“ headed, with a head, capital. coarse. qg'a‘m, without a head, headless. III/carat, indigent, poor. ngw'zq, aspirated, aspirate. szq'qt fig'q'zq, daring, hold. ggq, (q, 37,) poor, indigent. 515'“, last, modern, of late. \fiq, (if, all) solitary, retired. gs], (q, if, 5:3) rich, wealthy, opulent. (54) gt, (1;, if, N, 36) half, the half of. ng'qgw'zq, diligent, industrious. I5, (13/, 87,) small, minute, subtile, thin. ng’n'nn, ditto. gimme, envious. wig/Wits, idle, indolent. m'i’xrzq, ditto. ng'sq or gar“, lying, false. QG'fi, northern, of the north. raw, (It, 91’, if.) good QG', (IL) purified, perfect, accomplished. 'qiiqi, (II, J, 31) cool, fresh, somewhat cold. ENN'H'aq, clement, merciful. "Sf-2'68“ fragrant, having a scent, scented. SNN'J‘IR, merciless, unmerciful. 141*, (L1,) fine, pleasant, savoury. Enamel, singular, distinguished, different. Will “5, of the mother, maternal. fil'tt'zq, savoury, flavorous, palatable. NR', (£12) many, much. il'q'ifit il'itfi, insipid, tasteless. Nil, (Ll, It,) lower. fl, (8,) upper, superior, higher. atwt uw'fi‘, lower, last, final. gq, (q, 21,, 67,) stupid, ignorant, foolish. a‘isrifiraq, jealous. fi‘zq 1 5'1!“ fi'gq'zq, intelligent, sagacious, fifi'fi, nominal. ingenious. a‘t‘q'zq, having a name, famous. g'a‘m, unintelligent, foolish. grim, boundless, infinite. 5' v.56}, prudent, intelligent. g'i'zq, sulphureous. ail/vim, imprudent. gq'q r-zq, dark, obscure, gloomy. JilQ'L‘f, cheap, of little value. Im'rt, bitter, of a disagreeable taste. qiqum, happy, blissful. d/N'q'zq, respectful, regardful. trig, (q, 513) true, just. y'cq'aq, sorrowful, grievous. qiq'qq, unjust. Q'zarils, sorrowless. qle'q'aq, wealthy, rich. évn, intoxicated, drunk. Kill, (81,) secure, firm, strong. amw, (q, sic) wise, skilful, learned, prudent. ng, (r4, Q’, at, honourable, respectable, Néq, (Al, 81,) knowing, understanding. reverend. atéwq'aq, intelligent, skilful. q5'zrzq, affectionate, kind, merciful. miq'a‘qg, ignorant, unskilful. qfi'qq, ditto. ail-5:, (11, if, a?) hard, solid, compact. lig'zl'ifi'fil 'qg'iti, unkind; merciless. ufiqw'q, hard, solid. qg'q'a‘wq'zq, ditto. ufiqw'qx'gw'q, hardened. ng'q'zai, diligent, industrious. MEI/win, having a head, headed, capital. (55) "5516:, (lb) swift, speedy, nimble, quick. gfl'll, content or contented, satisfied. 14:1, (It, £1; 61",) sweet. Qi‘ll'é, of this side. lie/6'11, evident, open, clear; eminent. érrzq, turbulent, tempestuous, boisterous. NQN'LI, even, level ; equal, like. £‘21'6Jl, regular, methodical. NQN'Q‘R, having no equal, unequalled. genial, ditto. NQN'SQI, matchless, incomparable. éql'im, irregular. ufiq'u, soft, pliable. éqi'fiwv'zq, of good moral conduct. an'v‘l's, limited. éarfiwv'qiq, ditto. NaQ'im, unlimited, boundless. iQI'lgltN'a‘m, of bad morals, dissolute. NaQ'QlW, ditto, infinite. g'iq', longevous, living long. ug'a‘qq, weak, feeble ; ineflicacious, impotent. i'gq', (66,) living a short time. alg'tgq, strong, powerful, potent ; efiicacious. 3'55, lifeless. ti'la'li, living. argaru, agreeing, concordant, similar. in}, (11,) wave, (211%,) high, elevated. i'QlN'QRN'lJ, deceased, the late. era/81'qu Na/Bl'ng, having a colour, coloured. g'QRN'Ll, ditto. avg/INK, colourless. i’rlfivu, amphibious. NQCN'N, equal, like. ism, hard, diflicult. atécu'a‘m, having no equal, matchless. (in'at'zq, prickly, full of thorns. Ngl'zq, sorrowful. £5165, moderate, observing due measure. NéGN, (ll, 8,) wise, clever, learned; brave. ivy», ditto. Itéw, (11, IL) beautiful, handsome, fair, ele gfi'ifi, immoderate. gant, graceful. Q'Q, clear, not obscure. SU'§‘q'zJ|, hasty, precipitant, hurry. @, (q, 15’, £2) lame, cripple, maimed. in'i‘q, sharp, pointed. ‘ err.“ greasy, oily, fat. 3, Sq, hot, biting hot, (as a spice.) qn'its, destitute of fat, &c. ig'q'zq, hot, sultry, torrid. n1, (1;, if, 5,) blind. éfi'ifi, measureless ; immoderate. a'q, calm, quiet, still, mild, gentle. 315"“, moderate, temperate. (3n, (RT, ii) minute, fine, subtle. éfi'QIN'QRN'U, beyond measure. (33:, (q, 21,) flavorous, savoury, sweet. équq, dangerous ; criminal, faulty. 3%, (5,) fine, good, pure. grl'q, burnt, hurt by fire. .fiq'zq, wide, broad. (56> (Elvis, not wide, narrow. our, (1.1, 5],) soft, smooth, mild. mean, pitiful, coarse. qu'trzq, perishable, frail. zq'q'aq, defective, wicked, corrupt, calami Qé‘ll'v'q'zq or Qilq‘v'zq, fearful, timorous; tous. dreadful, frightful. Htw'fi, of copper. Qé‘lqvg'bc'q, dreadful, horrible, awful. aqu'flzq'zq, of copper colour, copper co qgll'v'ifl, intrepid, fearless, bold. loured. Qém'w, ditto “'55, never-failing, inexhaustible. Qi'qw, (L1, 21,), agreeable, pleasant. zrq, (1.1, £11512) deep, profound. Qifl'fi’, clever, dextcrous, prudent, wise. Evin, inexhaustible. Qafl'q, fit, meet, proper, becoming. i'é'aq, nitrous. qglq, (it: ax) dense, thick, heavy, close. z‘r'q'zq, crafty, cunning, deceitful. QQNN'LI, covered, overcast. i’qré’n'sq, crafty, sly. QSN'Q‘V, compounded. awii’, round, circular, globular. QSN'N'QN, uncompounded, simple. 6,8118“ entire, not castrated. Q3, (11,) like, similar, equal. 8"30“ shining, bright. ng'q, mixed, mingled. Kw. (512%) deaf quw'q, eminent, excellent, high; venerable, a’w'q, becoming, convenient, meet, fit, wor respectable, reverend. thy of. Q5‘3‘U'iifi'q I QiQi'ifi, inseparable. Qfll'lqu, frozen, congealed. qqq'qfig'qr Qsal'iq, inseparable, incohe Qigwq'u, gone astray, erred. rent. QBKIN'H, stirred up, troubled. Q38], plump, fat, thick, gross. ngqq'q, born, produced. Qg'trzq, hurtful, mischievous, noxious. Quixw'q, prohibited ; stopped. Qi'q'a‘fi'q, innocuous, harmless. quq'zq, burdensome. 925,3, ditto. Qinq'g'qw'5q, faulty, criminal. Qéqw, (Lt, N,) wise, clever, learned ; brave. qgg'q'zq, mutable, changeable, alterable. an'q'zq, bashful, modest. qgl'q'ifi'll or qgris, immutable. Qéat'q'flq'qi Qgfl'a‘m, impudent. Qég'q'zq, sorrowful, penitent. w'atiq'ui, wonderful, strange, curious. Qi‘ll'flfi'q or Qqfi'irg, immortal. mu, (:1, 51,) wide, ample, diffuse, copious. Gq's'filI-I'q, pleasing, pleasant, delightful. Qg'g, mortal. <57) wis's'il'fi’c'q, disagreeable. gm" guru, old, ancient ; worn out. crooked ; wrong; deceitful, false. 8311, withered, pined away. iii/6i, (l1, inconstaut, changing. gll'lrzq, turbid, muddy; thick, not clear. iti'ill, dull, heavy, blunt. $5111, firm, steady, durable, lasting. llIN'Ll, large, extensive, huge, vast; thick, EN'U, copious, abundant, fat, thick. gross. gq'ii’, blunt, dull. inrq'zq, learned, intelligent, skilful. gnw'u'as, judicious. ng'ill, blunt, dull. inw'_q, reasonable, just, convenient. in, (1;, if, at) long; distant. foq'g' 5:1, malleable. iGN'Ll, swift, speedy. 5am”, maimed, mutilated, defective. is, (u, £1], 5,) lean, meagre. :Qi'zq, dusty. id‘iq, precious, valuable, costly. tw'qzw, real, substantial. iw'zq, partial, siding with one party. iirrzs, purulent, full of corrupt matter. iw'a‘fi, impartial. (13],) gs i-LT, sharp, acute, edged. awn, convenient, apt, fit, meet, becoming. is! ig'li'q, thick, dense. 5Q], (1;, L1,) rotten, putrid. gun's-M, foggy. mist? iqw'q, stifi‘, hard. 3Hi'u, dull, heavy, stupid. i511, ready. guru, dull, heavy ; foggy, misty, overcast. iw'q, stout, strong. ilqw'q, dull, stupid, ignorant. ifs, (q, 5,) stifi‘. swag, unskilful. 8:", (lb) simple, not compound. gtzj'iq, skilful, exercised, expert. in ilfiI iiq, old, aged. ilq', (21],) rough, harsh, full of hard parti ii'Nq, grown old. cles. iiq'g'v‘ilq'q, fordable. git, (KY, 31],) harsh, rough ; of unequal sur liq? $5311, not fordable. face. 51's, (u, 21/, 5,) wild, not domestic. §'a}/'3qt ir'sq, pointed, having a top or apex. 5516111, fat, thick. fig'if'zq, playful. @N'q, extensive, large, copious 3 ample, gqy'q'sq, diligent, industrious. wide. gq'zq, false, lying. serif, bright, shining; awful. iqw'q, accomplished, perfect, complete; éai'q, raw, not subdued by fire; naked. finished, ended. (58) EII'Q; vain, false, empty. wizq, defective, damaged, broken. 5162M, moist, wet. N134 for IINL'LJ, new, fresh, recent, virgin. fivii'll, moist, wet; fresh, green, new. garii', tedious, irksome. maxim, adolescent, young. gems, fut-rowed, having long trenches. QIG'IH, stubborn. *QNN'FJR, inanimate. QW'6Q, laborious, industrious. filtw'iq, animate. QJN'ifi, idle, lazy, doing nothing. ‘7'", new, fresh, recent. gsrzai, bodily, corporal, corporeal. Jeri/for IiQf’q'tY, living, alive. giv'ifl, incorporeal. '31:, 51,) thin, slender, lean. Q'QY'zq, idle, lazy, indolent, slothful. quq, dark, obscure. Qtw'q, good ; elegant, graceful. ig'zq, affectionate, passionate, desirous. Qlw'tgq, virtuous. sig'qq, ditto. in, (if, 3:1) flat, not globular. gawk, disafl‘ectionate, unbeloved. grlvq, dumb, mute. nga, animate, living. lid-14; 'S‘rm, heavy sis-1., ditto. édffi, ditto. NIP“, V x inanimate,, . lifeless. I aflqi'zq, usual, customary. 351, (u,) flexible, pliant. 'gr,‘ {-5, green. 5}"! its, unusual. i316), heavy, grave, weighty. 311 (It, 13/, 31],) light, not heavy; easy, thin. quq, ditto. sari, ditto, thin. overflowing, full. g'q'avg'q, not to be deceived, infallible. 'gl/MN'LI, hungry, grown hungry. g'a‘m, ditto. '35, common ; both. at, (q, 83‘?) thick, dense. g'q'zai, wide, ample, diffused. aim-5,, ditto. i‘ww, blessed. “we, sonorous, vocal. fizw'zq, vehement. a“, (5,) dry Fag'aq, strong, vigorous. siqi'q'zq, happy, fortunate. fig'a‘rg, impotent, Weak. siq'siq, ditto. iiw'xu'za, ingenious, witty. swim, unfortunate, unlucky. iw'qq, intelligent, learned. in, (L5) thirsty. I . Bursa, nitrous. .5, (‘51,) white, grey. --,H---..,V- - -. '7 - a me 7. n. , “Eggjl L 7 x V (59) fig, (L7,) happy, fortunate, at ease. fill'im, sinless. £1, (5, 5,) sour, acid. git, (l1, £11) agreeable, pleasing ; fair, hand gsi'sq, hurtful, unlucky. 7 .- some, beautiful, delightful. iq'sq, faulty. gelsrgersq, uneasy, sorrowful. gawk, faultless. #1165, clawed. gq'a‘ls, intrepid. ‘Ql'i'i, clawless. crooked, curved, bent. ‘fi'gKW'Q, of all sorts, several. il/dt's‘at/R'll, conceivable, imaginable. 'flumi hall"? i/a.s.;mu’ inconceivab]e_ swim, hairless, having no hair on. gas, artful, crafty, cunning. 7fi’nw'sq, profitable, advantageous. g'qq, sonorous, sounding. 'fi/R'ill, spicy, seasoned with spice. Fm, ditto. .fi/U‘V'Q'aq, courageous, able. TN, first, former, prior, antecedent. iii/IIN'LI'JJR'U, cowardly, fearful. if, (it?) li/all-il, blue ; green. 31¢, (51; skilful,clever, dexterous, ready,fit. gs, agreeable, pleasing. 133, general, common; chief. Q', (13:) soft, gentle. lgvsl'zq, busy, employed, industrious. inert-'4, degenerate, grown worse. lfiil'q, meagre, lean. fic'é'sq, merciful, generous. $1,“, (2],) thick, gross, bulky. it‘lt'g'ifi'u, unmerciful, cruel. Q/N'll, swollen, puffed up. is, (u, 1:1,) soft, gentle. g‘qN'q, hungry. 1mm, sick, diseased. fiiv'q, frozen, stiff, hard. QKW'LJ, stretched out, straight. £61], ripe, mature, perfect. ilt'apzq, boasting, bragging. Qarés, maturative. EN, (Ll, 67,) thick, dense; heavy. dark red. qu'q, empty, void, Earn, mad, lunatick. Q'qw'zq, strong, vigorous. glvsl, mad, grown mad, distracted. gcqvgg, ditto. grill, dexterous, clever, fine. Ql'qva‘ts, weak, feeble. ‘3“1'55, mOist, wet. gc'q'xq, angry, passionate, giv'irq, void of moisture. Q'L'N, trembling, frightful. 501F615, ample, wide. isms, vicious, sinful. fiQJ'iq, very ample, wide. (60) Negative participial adjectives are formed from affirmative ones by the addition of 8r, or 8?; as in the following list, from first, ripe; {N11, said; a’vn, heard, &c. are formed: it'fiqu, unripe. fi'fifi'll, unbelieving. N'giv'q, unsaid, not spoken. gq'at'sqw'q, uninvited. at'a’w'q, unheard. ia'at'qgv'q, unopened, not yet blown. N'NEl/G'q, unseen. fl'q-illw'q, unbolted, not sifted. ai'm‘inv'si, ditto H'ifl'q, unborn. N'll‘l‘l’IW'q, uncovered. at'qfiiv'q, unborrowed. at'qiqlq'q, unhindered. a'tmqlv'q, unbred, untaught. N'UKIG'H, unfilled, unreplete. N'IIQQI'II, unbroken, not tamed. at'q'a'vq, uneaten. it'qfilqi'q'q, unburnt. N'QN'LJ, undone, not made, uncreate. it"qzl-I'It, uncaught, not taken. N'qéw'q, ditto. N'iiv'q, uncertain. N'Nés'q, ditto. 'qq'at'iiq'q, unchaste. st'fl'giv'u, uncompounded, simple.‘ &iv‘lJ'Jt'Ii‘M'q, unbecoming. N'KN, unbought. gaya‘t'q'at'riiq'u, uncommon. N'amq, undaunted, unabashed. gaq'ii"fl'w“wq, incompact. N'EN'LI, unable. it"q'gw'q, uncollected. at'qi'qiv'q, unabolished. N'q'gqu, unchewed. ai'gzw'q, unaccepted. atrqwatw'q, unconceived, not imagined. at'nfiw'q, ditto. N'flég'q, uncreate. at'é/Kw'q, unaccomplished, unfinished. at'qgiv'q, undigested ; unmelted. N'gtr‘q, incomplete. N'Qlellv'q, unfrozen, not congealed. Nigq'q, not clean, inaccurate, incorrect. N'ifw'q, untilled. fl'lgl’flfl'q, unaccustomed, unwonted. it'gil'q, unpleasing. ai'tiavwv'q, ditto. W‘EIKI‘VLJ, unfair; not well, &c. fl'qiii/N'q, unelected. N'QgBIN'Ll, unerring, not mistaking. N'UEW'H, unacquainted, unknown. erg/8,11, not yet come, future. N'Qfiw'q, unasked. it'd/awn, ditto. N'Qfiw'q, unmixed, pure. N'QRN'RI, not escaped. ai'grq, ditto. ‘N'Q’V'LJ, unredeemed, &c. &c. q'qiqw'q, unbeaten. at'Qw'q, t\ V unbecoming, . indecent,- unsuitable. (61) dawn, ditto. g9as QR'LI, impossible, impracticable. Y al'll'll'tt, immovable. an 'q, inexhaustible, infinite. 2929 J‘l'QQQJ'II, ditto. 'Qs, unlike, different. elliw'q, ignorant. qtq'q, inconstant, mutable. Na'iiBl'Ll, unsteady, frail, transient. 2392;» GQI'q, indefatigable. a V . Vflw'q, not to be satisfied, insatiable. Brill-2N1], not lgnorant. ii't‘q‘at'q, unpleasant, disagreeable to the taste. aci'llitz'q, unclean, impure, unholy, defiled. £151], unpleasant (to the ear). SOME ADJECTIVES WITH THEIR OPPOSITES. Nd‘flflq, high (and) low. HN'KIEJL, dry, moist. QS'Q'Qs, like, unlike. swam, white, black. usat'a‘i‘atqat, even, uneven ; equal, unequal. £519}, sharp, blunt. Q'S‘V'H‘Vl QSN'N'QN, compound, simple. Qq'il, cold, warm. qaq'qq, good, bad or ill. atétv'fi'atéiv, fair, unfair. a'fili', great, small. gsra‘i'gil, agreeable, disagreeable ; pleasing, iq'gq', long, short. unpleasing (to the eye). get'tg, large, small; coarse, fine. dfl'fi'é‘lt, agreeable, disagreeable, (to the taste Qgit'géo‘q, soft, harsh ; smooth, rough. or smell.) 5'3, hard, soft. girfrgq, pleasing, unpleasing, (to the ear.) law/2, light, heavy. fi‘q'zq I savoury, insipid (to the taste.) é’q'qfi'oi, hard, soft. gqu'a'hgqu, glad, sorrowful; merry, sad. £1"ng or ~gnlil, thin, thick. @531, near, far. gc'il/T straight, crooked. LKW'YA‘, large, small; gross, subtle. qé'qg, bent backwards, forwards. {Brut qtqw'q, narrow, ample, wide. qfiq'md’, firm, fixed, movable. qanw'zan KIBKlN'ifi, corporeal, incorporeal. gqc'zq l gnawing, powerful, impotent. ifi'lll SKIN'U, meagre, fat. Ram's], difficult, easy. H‘q'fi/l Flat-2'5“, deep, shallow. It's), thick, thin, (as a liquid.) flfifi'éal l ‘llefi'ifi, broad, narrow. (6 ~) aging“ eta/Brim, coloured, colourless. i'ét former, latter; prior, posterior; first, ggoi'gq, poor, rich. last. V V Qéqiv'gq, wise, foolish. l*‘IFI‘QKI, upper, lower. 3m é‘rgrl, pure, impure; clean, unclean. JIG'Q, inner, outer, &c. &c. NUMERALS. § 107. The Cardinal numbers are as follows: L10 50 si'zig'aat'q or @115, fifty. 7 1 111381, one. q') 51 '{Ug'g'llsfil 0r £21135], fifty-one, &c. 2 2 Ilfiiv, two. \‘10 60 fili'g‘alt'q or §81'§9, sixty. a 3 MEN, three. 4:7 61 §l|'§'£'5128| or 111351, sixty-one, &c. Q, 4 1461‘, four. _ m 70 um'i'au'q or using, seventy. q 5 'g, five. v7 71 qss'g's'fliiri or {1511351, seventy~ as 6 35], six. 0.1 7 115,41, seven. one, &c. J. 8 1:55, eight. 4.. 80 nas'g'au'q or 1451,55 , eighty. in 9 553, nine. a7 81 qss'g'x'siin 01' 5118's, eighty-one, 7o 10 ugaai'q 01‘ “fig, ten. &c. 99 11 again, eleven. o. 90 ss'qg'aw'si orss'rigminety a2 12 rigiii‘w, twelve. w 91 Rfl'qg'x'filfili &c. or 51/1135], ninety-one, I 92 13 Iié'llfiil, thirteen. 9e, 14 Ilfi'tlé‘, fourteen. 9oo 100 qé'afl'u 01' HQ, a hundred. 9d 15 1:341, fifteen. 7ooo 1000 {W or Q/Q'TQK], a thousand. 74> 16 'qg'gli, sixteen. [g or ten thousand, a myriad. 9v 1? Iti'qgai, seventeen. QEN or qgat'g, a hundred thousand, one 7d 18 IIX'HQR, eighteen. lakh. 9a) 19 fig'fifl, nineteen. NW1, a million. 2° 20 fi'g'au'q or ‘fi'g, a score, twenty. 51:, ten millions. 29 21 fi'gg'nin or 51111281, twenty-one, &c. 5R'g1, a hundred millions. at» 30 gat'g'aat'u or gat'gg, thirty. EL'QBN, a thousand millions. a7 3l Sgai‘é'g'lflfiil a or w'sifili,thirty-one,&c. V _ aL'QQN'glril, ten thousand millions. a. 40 ué'ug'aarq or 11615,, forty [mail], a hundred thousand millions. g') 41 'qfi'qg'x'rifiq or fi'llgfil, forty-one, &c. na'fisra‘ts'ii’, a billion. (63> Remarks. 1. The units M311, Blast, Klglt, before the tens or any higher number, drop the prefix Xi, and are written thus: 3‘], 5N, git ; as in gq'flé, (100) fiw'rls, (200) gai'ztg (300) ; ain's’c, (1,000) writ, (2,000) geese, (3,000,) 8:0. 8:0. From fiw'g, (twenty) is formed, and now generally used, a'g. 2. rig and g are equivalent in signification, 1:5 being used after a vowel, and 5,, after a consonant : as in qd'zxi, 'g'qg, and eggs; and flag, 55,5, .qsaré’ and Iraqi. 3. After the tens are frequently found some of these words; alt'll, HR], 5, denoting a collective or integral. aai'u is used, commonly, after the tens up to one hundred ; Igl'l after 1:5, QIR, &c. as well as after any smaller number; as in qsq'rglq, a week or seven-night. 5, after any great number in general ; as a myriad, qgu'g, a hundred thousand; but sometimes it is used with the smaller numbers also. 4. Iii/"1g and Iii/@513 are now commonly used, instead of the ancient terms trig or 13$, (fifteen,) and 1:15 “£155 or 1315;, eighteen. 5. The units follow the rest of the decades (twenty, thirty, forty, &c.) in the same order as above given from ll to 19; but, for expressing the decades themselves, there are two modes, as has been shown in the preceding table. 6. When the cardinals are reduplicated, they may be rendered in English thus: lili‘l'llsil, single, only one; Eligit'llgu, three by three (as in multiplication), three at once, three to each, &c. ; gsl'gq, six by six, six at once, six to each, &c. § 108. From the above cardinals, numeral adjectives are formed by adding to them the termination if (sometimes 11 or at) ; as Klsfil'ill, Klfiw'ill, Ilgfl'il', &c. consisting of one, two, three, &c. ; gar-Ell, consisting of or containing thirty, (Slocas, &c.); 6316'“, containing four chapters. § 109. From the same cardinals, adverbs are formed by putting before them the particle 01%, (turn, time) as, Qlil'ilgl‘l, once ; Qlll'lliilv, twice ; Qlfi'llgfl, thrice ; Qiii'rlé‘, four times ; QIJi'IIg, ten times ; 0.16115, a hundred times. § 110. The ordinals are formed from the cardinals, by adding to them the article :1 in general (and sometimes at for the female). The first word is however an excep tion, since instead of aiilsi'nl, the first, \q'il' is used: but elsewhere the rule is regular; (64) 85 '|1l§fl!i3Ki'q, the eleventh; §L'K|3=|'l!, the twenty-first, &c.; |=1§N'lJ, second, Higwq, third, &c. all which are formed in conformity tllerewith. § lll. From the ordinals, adverbs are formed by aflixing the letter 1, thus: RI-I'Z1'1., first, the first time, in the first place; ‘Ii-}i*V'l11, secondly, the second time, in the second place; li§LN'l11., thirdly, in the third place, and so on with all the rest. Note. 1. Numerals are often expressed on registers, 8:0. by the letters of the alphabet, in the following manner : Tile thirty simple letters of the alphabet, without vowel signs, (consequently pronounced with the inherent a ) from Kl to W, denote the numerals from 1 up to 30. Thence by adding to each letter thei (3) vowel sign in this lnallner, "9|-ell, the numerals from 3l—60 are designed. With the u (:9) vowel sign, thus: ’_3—ig, the numerals from 61-90 are expressed. With é (3) thus : 5|—B7, those from 91-120. Lastly, with the 0 (V) vowel, thus: ’<‘1'——I$/, the numerals from l21—l50 are expressed. Should it be required to continue the register, &c., the letters or syllables of the whole former scheme, being made long, the numbering may be extended as far as 300, thus: 51-ax denote the numerals 151-180 ii-_o‘,i_ ditto 1 81-210 3": _ ‘§» ditto . 211-240 lg-a1 ditto 241-270 5-»); ditto 271-300 Note. 2. in Tibetan books (especially in indexes and quotations from other works) there frequently occurs after these numeral letters solne one of the syllables Li, £11, nreii q, signifying such and such a volume, or any other thing; and qr. or q' Paonoun‘s. § 112. As there is no irregularity in the declension of the pronouns from the nominative singular, the other cases being formed according to the scheme of general declension exhibited above, (§. 86.) it will be unnecessary here to decline every pronoun; the several varieties of them therefore need only be enumerated, with their signification in the nominative singular; and the declension will be confined to a few examples. § 113. Tue PERSONAL PRONOUNS. First Person. Second Person. “an,:3 \ [5%lé’g, hon. }thou, (you) V V T43 masc. > I. agviqv, [a at, fem. . gq'qs, thyself, or thou, you. ss. Iwn- las'fi‘q, Las J t' ' LG’ \ I?‘ ‘ '1‘ a ’ ,1 on . thyself, thou; - or yourself, wqaxl’as. as“g??? hon. '"m- y on ' c'ra'a', Third Person. 'l 7“ 3|, it V com. “an ' I; a ’ > I, myself. '3 ‘4 u, m' “was v v" l. [flu’f' " he, she. rail l15 s. PW. wm- 110" cg'xc, hon. Efq'u, m. hon. cyan, hon. ch'N, f. hon. CR'I‘B‘J'an. \ V p141: Haws, ,chg , d . , “fab \ ‘\ hon. J V ' I he himself. in: 1:, hon. V Q r she herself. es'ss. hon ?)‘i, hon. Note. Those that are marked hon. are used respectfully. The pronouns is, &c. l; and the second person, (is, Sac. are used both in the singular and in the plural sense, denoting a degree of civility or politeness, both in the speaker, and in the person or persons addressed. (66) §ll4. In the strictest sense, the personal pronouns are only these: I; rid, l; as, khyod, thou ; ii], him, he, she. But since the others also frequently occur, both in books and common conversation, when speaking with more or less degree of em phasis, and respect, they have been enumerated at length. The Tibetans make fre quent use of the compound pronouns, in place of the simple ones. § 115. Since the personal pronouns enumerated above frequently occur in the instrumentive case, denoting, before a transitive verb, the agent ; which would be ren dered among Europeans by the nominative, the instrumentive case of all these pro nouns is here inserted at length. First Person. Second Person. RN or W'a'w, by me, I. fig'fiw, by thee, thou; you. qgiq'ziiw, ditto. tifiéw, ditto. p‘sl'fi/N or 541541361, m. ditto. Iglfi'LR'ElN, by thyself; thou, you. [3";th or ii‘a‘ev‘iw, f. ditto. ii’s'fis'é‘w, ditto. estate, ditto. é's'iQ/wv, ditto. lfi'fiw, ditto, @fi'LG'K‘lN, by yourself, you, (one.) amn'fiiv, ditto. tig'iis'fitv, ditto. q'qqq'i‘w, ditto. and“, ditto. u'i‘wfiw, ditto. Third Person. R'P‘SI'QRI, ditto. [Q’w or [Ii/'66:, com. by him, her, or he, she. R‘g, emphatical and invariable before [Ii/WW, m. ditto. a transitive verb. I'R/thhf. ditto. ng'rq'i'iw, by myself, I. [Yq'liim com. by him, her, he or she. ng'rig‘g'fiw, ditto. li’G'qN, m. ditto. q-gisrfii'ww, ditto. TRIG'NN, f. ditto. EQ'LC'fiN, ditto. lil'LR'l'lN, by himself. iq'iiq'fiw, ditto. ii’ds'fitv, ditto. is'n‘iiw, - ditto. IQIR'LR'fiN, ditto. iii/R'é‘s'fiiv, ditto. ah'fiwt (“not (67) § 116. The nominative plural of the personal pronouns may be formed by add. ing either of the three following particles or plural signs: all, 58], 38W ; Written also thus, zn'iwv, “View; as, q'zq, or C'zll"mw, Imll'zrl or qusrl'vw, We; é’g'm or gym-m and [iq'qq or éq'qwiwv, Ye or you; $46!! or PY'zKI'MN, li'fi'sl'l or ri’q'm flaw, They § 117. The first person plural is sometimes expressed by or 318], 3'5'5‘1 0r eg'g'zil, with or without the eXpletive 36W after them. The instrumentive case, or that of the agent, of the personal pronouns in the plu ral number, is formed by adding K‘lN, after an and $81 ; by $61, after “*1; and §N after 6%, as ; c'zn'fiw, 65"Rn'fiw, byby you,us, we, ye, (mow) Hz'qmv'fiw, by them, they. 545(Qrég‘w, by us (me,) we or I. § 118. DECLENSION or PERSONAL Pnonouns. First Person. Singular. Plural. Nam. & A00. 1;, I, me. c'm or n'm'fiaw, We, us. Inst. 1w or q'fiw. by me. c'ztl'liiw, c'zn'w‘v'fiw, by us. Gen. or Pas. C6 or will. of me. R'U‘l'lil‘, C'éil'iflw'éi, of us. put, arm, (:1.) to me. G'fifl'Ql, 2'551'3NN'QI, to me. Abl. R'aW 0r G'QW. from me. G'U-‘I'MI, t'm'fiww'w, from us. Also, Singular. Plural. N0m.<§‘Acc. 15$, I, (we) ég'zq, efi'ifl‘fl 0r ifi'fiq'fiwv, we, us. Inst. fifi'sw, by me. fiq'm'élw, fis'iuw'éw, &c. by us. Gm.0r Pas. Efl'fi, of me. is'm'fi, afi'ifl'V'fi, &c. of us. Bat. 85%, to me. afi'6ll'QI, fiq'fiaw'q, 8w. to us. Abl. is'w, from me. ifi'zll'fitv, Evfiitvw. from us. (68) Also, Singular. Plural. Nam. ($1100. HRS], I, myself, I, me. Ilfill'zll or URKI'zl‘I'ENN, we, us. Inst. IIRKI'IEI‘N', by me. mn'm'iiw, nsn'm'iuw'fi'v, by us. Gen. or Poss. 1538113, of me. nan'zll'ii, tarrm'tawfi, of us. Dat. II‘REI'QI, to me. nawzn'qr, man'm'aaw'm, to US Abl. ng'aw, from me. HRKI'6M'QN,USIV6KI'3|NN‘JW, from us § 119. Second Person. Singular. Plural. Nom. .5; Ace. [ZR (also QR) thou, thee. 55181 V or Iag'iam', V you, ye. Inst. gfi'fiw, by thee. li’x'zn'fiw, li’a'ww'fiv, by you. Gen. or Poss. @lfi'i of thee. ms'zq'm, \/ a M'MW'Q, V 0f you Dat. igfi'QI, to thee. |§’a'z=r<11, Q’R'fiflw'w, to you Abl. \‘ZR'FW, from thee. ii's'zn'w, e/s'fiflw'w, from you § 120. Third Person. Singular. Plural. Nam. $1100. [2,, he, she, him, her. pugq \! or ps'zlq'fiwv, V they, them. Inst. [21%] or fil'i‘tw, by him or her. ii‘zlqfi‘v, &c. by them. lil'$il'Kal, &c. of them. Gen. or Poss. [It/<3 or rR/"fi, of him or her. But. l'kl'QI, lil'ilfl'QI, &c. to them. to him or her. db]. 6"“, from him or her. fi’vzq'gw, &c. from them. Also, Singular. Plural. Nom..$'Acc. EXQhe, she, him, her (respectfully). I'R/G'KNN or 51/2255], &c. they, them. Inst. ri'q'fiw, by him or her. li/R'KNN'EJW, &c. by them. v ¢\ Gen. orPoss. Flt/Wig, of him or her. mc'iiaw'g, &c. of them. V But. Ii/R'QI, to him or her. MG'KWV'QI, &0. to them. Abl. fi’mlv, from him or her. fiq'fiaw'w, &c. from them. (69) § 121. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. The genitiyes of the personals are likewise possessive pronouns. They are always put before the substantive, and remain unchanged in all the cases of both numbers. Possessives formed from the First Person. Singular. Plural. :6 or Gull, my, mine. R'zll'l'l, our, ours. IIREI'K‘l‘, ditto. mn'su'twv'ii, ditto. d'fi’d, ditto. Ill/'Ii‘lwu'fi, ditto. cq'é‘, ditto. is'srrii, ditto. e'rc'éi‘, ditto. qxq'qq'il, ditto. Second Person. Singular. Plural. fi’gfi, they, thine. skews, your, yours. fig'fi, do., (your.) fivtmrd, ditto. ‘s'xq'l‘li, ditto. lé’s'rww'éi, ditto. [ig'fig' “, thine, your own. Third Person. Singular. Plural. as or d’ni‘t, his, her. H'aurii, their, theirs. ti’mil, ditto. d's'tuw'é‘, ditto, 541:4), his own, her own. Ill/'Lq'fiq'l‘i, ditto. ri's'as'é‘, ditto- li’r-z'fis'qlrii ditto. § 122. DEMONSTRATIVES. The proximate demonstrative pronouns are: Qt), this (which is also expressed emphatically, thus: Qfi'S, QQ'itl, Qfi'fiq, Qfi'ii’wi, Qfi'nil'q's‘is, this very person or thing; Qii‘w, Qfi‘wh’, Qfi'lq, one, of this place, country, party, sect, profession, &c.) Q13, and, this here ; 3 this ; 3'5}, this here, also sometimes occur. The remote are : i, that (emphatically 5'3, i'fi’, §'§R, i'lil'Q, fi'lef'qiifi, that very person or thing; fi'Rl, i'x‘l', fi'll, one of that place or country, party, sect, profession), 14'15‘, Id'l‘i, that there, 5/, that, 5'3}, that there, also sometimes occurs. '1‘ (70) Declension of Qi‘. Singular. Plural. ' Nom. t3 .400. qfi‘, this. Qfi'ssi, afi'taw, these. Inst. qfiw or Qa'illw, by this. Qi'vrfi‘w, QQ'QNN'DW, by these Qfi‘tgiq'x‘i, Qfi'iiattv'fi, of these. Gen. qfic‘i or qfi'ii}, of this. Dat. qfi‘iq, to this. Qfi‘srrsi, Qfi'fiiaw'si, to these Abl. Qfi'qw, from this. Qfi'gquw, Qfi'fiatw'aw, from these.‘ Also, Singular. Plural. lVom. 5' Ace. i, that. i'glq or fi'iltiv, those. is; or P illiv, by that Inst. fi'qlq‘law, i'aaw'éiv, by those. Gen. 45' Pos. id or fi'ii, of that. {sari-i, i'tiwvfi, of those. Dat. an], to that fi'qq'q, Q'KNN'QI, to those. dbl. fi'w, from that fiiqq'qtv, fi'aaw‘qw, from those. § 123. INTBRROGATIVE PRONOUNS. The lnterrogatives are: 1g, who? 81?, which? whether? 3, what? They are declined thus : Singular. Plural. JVom. Q Ace. 43, who P $311 or ytwv, who Inst. 8N or g‘ilw, by whom P ig'ssi'lii‘iv, g'iiaw'fiiv, by whom. Gen. 25' Pos. ‘33 or g'vfi, whose Pof whom? *g'fiil'il, g'tuw'd, of whom. Dal. yet, to whom P ‘g'RBI'QJ, fls'hitN'Ql, to whom. Abl. you, of, from whom.P tsp-girl's“, ig'aatw'qw, from whoin. Singular. Plural. JVom. 5‘ Ace. law, which, whether? new or liq-saw, Inst. liq‘fitv, by which E by whom P ss'ssréitv, Kis'wv'iltv. Gen. lis'éi‘, whose P ris'sn'ii, sis'snw'fi, Dat. awe], to which P to whom P KIR'RBI'QI, ns'wv'at AM. xiv-raw, from which? lis'vi'w, lis'twv'w. (71) Singular. PlumL Nam. &Acc. 3, what P gran, Inst- 3“! or i'W‘W, by what? i'qm'fiw, Gen. 6‘ Pas. 86 or 2'13, of what, &c. i'fill'él, Dal. s'Ql, to, for what? i'gq'q, Abl. SHIN, of, from what? 3'RKI'JW. Note. The above interrogatives frequently assume the particle (38], after them, thus g'é‘n, who? (quisnam ?) lic'é‘lq, which? 3'6381, what? (quidnam ?) And then the postpositive particles must be added accordingly. § 124. RELATIVES. The above interrogatives: 2;, who? Klq', which? are used in a relative sense like wise. Instead of 1:19, sometimes Elf-2'13, (he that, that which) is used. Other relatives are Kla'é‘fil, whichever, whatever; g or Inn's, that which, what. They may be de clined accordingly to the former examples. § 125. RECIPROCALS. The reciprocals are, 1;, 14311, 63‘s, lfi'fifi, “was, signifying : self, one’s self. Exsuenns. Singular. Plural. Nam. Q A00. 18;, self, oue’s self. LR'RKI or LG'KNN, our, your or them.selves. Inst. LR'fiN. by one’s self. IG'RKI‘fiN, by selves. Gen. (3- Pas. 1W3. of one’s self. LG'qu'fi, to selves. Dat. li'q. for one's self. LR'RFI'QI, for selves. Abl. .‘LR'MJ. of, from one’s self. LK'RKI'QN, 0f, from BelVES Also, Singular. Plural. Nam. @- Ace. fig, self. fis'saw or 35'511, selves. &c. &c. &c. &c. (72') § 126. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. awvze, every, all, the whole. Klee, other. gq, all. llfifi'fill, another. QBIQ, some. Q'tal'l, any one. QMQ'é‘Bl, some one, some body. S'é‘ll, any thing. qqq'vaq, (with any negatives,) no one, Q'qQ'riill, only, mere. none. g'vrc', every one, each. [12281, fl'WR'bGI-q, whoever, whosoever. QJ'QJ, some, some one. l'lG'WC', either, each, every one. QI'QJ'é‘II, KIR'WR'bi-Z'T-‘q, whichever, whichsoever. TEFL} , 3"ZIR', every thing. one s self. a 13., z'qm'bc'r-q, whatever. Note. yes, 8112'“ and 3'“, when followed by any of the negative or prohibitive particles it, 5}, in, ii, may be expressed by, none or no one, neither, nothing. Venus. § 127. Among the verbs there are no terminations in any tense whatever, expres sive of persons. It is the preceding noun, pronoun, or the context that must show them. There are many impersonal or indefinite locutions or expressions formed by the participles : present, past, and future. Those of the participle future in E or Lil's and IIL'E, may he often expressed in English by ‘ you must,’ or ‘ you must not ;’ ‘ we must,’ or ‘ we must not. § 128. The participle present, as a verbal noun, might be taken for the theme of a verb, for fixing the signification of it in a Dictionary, as the Tibetans sometimes do. But, as it is more common, and more consonant with our ideas to take the in~ finitive,l have most frequently done so. The participle present terminates always in one of the articles q or 'q. It is a participial noun, and may be taken both adjec tively and substantively ; as 5511, doing or a doing; Q‘gll'q, walking (going), or walk. ing (a going) ; g'q, speaking, a speaking, speech. When it denotes the agent, the article may be expressed in several modes; as for a male: is"; for fiq'q'q, a doer ; 55'; for it"q'fil, the doer or maker ; for a female: ('73) fifi'lt for QR'H'N, a female agent ; §Y£tlfor fis'nrit', the (female) doer or maker. Such par ticipial nouns are frequently expressed also by adding to the root either is or NIH, or sometimes both, thus: és'amq, (with or without the articles :1, for the male and at for the female,) as: Qii'ést-ll m. t-Jt, f. Qia‘atrw-u m. t-at, f. Qlif'és'arraq, a walker. § 129. The infinitive is formed by affixing a 1, to the u or 1: terminations of the participial noun; as, éR'LIl, to do, make ; Q’if'ql, to go, walk. By the infinitive is expressed the supine and the geruud also; but, instead of £11, and 1:1, the latter may assume any of the postpositive particles 2, 3, b, or -1, g; as, 5&3, for doing, to do ; £251, for going, to go; ail/Bra, for reading, to read; Ili‘ifl'lw'g, for looking on, to look on ; 5'5 or '51, for eating, to eat. § 130. The indicative present is expressed in the several modes following ; 1. By the simple root of the verb, dropping the infinitive sign (£11. or 1J1) ; as is, he does ; QL‘QI, he goes. I 2. By the reduplication of the final letter of the root, with the addition of the a vowel over it; as, és'i', he does, oil/91’, he walks; also qsl'l'il; he is or sits, ng'al, he commands, there is, viiq'ii', it is, QQ‘Q'IY, he performs, i’it'a‘tl, he thinks, gQ, he speaks, qgl'i', he will be, "lit/QI'Q‘Il, he begs, ilw'fi’, he knows. 3. By adding to the infinitive, is or és'fil, and dropping the infinitive sign be fore them ; as, Qil/"qrés or Qill'éfi, he does walk; H'IIL'QR or Z'QR, he does eat. 4. By adding, after the root of the verb, 'qfiwq; or either ofthe auxiliaries, Q58], it, preceded by any of the particles, 5W, filly, é‘q, 6Q or '38,, (agreeably to the final let ter of the root ;) as, is": 3w or és'fia'qsrl, és'é‘a'ss, is doing; Q‘i'rtfia'q or Qifia'asll, Q8358; (or Qif'dq) 'iI-I' is going or walking. _ § l3l. The root of the perfect participle, preterite or past tense, and ofthe par ticiple passive, is the same. It is formed regularly in some verbs, by affixing N to the root of the indicative present; as, from Ely-1', he commands; quw, commanded. Some drop the Q prefix only ; others drop the Q prefix, and assume a w afiix; as, from QQL, he becomes, g1, is become, grown; from Qé‘, he writes, £61, wrote, writ ten. In other cases the past tense is formed irregularly. It assumes frequently one of the particles. in, g1, '38), $1, @1321 § 132. The imperfect and pluperfect are formed by adding to the root of the present and perfect tense the auxiliary verb, QBKI'U, was; as, from fi'q'rtl, to come; 0 (74) é'c'qslq'u, was coming ; d’GN'QSKI'lI, had come. But, as an historical imperfect, and pluperfect, they are commonly expressed thus: the imperfect by the participle per feet in u; as, germ, he said; and the pluperfect, by adding to the former ain't! ; as, gw'q'ii‘m'u or gw'v‘ia'u, he had said. § 133. The indicative future is formed regularly, in many verbs, from the in finitive, by adding le; as, és'qrqgl, will or shall do: (sometimes the infinitive sign is dropped; as, és'le.) The participle futures in g, QL'Q'H or 'qrg'tt, are formed, in many Verbs, especially neuters, from the root of the indicative present; as Qil'g, QQII'UL‘E'H, about to go, to be gone. In other cases, they are formed from the roots of the irregular future tenses. § 134. The imperative, in some cases, is the same with the root of the present or preterite indicative ; as, _in Q38], do sit ; 675;, go away. In some instances the inherent a or expressed é of the above mentioned tenses or their roots, are changed into 0; as, from H, to eat, (or he eats,) 5', do eat ; from aim, he cures; @131, do cure from Qatar, he thinks; til/NW, do think, consider; sometimes N, also is affixed ; as, from 1, he says, speaks ; {NT-all, say, do speak. § 135. The subjunctive present (or hortative or precative mood,) is formed re gularly from the imperative, by adding any of the particles, in, (3:1, fin ; as in 351'“. sq, let him read, he may read ; iii’c't‘q‘li, let him go, he may go ; d’wfin, let him consider, he may consider ; or from the infinitive, by adding grill, it’ll or 51181351, signifying let, may ; as, iiw'urgrfiq, (also iwgrfi‘h) may (he) know or be acquainted with it; QIG'IIL'AIII or Fibrin, may it come or happen. § 136. The conditional forms of the conjunctive mood are formed by adding It (na) to the roots of the indicative present and preterite: as, 55's, if you would do, and gore, if you may have done. The conjunctive future may be expressed by the past tense, with the future sign qgl ; as, giv'qrqgl, shall have done; 'qgisw qr. QQL, shall have read over or perused. § 137. When the roots of the indicative present, preterite, and future tenses, and that of the imperative, are known, the rest may be formed regularly by certain adventitious particles or auxiliary verbs. ('75) llow the roots alluded to are expressed in many verbs, will be shown, by numer ous examples, below. § 138. Although there be some verbs in this tongue that commence with a single consonant, and of which the roots never change, the several tenses being dis tinguished by some additive terminations; yet the greatest part of the verbs, besides such terminations, assume one of the five prefixes (=|'q'1q'It'Q,) for the for mation of the present, preterite, and future tenses ; causing hence many irregularities: these are exhibited in the following scheme, under 10 heads according to the 10 radical letters, Pl'=i'Jo'F, &'R' (76) Ind. pres. pret. fut. imperat. signification. Qilt I!!!“ WK Ii/It, v. a. to scatter, sprinkle. Qfilq 1:['§1'<)I \15\1’<1[ film, u. a. to unfold, explain. In such verbs as the preceding, the future is formed from the indicative present by turning the Q prefix into that of R, and the expressed é vowel into the inherent a, and by dropping the second aflix N. From the future, the preterite is form ed by turning the R into ‘q, and the hard ll into the sharp *1. The imperative is formed from the indicative present, by dropping the Q, and the second afiix N; and by turning the hard =1 into the aspirate ll, and the é vowel into 0. ln the following eight numbers, the analysis of the several tenses will be left to the learner’s sagacity. § 141. No. 3. I Ind. pres. pret. fut. imperat. signification. Q&5l IX65W 71651 3»/Fl Or £1/Ii, v. a. to travel through or over; to go or pass up and down. QUE‘ new new $3-1', v a. to keep, hold, wear. QM aa=.'§n was El/R, v a. to explain, tell. Q85 Iww zusa 3/II, v. a. to conceal, hide. Q3‘! aw am KN, v. a. to prepare, make ready. Q£c' Itirw =t£r:' iii‘, v. a. to bind, tie, fasten. <2£1=t aiaw 1:31: git, v. a. to mount, ascend. Q Q 145“ as QM, v. a. to fetch up water, to irrigate, water. '3 II Iris: 1:3 aw, v. a. to promise, assure. £1 Item: nan 31/51, v. a. to split, cleave ; to confess, &c. Q3 113'“: H3’ Kw, v. a. to prepare, make ready. § 142. No. 4. Ind. pres. pret. fut. imperat. signification. ass: It-BQJ KIQQI Qé/<11, v. a. to weigh, ponder, &c. Qr‘-in IP15] non iilq, v. a. to destroy, &c. Qi§lI seas flea @1711, v. a. to suck, draw out, &c. (’77) Ind. pres. pret. fut. imperal, signification. asst Iris: mas: £91 v. a. to depose, divest. Q5 new Its GEN, v. a. to digest, concoct. ass 1:581 alga] QB] v. a. to put, make, cause. Q54 am sign; as, v. a. to subdue, make tame. as \/ new It; Qfilw', v. a. to express, milk. st use man an, a. a. to put, place, lay down. ass“: 1133: 8K3,“ git, v. a. to subdue, conquer, overcome, &c. § 143. No.5. as“ new W18! all“, v. a. to grind ; weave. Qau Iiii‘lw "all all, a. a. to let fall in drops. as? new new QQC, v. a. to drink, to drink up. man new IIER QQTI, v. a. to cut to small pieces. Q51 as: 81:1 Qé'x, v. a. to scatter, diffuse. § 144. No. 6. QQR' flfia' Klfiq' 5?, v. a. to spread on the ground. qut use: use] gay, 1:. a. to subdue, break. QiKW Iris BIKE] 5‘1, 11. a. to lift up. Q€uw sea :51; 51;, v. a. to cast, throw, &c. V Q'i 51W :1qu arm, v. a. to tie, bind. ash Bug's 51's, 1:. a. to utter, eject, &c. § 145. No. 7. WA"! gqq TZ’QI, v. a. to separate. Qg Qé‘ :2, v. a. to make less, subtract. v Q'Q‘l gi'q this, v. a. to take by force. § 146. No. 8. aims in Rial 738" } v. a. to bore, to pierce. QB‘W an ‘5'“ 5", Q53 E'i $55 355, v. a. to put off. ass" as KER an, o. a. to vault, overarch. an an $51 3% v. a. to ofi'er, present, give. I l (78> Q‘EI‘Q‘V "It VIII 121/11, v. a. to make descend, to let down. Q35 gq' Kg: gli', v. a. to draw or pull out. Q58 5 R?! 5, v. a. to separate, divide, open. § 147. No.9. Qisl Itihw will gm v. a. to sift, strain. Qiq IWIW IW‘q it: or sin, 0. a. to repay, give an equivalent for. (25¢. U31. Ital. £1, 1). a. to express, squeeze. Q; 11%“ 4201‘ Nigel, v. a. to hurt, to do harm to. Qifi rig“! Hg in, v. a. to boil, dress; dye, tinge. Qiit HENRI Hi“ 5“, v. a. to sew, stitch. Qg It’ll/N llfl‘!’ KYN v. a. to feed, keep, nourish ; to keep alive. lel “Hit/KIN 11551 in, v. a. to cut, hew, engrave; to prick, goad. ng' ngN Hit-2' gfi', v. a. to sell. Qgsvnzis, Hi6; Hg in, v. a. to boil, dress; dye, tinge. Q50; qiql'ii‘fi H301 £01, 0. a. to seek, search after. § 148 No. 10. Qéfi 111? 511‘ a", v. a. to take, seize. Qéq 13551 M35! 58!, v. a. to fit, or set, fix, plant. Qgg ugg 8113 is, v. a. to convert, turn, make enter into. let 113“ N3" 1", v. a. to shut, close. Qgg; H31. £131. 31, v. a. to shun, avoid. 05% age new N, v. n. to creep in. Qé‘, 1T5? 8155 is, v. a. to hold, keep, receive. qéat 115$; 81%“ EN, v. n. to blush, to be ashamed for. - § 149. Observations on the five prefixes (Kr 5' 'q' ar' Q,) These letters, prefixed to any letter, syllable or word, occur, as has beenwseen, among other parts of speech as well as the verbs; but it is among the verbs especi ally that their utility is conspicuous; the formation of the indicative present, preterite, and future tenses depending principally on them. (79) § 150. Use of the prefix ll : In some verbs, it is retained in all tenses, as ': Ind. pres. prel. fut. imperat. signification. 513 ‘13“: "ls'ql‘q 21 BliW'dll, to make water. with wife“: nith'qrq g1 mir'nw'fin, to cover. use msw Kiss'ql'qgr. mss'firl, to command, say. Krw mvé‘m sw'urqu BMW'NL' }u. n. to dwell, be. grill, With some verbs it is used only in the present and future (and sometimes in the imperative too) as : mils 115s I!le 3’5 or Rigs, v. a. to cut, to cut off. nifg 1w: v. rW-w saw as, v. a. to give. Egg 1;“ m5 5’s, v. a. to commit to, to entrust. 5171,15 twig swg iii/s, or Kids, to kill, slay, murder. slat/8| IWFI BWQ Kid/6, to hear, hearken to. With many verbs it is used only in the future, as may be seen in the above scheme Nos. 4, 5, 6, 9, 10. § 151. Use of the prefix 5: In some verbs it is retained in all tenses, as : Ind. pres. pret. fut. imperat. signification. 551/51 KNEW filtl'l fill/8|, v. a. to measure, weigh, ponder. 1551'; suriiq 514:. sift, v. a. to dictate, tell what to write. gfi’c' I;ch Ry: gi'c', v. a. to hang, to hang down. gig ggg'z‘iq KER gfi’q, v. a. to try, prove, judge, examine. In some instances, it is found only with the preterite and future tenses, as: Q38] RQBW Ram [5151, v. a. to trouble, stir up. sfi/Ql'iiq 551/01 film, v. a. to make a noise with a‘musical instrument to play on. In many verbs, it is used only in the future, as may be seen above, Nos. 2, 7, 8. (80) § 152. Use of the prefix 1;: In a few verbs, it is retained in all tenses, as : 1151/3 Ital/W '15], IUEWI-fill, v. a. to divide, to give in share. 11% 1:5“; fig @N, v. a. to do, make. qgg ngv Hg 3W, 1:. a. to cleanse (rice, &c.) by beating. In many verbs, the It is prefixed only to the preterite tense, as to be seen in many instances above, Nos. 2, 4, 6, 10. In some veibs it is used both in the preterite and future tenses, as to be seen above, Nos. 1, 3, 5. § 153. Use of the prefix 8t : The at prefix is retained in all tenses with some verbs, as : 8% figs! N£'q1'qu, v. n. to go, repair to. Jig/R lid/figs Halt-VIIL'Q 31, v. a. to see, to look on. In a few instances it is used only in the preterite and future tenses; as in NQQ'QL, v. a. to hear fully, to listen to ; and in NM'IJL, v. a. to depress, ravish, to outdo. § 154. Use of the prefix Q: Of the five prefixes, this is the one most extensively employed with the verbs. It is retained in some verbs in all the three tenses, as: Ind. pres. pret. fat. signification. qfiq Qfiqw Qfill'lll'le, v. n. to stick to or together. QEq QEEIIV ng'qpqgr, v. n. to be troubled or stirred up. Q8|8| Qslsw Qulq'ql'qgl, v. n. to stop, stay, still. qgg' ngw ng'qrqgt, v. a. to drink. QRQ qu QEQ'IIL‘QQL, v. n. to pass, go away, die. q; Q51v qg'tqux, v. n. to assemble, gather together. It is dropped very frequently in the preterite, as: mg; $1; orirql'qu, v. a. to carry. qffig fig qfiq'qrqg’l, v. a. to lead, conduct. erw aw QKIN'LIL‘QgL, v. n. to be split or cleft. Q3; g1 QQL'QL'Q gr. 1). n. to become, grow, change, turn. QéR as Qéfi'qL'le, v. n. to be spent entirely. (81) The Q prefix, with most verbs, is used only in the indicative present (with a few exceptions in the imperative), as may be seen in the above scheme, Nos. 1, to 10. § 155. From several neuter verbs the active forms are thus derived : Ind. pres. pret. fut. signification. from Qtslt [531“! Qew'nl'ag 1, v. n. to shrink, contract himself. ngflw n3", 1:. a to contract. from a“ QI'ZIR qri’n'éiq ari’s'nragl, a. n. to settle, sit. V Qlil’n IIIKI'R Rik, v. a. to fix, set, build, frame, V a V from QPYI. QI‘B L'na Q11 rnrqgl, 11. n. to turn, go, walk round about. if; UHL'H'JD V a nsi'l, u. a. to turn round ; encircle, surround, circumambulate. from QKW an annragl, v. n. to be split or cleft. min new 51W, v. a. to split, cleave. from QKIII ennn an'nl'le, v. n. to stop, be hindered. Qfinn nnn nan, v. a. to hinder, prohibit. from Q9361 sn“ Qsfl'nl'ag 1, e . n. to die, perish, be extinguished. QQNI-lll'éfi n3" new, e . a. to destroy, kill, extinguish. from ass: an'gq Qan'nl'qg 1, v. n. to shake, quake, to agitated. gas ngn'éis ngn, a. a. to move, agitate, shake. from as 1 gum-“=26 Qg runng 1, v. n. to become, change, turn. \IJ 31, ngx'aq ngl, v. a. to change, turn, translate. from Q5 an Qé'nrag 1, v. n. to go asunder, be diffused. Q58 new n5. v. a. to scatter, disperse, diffuse, dis tribute. from new eon-fin Qén'nrog 1, c. n. to be turned upside down. $0: ngsré‘m new, 0. a. to turn upside dOWn. from Qfin Qffi‘l'gq Q’iKI'KIL'Qg 1, a. n. to congrue, agree, be coherent. fin nfinn nan, v. a. to adjust, make agree, compose. from Qé‘n fin Qfin'nrqg 1, a. n. to be ofi‘uscated, to grow less; fin nfinn '43“, ¢\ a. a. to ofi'uscate, darken. "' In the neuter verbs, the future is often formed with the preterite also, thus; un'nrqgl Y ( 82 ) Ind. pres. pret. fut. szgmficatzon. from aim i‘w Q‘gm'qlqgl, v. n. to roll down, to shrink. is minis 'qfiq, v. a. to roll, wrap up. from Q51: gs ng'qugl, v. n. to be ready, be accomplished. rig-q, v. a. to make ready, accomplish. g'q sins from Q15? Q‘JRN QETJG'IIL'QgL, v. n. to arise, stand up. fir; miss: afic', v. a. to raise, erect. from Q1591 15151 Qij'w‘ql'qg 1, v. n. to be loosened, untied. 0131’s or Qfim 1151's: site], } v. a. to loosen, untie; explain ; de liver, save. its =1 swift WW: q581'q1'qg 1, v. n. to break. from Q58] as Eli's use ngrl'qrqu, v. a. to break. 65 qgfi-qxgqgl, v. n. to be rent, dissolved. from or“ J 813's use use, v. a. to cut off, divide. from Qé’q 5". Qa'q'qrqg 1, v. n. to issue, be uttered. Qi’e 11% xii/q, v. a. to utter, eject. qg'ql'qgl, v. n. to assemble, gather together. from Q5 Q5»: 14g, v. a. to collect, gather together, amass. 5" age: QSN'QL'QgL, v. n. to agree with, be in concord. from Q5" 3a: gar ngaw “g”, v. a. to make agree, reconcile. from Que: item-is QTZQJ'IIL'QgJL, v. n. to increase, be augmented. is: tier?“ fiQl'IIL'QgL, v. a. to augment, &c. from Qfi' <2an QYZI/ql'le, v. n. to shift, change, transmigrate. i {(61 ri'qregl, v. a. to shift, change. from QHQI 5% qq'qx'qg 1, v. n. to withdraw from, be separated. was: m1 seer. v. a. to separate. from Qé‘ Qfi'qrqgl, v. n. to grow less. (2'3 Kg, 0. a. to make less, subtract. from QIIII rim-w QHU'LIL'QQ 1., v. n. to descend, fall, flow. J aims: uq VIII. v. a. to make descend, let down. (83) Ind. pres. pret. fut. signification. from lei' gt; qgla'ttl'qul, v. n. to come forth, to be produced; be, become. Q38; 3G sglt, v. a. to draw, pull out, &c. from Q} 5 Qé'qx'qgl, v. n. to open, be divided, separated. Qgfi 5 gé, v. a. to open, separate, analyse. from QEBI HEW Qérrqrqu, v. n. to drop, fall in drops. oils; qisw 1:12:11 or min, 0. a. to strain, let fall in drops. from g gs] i'qL'le, v. n. to be born, 0r produced. gr; qgg'fiq rags, v. a. to generate, produce. from 51:; gar-£6, gu'qrog 1, v. n. to set, sink. 31; 1:31;“; 1:, v. a. to abolish, destroy. From the above examples, the intelligent learner may see, by what contraction, addition or transformation, the actives are usually derived from their respective neu ters. In many cases, both the neuter and active are sounded alike, although they differ considerably in orthography. § 156. For expressing the substantive verb (am, art, is, are; there is, there are) the 'l'ibetans use several terms, according as they speak'to inferiors, equals, 0r su periors, with more or less respect or politeness. Those terms, or substantive verbs, are: via. ea, QS‘I, ngnw, new, 915W, ace, Kl’sQ, its, it’s, Qéq, new, 1:, new. The negatives of them are thus expressed : 538; or N'Q‘q, its, é'i'Q5q, zi‘rqgmv, wag“ awn“), a‘l'atGQ, a‘i'nsQ'IZt's'fia, ii'qéqr, a‘i'nw, fining it'né‘q'q. They stand in the indicative present, and are invariable after every person of both numbers. Their signification, in general, may be expressed, in English, by am, art, is, are; it is; there is, there are; by the inflection of do and bare. The term Qg‘ll especially, is used like the auxiliaries do and have in English, instead of the repetition of the verb of the preced ing sentence, as in AWN“, ngi'df, do you know i I do. All the above enumerated verbal roots (or substantive verbs) have no variation_ When inflected in the several tenses, they are formed by the same particles, as have been before set forth ; and especially by the inflexion of the auxiliary verb Q21, and A Q Q for the past tense, are. (84) § 157. These substantive verbs frequently occur, when used emphatically, (but with the same signification,) in the form of having the final letter reduplicated with the o vowel over them, thus: 13¢; yin-no, lily; yod-do, Q3511; hdug-go, “EXQYIN'R‘J/ zhugs-so, Ngtv's‘l’ mchhis-so, QIKW'K‘J/ lags-so, NGQ'fi' or Nqfilmiiaho, m5 grin/to, "3': mad-do, mod-do, Qéq'df htshal-lo, nw'ii gnas-so, ‘gq'l‘t/ snang-go, ‘qiqiwuff bzhin paho. By such reduplication the substantive verb may be expressed with every sort of noun; as, mil, I am; IIRKI‘BY, I am, it is l; R'RKI'K‘I', those are, or it is they (or those); {343"}, thou art ; Blglt'ail, there are three; rural, it is wood or tree; will, it is black; fi'rgri’, it is so. § 158. Examples of the above substantive verbs. fibril/'13!“ he is great; fi'gl'wm'ai’, it is so ; QQ'AR'Q'i'ii/g, what is in this P G's‘rls'fi’, I am, I do exist ; 3423‘], who is there? NR'KY'QS‘I'IEIi there are many ; gorif'q's'ngw, where is the king? I'BC'QHG'WIIQKIN'Q', he is in the palace; QQ'QS'NJ‘iN, how many are here? qé'ifl'flgw'd", there are about one hundred ; K'S'Kfi/Ql'qi'iKW'QIBW'iJ', I am ofa low caste; i'gl'oilw, it is so; é/R'Q'fifi'fi'NRQ, there is no disease to thee, (or thou art exempt from, desase.) NRN'QN'W'EI/Q'BWNgl't'NRQWY, Buddha has (there is to him) the chief perfection, i'fi‘s'lqiq, what is there? Ns'fil, it is true, it is so; fi'gl'it’s, it is even so; Q'Qim'df, I am begging, I do beg, (entreat ;) fi'fllqw'w‘f, there is not ; fil'ai’q'fiQ'iR, he is reading; gs'g'qt‘q‘wq, thou speaking, when thou art speaking. § 159. Conjugation of the verb iiwa, to be. INDICATIVE PRESENT. Singular. Plural. 1 Person. G'iiq, I am. c'taw'v‘is, we are. 2 Ditto. tilvfis, thou art. és'ituw'iiq, ye are. 3 Ditto. fi'uiiq, he, she, is. riitwv'ti‘m, \ they are, . IMPERFECT Singular. Plural. l a'an'q, I was. G'6FI'QSKI'U, we were. 2 [Q/g'qgln'u, thou wast. @i'i'éxl'QSEl'q, ye were. 3 H'ng'q, he was. lil'zq'ng'q, they were. (85) PERFECT Tense. Singular. Plural. l. c'q‘l'g'u'ilq, vulg. nayot pin, I have been. cwwv‘fiwfiq, we have been. thou hast been. lglfi'zil'fi/R'Ll‘ilq, ye have been. - lea'ws'll'wa, \/ \I Q V V a 3;. Fvwaquwq, he has been. K'zq'iig'q'i‘rq, they have been. PLUPERFECT Tense. Singular. Plural. 1. C'Ia/R'Q'IavIl'Llol'G'lllfl'lerl'l1, I had been. z'3q'wq'q'vfiq'q, \l we had been. 2- li/R'iI/R'N'V‘lfi'll, thou hadst been. lglfi'zfil'al'fi'wilqw, ye had been. . wannabe, he had been. H'zll'Q/R'Q'lllq'q. they had been. FIRST FUTURE. Singular. Plural. , q'lel-i’orR'le'ql'qgll-i; I shall or q'zrl'qglu-i’, we shall or will be. will be. 2. fiR'leI-if, thou shalt or wilt be. ék'm'qea 11-:‘5, ye shall 01' will be. . lilqglLT-IY, he shall or will be. Waxing 11-35, they shall 01' will be. 4 Seconn FUTURE. Singular. Plural. I. R'fifi'ql'qglt-f, I shall have been. G'zll'QM'ql'lel-IY, we shall have been. 2. l'i'g'vi‘wLIL'lel-i'. thou shalt have been. la/R'zll'llll'lJL'lel-i ye shall have been. _ rk’wfiq-qpqgu-ifl he shall have been. l'zl'zll'Q‘lQ'Lqung-I: they shall have been. IMPERATIVE Moo 0. Singular. Plural. . C‘gl'sll, let me be. c'zfil'grill, let us be. 2. li’q'ax'ill, be thou. lgfi'6il'g1'38l, be ye. J 3. I‘ll/grill, let him, her be. IT‘S/'6Kl'gl'28l, let them be. POTENTIAL M001). PReseNT Tense. Singular. Plural. 1. c'ilq'qrgvt-iill, I may or can be. R'zfl'q‘la'ql'i'VI-IQ', we may or can be. 2. rigx'fi‘wa'gwlif, thou mayst or canst be. gvswilq'qrgm-fi: ye may or can be. 3. la'ilq'LJL'SNl-N, v v he may or can be. " [114M'Gq'q1'gwl-IQ’, they may or can be. Also, wilb'a‘s’ll, &c. &c. Or Gila/811T, &c. &c. (86) PRECATIVE Moon. Singular. Plural. I. G'i‘fi'ltl'zqkl, 0r G'le'ql'il’ll, I may be or q'zq'tiiarqr's‘iq or qgl'tlriill, may we be become. or become. 2, tilg'rfiqu'zi/ll, thou mayst be or become. lilfl'lil'Q‘IQ'lll'a/K], ye may be or become. 3. iii/'i‘wuriill, he may be or become. lil'thIiifi'uL'h/KI, they may be or become. CONDITIONAL. Singular. Plural. 1. view, should or would I be, or if I were. G'zq'fiq'q, should or would we be, or if we were. 2, filg'fiq'q, shouldest or wouldst thou be, or Q’yzn'vz'iq'q, should or would ye be, or if ye if thou wert. were. 3, [ii/airway, should or would he be, or if he fis‘zq'viis'q, should or would they be, or if were. they were. CONDITIONAL PERFECT Tense. 1, g'u'iq'qx'g 1:8,, I may or can have been, or And so on with all the persons, in both ifI might have been, &c. numbers. CONDITIONAL PLUPER FECT TENSB L gvfiq'quyq'q, I might or should have been, or if I might, &c. SUBJUNCTIVE Moon. Singular. Plural. qq'fi'cuiia', if I am (or be). llQI'fi'R'zfil'iiq, if We are or be. Kiwis/vim, if thou be- Elm'i'ri's'su'fiq, if ye be. mrfi'tiiiiq, if he be. Bim'i'rZ/‘zn'v'iq, if they be. IMPERFBC’I‘ Tense. nql'fi'u'viiwq, if I were, and so on. Pnnrnc'r Tnsse. qm'fi'wbsgqui‘rsi-q, if I have been, &c. &c. PLUPERFECT. SIQl'h'K'Ql’R'lI'Vi-‘M'll'fi, if I had been, &c. FIRST FUTURE. noi'fi'c'qgni.’ or Q% L'qrqg 1111’, if I shall be, or shall become. (87) Sncoun FUTURE. qm'fi'C'ilWlll'le'q, ifI should be or become. INFINITIVE. Present, QQ'QL, to be. Perf. Q’R'KI'QQ'QL, to have been. PARTICIPLES. Pres. Q‘lq'u, being; pref. ill/Wu, been. Compound perfect, *ZYR'Q'Q‘M'LI, having been. § 160. Conjugation of the substantive verb it’fi'qx to be (to one, to be there). The English verb ‘ to have’ is rendered by 'll/R'HJL, to be there, to be to one. It 'may be conjugated thus: INDICAT. Pans. Singular. Plural. v . V - 1_ ug'qpqm, (to me 1s,) I have. W-EKI'QI'WR, (to "s 15,) we have, 8‘9 2, gg'm'rus, V V thou hast. es'zn'qrwsde \l \I have V V V \r 3, [a ‘3'“, he has. rvm'm'wa, they have. Imperfect, q'qyifg'q or ngq'q, I had, and so on, with all persons, in both numbers. Perfect tense. R'QI'YER'U'QJ), I have had, &c. Pluperfect tense. q'm'irs'wilwu 0r R'W‘l‘I/S'Qfsil'll, I had had, &c. Future. K'QI'QlIR'QL'Qggl or 'ZI/R'le, I shall have (or there will be to me). Imperat. R'Ql'qllfi'sll 01' 1‘35], let me have. Potential. C'QI'fi/i'gxl, ‘ I V may or can have. Pres. or C'QI'WR' 523‘ Imperf. z'or'ir's'qgrq, should (or could) I have. Perfect. G'QJ'VYR'QLEL, I may or can have had. Pluperf. c'w'ix'g'qrgarqr-q, 1 should (might or could) have had. SUBJUNCTIVE Moon. Present. BFJI'fi'l-T'W'zI/R, if I have, and so on. Imperfect. IlQl'i'G'W'iI/R'fi, if I had, or should I have, 810. Perfect. qm'fi'q'm'ails'grq, ifl have had, or should I have had. Pluperfeet. nm'fi'c'q'IZr/Q'qrgrwq, if I had had. Future. Kim'fi'G'QJ'QI/R'QL'Qggrq, if I shall have, or should I have here. after, &c. (83) INFINITIVE. Present. (S‘§M'QI) il'R'Lll, to be (to one), to have. Perfect. (ye-inn) 'Zg'qfiqwl, to have been (to one), to have bad. PARTICIPLES. Present. (g'é‘q'q) it’s, being (to one); having. Perfect. 'l‘I/R'q, berm (to one) ; hail. Camp, perfect. (g'afil'm) QIR'H'QQ'Q, having been (to one) ; having had. Note ; This verb, when constructed with the nominative, thus G'VYR or G'Wl/fi'al, signifies I am, I exist, or I do exist. Observations : By the aid of these two substantive verbs (and their equivalents : an,qglw, sign, Qinw, uaq, Klsq, NR, 31K, Q2411, WW, it, 1456's! ; see§ 156) as also by that of the two auxiliary verbs 53 and Qg 1., which will be described hereafter, (see § 171, 172,) may be formed and conjugated all the tenses of the verbal roots; asalso of every verb in the Tibetan language. The conjugation of Tibetan verbs is very simple ; it is little else than a parti cipial variation; and much resembles the following mode of English conjugation: Indicat. pres. I (thou, he, she, they,) going, R'lel'q,ql\:|'<‘2/ or Q5. Imperfect. I was going, G'QQI'Qgfil'q. Perf. p. part. I went, (gone,) Fol/G". Pluperf. I was gone, (or I had went,) G'filt'ng'q. Future. I shall go, c'Qz'g or oil/g or R'Qé‘qL'QQLI-Z. Conditional. If I (or should I) go, G'Q‘Ell'ai, Cond. past. IfI have gone, R'R‘J’G'q. Cond. fut. If I shall have gone, R'Q’C'IIL'QQL'Q. Infinitive. To go, Qill'tll. Irgfinit. future. For going, ‘0 0, will 01' Q5159. Supine or Ger. 8 I PARTICIPLES. Present. Going, an'q. Pret. Gone, KT"!! * Instead of Qiglq, which is Obsolete, as a perf. tense or participle; but as a verbal noun, signifying gait, or the manner of going, it is in continual use. '( 89) Pluperfecl- Having gone, diva? or *‘YR'MHQ'R'IIN also; Q’R'il, \‘I’K'l'l‘w, rifc'q. Future. About to go, to be gone, QQY'Q, Q'Eil'g, le‘f'qL'g'q. The reason of the Tibetan verbs being invariable with respect to person and number, is, that properly they are participles; as, is, doing or making ; 8N, done; 9 or g'rr, about to do, make, shall do, to be done. § 161. Several verbs may be formed from adjectives by the junction of certain auxiliaries. The neuters are formed by ‘36, QSKI, &c. &c. ; as, en's‘f'dq'qx, to be black ; :“M'stu to be ripe. § 16-2. The inceptives are formed by 62%: and Will, to become, grow; as, Al'l'fi'r Q3 1111 or Qg'fll. to become, grow or turn black. Q And the actives are formed by the inflection of QR'LIL, to make; as, QKI'JJL'QYHJL, to make black; iifi'qré'i'lu, to make ripe. § 163. Active and passive verbs ending in :35 or fig'fi’, can be discriminated only by the instrumentive and the nominative cases expressed before them; as, Rv'qu'qréqr-fi’, (he) is beaten by me, or I do beat (him) ; R'ia'rrrfiq-fi’, I am beaten. § 164. All such verbs as end in éflt-fi’, and have the instrumentive case before them, may be rendered in English, both in an active and passive sense; as, qw'lilq' 5, q'q1'§§'§’, I beat thee, or thou art beaten by me; but, with the nominative case, only in the passive voice; as, lei‘iq'ql'és, thou art beaten ; Qé‘ll'im'qé‘q'qa'ég, the world is destroyed ; Q§q'i=h"2§'3|'$'iiw (or an) Evils: (5w) sear-vii“: will (or qé‘q) £11395, this world is to be destroyed by water, fire, and wind. § 165. Causal verbs are formed from the actives by adding to the gerund or to the root of the infinitive, the verb QEKI'UL, (to put, cause, make,) in its several tenses; as, QEKI, for the pres. ,- 11581, for the pret. ,- Sign, for the fut. ; and 581 for the impera tive,- as, Qfil'ng'ul, to cause to write or to be written. Sometimes the gerund sign is dropt ; as, Qfex'qgn'ul, (for Qlil's'an'QLQ to cause to carry. Instead of gal-Pu, the verb gqu, (pret. and fut. QQ‘TJQ is used for forming a causal verb, when speaking respectfully ; as, rillrl'zq'fir/q'ql, to cause to read, or to be instructed in reading. (90) § 166. Frequentatives are expressed by repeating the verbal root ; as, fig'is'wt, to do often; QZE'QHV'IIJL, to go often ; ng'qu-qz, to make a practice of sitting, or to sit often; n’n'a’srqx, to read often. § 167. Potentials are formed by adding to the verbal root, or to the infini tive, either ivy, gq'q, first, or III/R11, to can, be able, to may, to have power, to have courage, to dare; as, és'gw'QL, to can do; Qtil'g'q'tu, to be able to carry away; Itfi'g'fll'i'fi/KPQL, to can or be able to praise one ; G'a'fil'qglch'fi‘lZI/fl'a’, I can, or dare, not go thither. § 168. Desideratives are expressed by sts'qx, 'qrfiR'LIl, to will, VI ish, desire, in tend, &c. ; as, Qfi‘ql'qi’s'qrt or Qif'ofi’g'ql, to wish or intend to go ; atqorrtrqcfiq'qx, to wish to sleep. §169. Completive verbs are formed by 991! aim rill QIG'I grown, become, finished, done, gone. These particles are frequently added to the root of the pre terite or past tense, to make a complete perfect of it. They may be expressed in several ways; as, g1; grln grq'i‘rsr grfi’r grim grim'qr gris'fi’n in £81111 'Zis'iii fis'u'lfis n .211 incur éx'ifi (trim él'z‘iq'ii'n si’s'i til/c'éxrs‘l’s'q'v‘h-i'n Examples, l'is/‘NIZN'QL'QL'TY, he has become learned ; R'R'i'u'fiw'a‘is, l have not known that; flfi'&'Q§‘R'SI-I'N'gl, this book has not yet been finished; a'at'nl'fi’q, the sun has arisen; Q'q'gq'QJ/C, the moon has set; lil'fi'flillq', he has died, or, he is dead. § 170. Active and causal verbs require before them, in general, the instru~ mentive case (i. e. the nominative with any of these particles; Ev; fin; @sn -a; m v'iw, according to the final letter of the nominative case), and the neuters and pas~ sives, in like manner require the nominative or objective case. But, when the active verb is intransitive, the nominative is used; as,r;¢;'q1iw'q.§l1'§s, he walks; c'a‘i'qgoi, I do not walk or go. Instead of the instrumentive case, the nominative is also used with the emphatical I; as, R'iii'fi'et'gw's‘f for Gw'i'at'gw'tcll, I have not told (or not said) to (or by me it has not been said). As also, when the objective case takes the Q} particle, the nominative (or accusative) is used, instead of the instrumentive; as, Usq'ré/g'q'i'n'fi' for qqq'fiw, lis'QI'il'fill have told thee (or you), it has been said by me to you. (91) Examples of the use of the instrumentive case; am'n‘z’w'nsu'fii-nsw'QfI-sgwrxr ngi-iiana'nrgrim mew Ilsw'qmsw'qrqgrq, &c. &c. The king commands, has commanded, will command, let him (he may) command, should command, may have commanded, shall have commanded, &c. &c. Examples of the use of the nominative case: QQ'K‘JI'QR'Q'QI'HQKIN, the king sits upon the throne; lilq'qéqw'szl, he has stood-up (he has lifted up himself); R'ii'Qil', I go not; li'wfis'd'qugn, he sleeps. am'ill'fllp'afl'qfll'ql'éfi, the king is respected by all. ______giv, the king has been respected. -— —- -- — --Q§9 1., the king will be respected. _ _ _ _ — -- g, the king must be respected. -— -— — — —- év'fiq, the king let him be respected. — — — — -— —l‘=|’l'|, the king may he be respected. § 171. The two auxiliary verbs that most frequently occur are ; Efi'tll, to do, make; and Q2111, to become, grow, wax, change, turn. By the first are formed many active and passive verbs; and by the second the neuters, actives and pas< sives. When speaking respectfully to Or of superiors, instead of 53's“, the verb fléfi'QJL, and (if of one’s self or of others before a great personage) qéq'qz. are used. § 172. Since with respect to persons and numbers there is no variation, the conjugation of these verbs may briefly be thus represented. Tue Venus 5151;, to do, make. Indicat. present, is or he does, is doing, making. Imperf. QR'QSEI'KI, was doing, did. Perf- QWI EW'N l Q‘V‘ill, did, has done. Comp. perf. QN'H‘QJ», has done. Pluperf. gw'qglq'q or gw'u'fiq'q, had done. Future, g or Ed, I fiyqrqg 1, about to do ; will or shall do, Imperative, in I iw'fim, do, let him do. Hortafive, é’w'fiq, v let him do, may he do it, may it be Precative, QR'LIIJHKI, “ done. Oplative, QR'QJL'E 1'51“, (92) COHDITIONALS. Pres. and Fat. fig'q, should he do, or if he would do. Fret. gw'q, should he have done. Future exact, qurqg 1',“ if he shall have done. Iufiuitive, 5‘1“, 4, to do, make. lévsr a; for 9': 01' (fiwfifiu Infin. fut, és'qa' Q'wsr e'ufi'ék r s'n‘i' Supine or gerund J - “'5) for doing, to do. PARTICIPLBS. Present. in 5511, doing, making. \ Nounsof theagent, fig'auqq and @311: com. (or m. at fem.) a doer, maker. Masculine, 5““ avg“; I qu'fii fiyfi', maker, doer, a maker, a deer. Femin. it"aq] 551px; Qg'qw‘fl 55's}; the maker, doer. Prel. 15' p. part. EN'N; done, made. Future, a'ruor q,§5'§, to be done; about to do, (racieu dum) (facturus). Sub. Noun. 3'14, action, business. PARTICIPIAL ExPnlzsslons. Present, iviq' iéfi'i, when doing, at the time of doing. Pret. ew'ii evw, 2v w, having done. Future, wé‘q'r B'i, being about to do, being to be done. Part. pluperf. 5W, after having done. § 173. THE VBRB qgi'q, to become, &c. Indie-at. pres. ogx. or QQL'I, is becoming, changing, turning. Imperfect. le'qsq'q, was becoming or turning. Perf. gm gran grgt gxéiq, (he) became, has become, turned, changed. Comp. per-f. gl'q'fiq” &c. has become. Pluperf. QJL'QEKI'L‘ or QA'Q'QQ'U, had become. Future, QQL'UL'lel-Z, shall or will become. Imperat. LI 5291'351, be, let him be2 or become, turned. (93) Q Hortalive, Q 11651, let him be, or become. \9 Precative, Q grqrfi’n, may he become, let him be chang ed, turned, &c. Optative. i ng'ru'grill, Pres.v¢g fut. CONDITIONALS. ng, should he become, or if he would he. Pret. 51's, should he have become. Fut. exact, 3 rung 1' q, if he shall have become. Infinitive, le'qla to become, turn, &c. Irg/z'nit. fut. 1 ogrs (or grass: I) Qg 1' for becoming, to become, turn, qfi'svws) Ger. 6* Supine,’ grow, &c. PARTICIPLES. Present, le or Qg 1w, becoming,growing,changing,turning. ’ouns, Qgrm agrees, com. a becomer, &c. V masculine, leql le'qqi le'qul fem. Q2 1171 Q2 rat r as L'q'm w d: :3 Qgrqwi Qg 1% a, or the, becomer, grower, turner, &c. Abs. Substative, le'ri'qs, change, turn, vicissitude. Part. pret. gl'sn grown, become, changed, turned. Part. fut. Qgrs T an'g, about to become, &c. subject to change, turn, changeable. PARTICIPIAL EXPRESSIONS. Present .5' fut. ogr§ or ng'r‘q‘c, when, or at the time of becom. ing, changing, &c. Pret. 6‘ pluperf. gl'bi 01‘ QX'JWT L'U‘VT gl'q, having become, being turned, after having become, &c. § 174. The verb Iris“: (when used respectfully instead of fis'q) has only one variation, the imperative and hortative being formed by "is ; the rest is supplied by the two auxiliary verbs @511, and qu'q. § 175. The verb Ilé‘g'q (a respectful verb answering to @511) is used by a person speaking of himself, or of others, before a great personage, and has the following varia tions : AA (94) Indwat. present, qfis, he does, &c. - Pret. Iléw, he did, has done. Fturen, at), will, shall do. Imperat. an, do, make. The other tenses are supplied by the before-named auxiliary verbs (fig and qgl), and by the particles or articles enumerated with them. _ PARTICIPLES. . § 176.~ The participles (present, perfect, and future), belong to the class of nouns and adjectives. Among the verbs they form the roots of the indicative present, per fect, and future tenses; as, :1, gm, Q's. As nouns they may all be used substantively; as, 1'11, speaking or a speaking; glv'q, Spoken, a spoken thing, he that has spoken ; g'g, about to speak, he that will speak, a thing to be said or spoken of. ‘ § 177. The present and perfect participles, terminate in q or '41, according to their final letter, both when taken absolutely or as substantives, and when they stand after the substantive. But before a substantive they stand in the genitive form; thus: _ Q3, pahz' pronounced P6 or pai, 1:53, vahi pronounced ve or vai, (oi to be pronounced as in rain, pain.) Examples: Qwis'q, working, one that works; Qllv'és'qd'i‘r, a working man; aq'qvq, much talking, one that talks much ; RR'QI'Q'Rfi'J‘i, a man that talks much. § 178. When the participle present drops the LI or It termination, and takes 5'3 m- arrllq, or both; thus, ig'lllul; it denotes _a noun, signifying an actor or agent, an instrument or organ; as, grist H'Nlflil H'fil-‘l'fl’l'lll, a speaker; iq'és, that does beat, a hammer; Nfi'G'és, that does, or makes, see, the eye. The first might be expressed by the articles also ; thus: 'g'q'q or g'q'ill, a, or the, speaker ; fl'q'al or g'q'ir', a, or the, (female) speaker. ‘ ‘ § 179. The following particles; 3‘? a? Ell-1' 3' é“ till fill' a? @6' 315' '3!" i'fi'il put after the root of the present participle (with respect to its final letter) _ correspond to the English termination -ing, and are used in the same manner ; as, _ fiw'l'riiq, saying so, or thus saying ; fi'QUL'JYfi'g, it being so ; fib'fié'qsll, he is read ing ; H'fi'a'q, he does not speak when eating. (95) § 180. The participle future terminates in 5 or Q'II, cbé, ché—vd (taken absolute 1y, or after a substantive), and 53 or g'qfi; (taken conjunctive] y, or before a substan tive ;) as, H's, adj. edible, sub. any thing to be eaten, meat, food ; i'sa'fi, flesh to be eaten ; unwary-q, to be read over, that must be read over; usn'qrg'qd'ugq'qi'w, a literary work (shastra) to be perused. § 181. The pluperfect participle is expressedby any of the following particles, (put after the root of the perfect participle, having regard to its final letter :) Kw, ANT 5N, 3N, 5N, 3N or -N"iiNIT‘1'§'§i 3'? <3? 31-? and Q11. They are used like ‘having -ed ’ or ‘ being -ed ’ in English (to join two or more members of a sentence) ; as, au'qwi aw'wr writ aw'é‘wr sw'iic'r, havng Spoken or said; fi's'm'ii‘a'ix, having gone tell him, or go and tell him. ' ADVERBS. § 182. There are many simple and compound primitive and derivative adverbs in this tongue. Here follows a collection of the most common of them, of all sorts. ADVERBS OF TIME. an, when? gaze. 1 ns's‘v. . , , “fits, . a at what time? when. continually, uninterruptedly, “G's, EKI'E’ a {W always, perpetually. Q: ' 53m}at this (or such a) time. 3” V '3 ’ Qg'i, IIBQ'S, 5' \N,}at that time. i 8'“ um" }never. i'é, W'sqs, llq'fi'SN—Eta'l'a", Enrica, in the beginning, first. or “WSW—i3“, correlativeb., at whicl, 11:35, in the middle, secondly, afterwards. Ilfi‘éi'é—gaii time, at that time. 511:1, lastly, ultimately. \ g \ or qR'g—R'g, EINJL'S, newly, recently. 2'" V _ - in old times, of old, formerly, an- 5131's, \1 s‘lddenly' ref/81%, ciently. I _ i'ar'arn-n, immediately, soon, readily. ‘i‘l'SW’ alar'éirn-q, once, at a certain time. ‘ (96) 3N'5N'fl, sometimes, now and then. ' Rglv, four days hence. NHN'HIIN'Q, occasionally. 5N, five days hence. i'fill, for a while. QKI'RG'QKI, every day. \ Q l'qll—as'fiiv, first—then. a'fifi'a, every month. RG'BI/l, the first time, first. 514mm}, }every year, year by year. Klgw‘nu, the second time, secondly. m'gx, V it? or iv, ql'alq, V every second year. is'é, now, at this time. we}, V this . year. is's'v, War-1' or ‘r-vws' a last year. i ’}now-a-days. Q'QR', swan-1', (E'SC, two years ago, (in the third year ago.) fl'gt', as yet, still. Rg'fic', three years ago, &c. g'gq'taq, now too. Q'SG', four years ago, &c. is, now, this very instant, or qG'lIJL, next year. R's'fis's.5"?! time, this present. NR'HL, two years hence. WWW? 01' i'ifi', this day, to-day. }three years hence. 'wfl'lils “G. or}yesterd ay. EQC'NG' or may, }four years hence. 9111, I'B'W‘i'i $6111, in the day time, by day. ringer, before yesterday, some days Hanan-<21, a V by day pipqu', ago, lately. aJm-JYI-m, by night 'llrws'a‘l, filrflgfi's, day and night. {WN'QQ three days ago. i'ilr-QI, in the forenoon. wc'qq'qll, four days ago. é'QII-QI, in the afternoon. gq'fi'q'qq, five days ago. “i'i‘i’l-Ql, VG" Lto-morrow. }in the morning, early. V a", vulg. J QC'NT-Ql, §a|'ggt;'q, at mid-day. am or }after to-morrow. mew, gm-aYT-QI, in the evening. new, three days hence. (97) Anvnnas or NUMBER AND TIME. QW-ifl, how many times. Mao'ww'tu, infinitely, immensely. ‘ZQ'IR'S‘II, once QQ'QIIQ'Gil-q, sometimes. qulfiw, twice. ‘ZM'QKIQ 01‘ sometimes, now and then, one QIQ'i, a single time. i'v'qm, } time or other. qq'i'i, a single time each. QIQ'QKIQ — QIQ'Q‘IQ, 01' QI‘I'WG'S, }sometime, other time. }many times. lvam—iw'qm, QM'S'NX, QM'QKIQ‘QIR', not a single time, never. Anvanns or PLACE. IITS, Kis'w, }whence ? from what place? 5Tb, whither? where? to what place P KI'JW, lll, Qfi'dw, from this place, hence. Q: iii,}hither, to this place. fi'qw, from that place, thence. QR!» new, i'qiv, correl. whence, thence, or \ j 5’}thither, to that place. new, } from which place, from that place. ‘1: ns'ew'as'as' or }wh encesoever, from. 8|G'5—i1, correl. whither, there, or to Kiwv'ss'ss', whencesoever. which place, to that place. en's, within. qu'sQG'bC, whithersoever, to whatever place. §'i/Ql'q, without. Emily's, to another place; otherwise, “'5, into. ns'q, 5'9311'2, Il'q, where? at what place? £1, }out, onwards. =11, qq'q'v, from within. a Q: 8”}here, at this place, fi'i’wqw, from without, from abroad. QR,” "EMS, : ii, }there, at that place. }forwards, fore, before. gfi'ql, hi, &‘q'fi, backwards, back. BMW—fiat, corral. where, there, or at which 881%, down, downwards. place, at that place. 581W, below, beneath. qq'qqq'bq', at whatever place, wherever. i é'il'fiw, from below. (' 98' ) is's, v asl'iq'l-q, at a far distance. 5;?” on, upon, over, to, up. Emir-2.5, to a far distance, far. 51: fi'if'qw, from near, from not far. @6'5, up, upwards, up hill. anvil-raw, from far, from a great distance. is's, M's. Ej/q'q, above, upon, on high. KMN'EM'E, everywhere, at whatever place. H'ab ‘39?!le (inns, ns'sqs', v Kls'w, from above. 'flQJ'alC'S, on, at, to many places. We)”, SilQI'KIR'sqc, everywhere, (when followed by 3]] $171 ii'a‘l/l, near, at, to a near place. a negative) nowhere. ADVERBS 0F MANNER on QUALITY. FW'an5, knowingly, designedly. Evin) how? on what manner 2 fi'gLJ QSKI'§, sitting. Qi'ésl, qoi'fi, lying. \}thus, so, on this manner. Qfi'sl. ngl'i, walking. NQ’KW q I. ’}swiftly. i'sn. }so, on that manner. i'sl. Qi'gl, ‘ fivgiq__§'§s|,}correl. as, so, on which man @313, } glvql,*9 swiftly : s p eedil y . §.,,Du_§%u, nor, on that manner. gl'qvglvql’ Kaunas-3,, by degrees. }very speedily quavg qul, ial'éw, gradually. a J LGN'LJL, hastily, speedily. 38ml“ or}at once. nfin'zl, iCN'LI'iGN'ql, very hastily. 5'61, , xs'ni-is'é‘w, by itself, spontaneously. fi‘fil'i‘ifi'fiw, naturally. 3'61!” SlOle Q'Qal/la £1, generally, universally. Rm v q 1 ’ }softly, slowly, u gently. i'qq'n, especially, particularly. 'iql' 5N, gopg'qql'gw, very softly or slowly. anal/'51, }11105tl), for the most part, 1401'31, QRL‘QRL'fi/JL, fearfully, with quaking and a'aml'su, vulgarly. (1 trembling. (99) Lira, eminently. Flat-"c, again, likewise. fiq'g, very. ne'er-2', gq'n, altogether, entirely. .ua'ss'wc', again and again. “&KI'E, V chiefly. - uc'qa'wc's, " v . . 81321., principally. {551113, p articularly, especially. ‘ll/QV'E, wholly, entirely. NgqN'QJLn equally. taq'gl'rgu, thoroughly, fully, completely. qs'tu, ylikewise. &N'QL, especially. NQN'NL, J alike. EN'QL, certainly, really. 14511;, }privately, clandestinely, secretly. gnw'g, V really. nwc'ru, Ira/Bruit” conspicuously. avg, openly, before one’s face. atfi'wgar'g, evidently. new; otherwise; else. me'il'l, asters?!“ wholly ; in every way. }clcarly. KIWQI'III: &NN'efi'fi‘aNN'efi's, totally, absolutely. Irina, truly. fififi‘tll, solitarily, retiredly.‘ nga'vs’ or }falsely. £51111, amply, copiously, at large. gal'S, qgtq'fi, shortly, briefly, concisely, “"11, aright ; rightly, honestly. ugly-qgwfi,} abridgedly. Q/Kl'lil, wrong, amiss. qq'm'g, earnestly; certainly. IIHG'il/L, well. q-q'i'ql'g, inconsiderately. qq'ql, ill, badly. ni’q'a‘i'i'ql. undoubtedly. qfi'ttl, well, happily. Erifl'a‘wul. (FIRIN'QL, well, elegantly. Qigq's'is'llm flétq'ql, beautifully. QBQI'ifi'S, infallibly. fiN'QJL, viciously, faultily, ill. gqq. 551,1, gn'ql, more, beyond, in a higher degree. qn'wfl'ql, chastcly, modestly. 35911;, egregiously. qq'aig'qx, unchastely, immodestly. unq'ilattq'lil, indifl‘erently. ;N'3, after, along with. &l'zl, asunder. QR'IUL, becomingly, decently. m1, again, back. $4." 5:111, unbecomingly, indecently. (100) iqvnx, reasonably, justly. Q'QIM'QJL, unworthily, unbecomingly. WIFW'UL, Q 0 unreasonably, unJustly. o QQL'II'RR'QL, immutably. a/N'Lll, worthily, becomingly. Willi, silently, still. onnaas or QUANTITY. $8" or 5, how much? how many 2 @5, half, a half. QQ'SN, thus much, or so much (here). 55'38, about the half of, &c. Q58, so much, (there) was, too, very. 115's", about ten. gi, enough. 1:938, about one hundred, &c. &c. £511 gll'gl‘l, it is enough, it is sufficient. am'r am'ifr art-(5,}much, many, in a great éfi'itRI-lll, }immense, immeasurable. 5'“, quantity. gqirl'a‘qq qllLs immensely, immeasurably. 2:1 gq's, little, few, in a small quantity. Anvunas or N EGATION. N, ‘\ not; as m:a fi'qc'q'i'qt'dk, there is nothing in it. 'fi'at'fiw'ttll, I have not known it. :v fi'a'q‘qqq, that is not, another. R's Q s ER'QN'WR'N'QG, V G V you never come, &c. 3:31 sis, there is not, it is not, as: Q’g'qu'wq'lt't‘z’qw, you never came, &c. § 183. There are several particles used both as postpositions (or propositions in the occidental languages) and as adverbs. When taken as postpositions, they stand always after the substantive (with or without the genitive sign) as to be seen under the postpositions. When taken adverbially they are put always before the verb, as in the following examples : ala's'qh'uqx, to go in. asl'E'lel'QL, to lay down. aq'q'qsq'tu, to be, or sit within. éq'groaqw'qa, to lift up. qq'qw'fi’g'qx, to come from within. fl'a'qglqarqa, to be on high, or above. §L @i’ora) QISY'HL, to go out. “55315111., V to go before, (or forwards.) §'5| (§'3:QI'6)QS‘1'HL, to be or sit out of Q'q'g'g'ql, to look back. doors, or on the out side. IMN'Q'QIXL'IIL, to turn :(in going) to the QM“: (§'l/Ql'qtv) t‘z’q'ql, to come from with right (side or hand). out or from abroad. (' 101 ) POSTPOSITIONS. § 184. The prepositions used in the occidental languages, are rendered in this‘ tongue by postpositive particles or postpositions. They are simple and com pound. The first are insignificant particles by themselves, and the last have always a significant meaning. § 185. The simple postpositions, put after the nominative, form the several cases of a declension, and besides, denote either motion to, towards, into, &c. or rest in, at, on; or motion from, of, out of, a place, Such simple postpositions are : The genitive signs: iii iii 5t or ii, signifying: of, ’s. The signs of the active or instrumentive case: §WI 134V! é‘m —-N or iiNl signify ing: by, with. The dative sign Q], to, for. The ablative signs INT QW, from, of, out of, &c. as have been before set forth in the forms of general declension. g § 186. The particles at 51 as or -1 5, (put after the nominative with respect to its final letter) denote motion, progression to, or towards a place ; or change, turn, pro motion into an other state; as, glitz; to, towards the west; 111:5, to the east; 9111's, in lndia; @415, or Q'L, to or on the south ; Ki'iW'g to or on the right, hand. I; and some times q, denote rest in, at, on a place; as, "El/Yd), in Tibet: fia'q, on a tree. aw and em, signify motion from a place; as, fi's'w, from Tibet : aG'QW from on a tree. § 187. The compound postpositions require, in general, the genitive case before them. But sometimes the genitive signs being dropt, they are put after the nomina tive, like the simple postpositions. Here follow some of them, with a few examples of their application. Pastpositions. Examples. §IJ3 or @1, for, sake. Ka‘gl'i, for me, for my sake. &i's or $5, account. ia'ifi's, for what P why P gaps or :6), cause, reason. IIQQ'Q‘RVQ'E” for other’s sake. gg's or 35, in behalf of. 36'35'5 or 8'35, for whom ? in whose be half? “:3, to, into. aa'qfi'qq'g, into the house. (lea) Postpositirms. Eramples. guns, in, at, among. pic'qa-ac'a, in the house. aq'qw, from, out of, from among. pq'qfi-qq'qw, out of, or from the house. wa's‘zlq‘g, under the earth or ground. awn, under (to.) 581's, below, beneath. w§'§'KI'q, below the earth, &c. film'iw, from below. Ivfi'a’lq'qw, from below the earth, &c. left-1301‘ @2'5, to, on, upon, to the top of. ia'ic'g, to or above that. Iii/G's or firm, on, upon, above. fid'Qc'a, on or above that. El/q'tw or QG'MJ, from on, from above. iQ-Qtz'aw, from on that. N38,}, before, to. Q’g'fi'usq's, before (thee) you. _ a, before, in, at the sight of, &c. _..__.__. 0|, in the sight of you. _ aw, from before. ._ _ _ an, from before you. gq'gl, before, unto the sight of, H'Na'gwfil, before a or the LAMA. ._ sg'q, before, in, at. _ __ _ '21,, before the LAMA. _ _ as], from before. __ __ _ few, from before, &c. an '15 ’ to the back of. ifi'éq'g, to the back of the mountain. fie-'3, §§'£G'3, after that. _ after, behind. EN nfi'éw'g, after me. &u'a, ia'su's, behind the hill. i‘q'q, in, at, on the back of, behind. sa-i‘q'q, after or behind it. ism cfi'iw'q, behind me. Q'qu, from the back of. ides-w, from behind the bin. QR'W, fid'iiq'aw, from behind it. aN'JW, from behind, &c. piq'qfi'éw'qlv, from behind the house. gs's. li/G'ii'afi'5, to, near him. KIWS, to, to the side of, by, near to. _ _- mars, ditto. &VS, --_ as's, ditto, gq'a, 1 ri'q'liigq'q, at his side, or near him. slaps, at the side of, by, near to. -— —- llfi'fi, ditto. awn] —- — aw, ditto. (103) Postpositions. Examples. §WIW, li'fi'ii'y'qw, from him, &c. qq-qq, from the side of, from. _ _ iqq'aw, (1mm avg“, __ _ ag-aw, ditto. 113:5, into the middle of, between. qfiw'iqg‘i'qys, into, between the two, rays, in, at, on the middle of, betwixt. _ _ qpq, betwixt or between the two. 71116", from the middle 0f: from between, ———-‘EIL'Q*V, from between the two. from among. pi’qw'lg, into, among, under, or into the NFW'N'fiNN'fi'iI‘K/RW'fi, under (01' into the number of. number of) learned men. rii’cq'q, among, amongst. — —- — -- li/GN'I), among ditto.,. dlnw'qw, from among. .____._._ [ii/Gives], from among the learned. Postpositions of this kind may be formed from many substantives _ and adje¢_ tives, by adding any of the particles, In ST 5 0r -I.I fit m M11; as has been shown in the above examples. Postpositions. Examples. gaps“, é'g'gc'lgq'iq, together with thee (you). along with, in company, together V ' _ _ _ . “gaps, With [It fit'flfiii'g, in his company, With him. qu, sm'iz’wm'a’s'ss'rlzw'u, the king together . with the prime minister. These generally assume the conjunction 312' (and) before them, as the examples also manifest. girl, till, to, as far as. "&L‘QKI for "&Q'fs‘gfil, to, (as far as,) the limit, or boundary. Hit-3, till, (including from to.) llfiV’flin till, as far as, &c. &c. S’hikhtsé, (the capital of Tséng in Tibet.) 8w -_ til, from-till, to (the whole space g'w'qw'qq'ii’wx, from Lhassa to Nepal, (as between.) far as). (104) The following twenty Sanskrit prepositive particles have been rendered by the ' Tibetan translators, thus, S anskrit". English. Tibetan. l qfii Mi, beyond, RAT ill, dag-par. 2 are adln', over, 315%, shin-ta. 3 fig arm, after, iv ‘3, rjes-su. 4 3111 apa, un, de, $81111, lhag-par. 5 wfir “Pi, to, 811,, Slar. towards, NRVJI'QL, union-par. 6 if“ abhi, 7 513 mm, from, 3501's, plml-du. 8 EU a ’ 01 C ang, unto, lelN'LIl, legs-par. 9 36; wt, up, 3! 5’ 1:6, mtho- valn'. 10 311 up a, near, fi'ttl, nye-var. 1 l '54; dur, far, Girq, flan-pa. 12 fit ni, into, ITIN'LJJL, near-par. 13 fig m'r, out, EQ'IX, bral-va. l 4 U11 paré, far, Jig/EVE, mailbag-la. 15 lift Part, round, it]: N's, yougs-su 16 1 PT“, forth, LIFE, rab- tu. 17 ufa PM“; re, if'QJ/JL, so-sor. 1 8 fa m', in, ifl'ql, mam-par. 19 “if sam, with, WG‘RKI'LIJL, yang-dag»par. 20 g su, well, 'qfi'ql, bdé-var. CONJ UNCTIONS. § 188. Here follow some of the conjunctions that occur frequently in the Tibet books. RG‘, and. i'qw'q: Q: v ’ too, also ; though, although; not- i ‘qu therefore, then. ‘2‘" withstanding. j I; “N a" w:', R'r§'6) * Taken from Mr. Yates’ Grammar. ( 105 )1 virus, or, or else. a‘i’q'gq'_§'5:', although—yet. 'lIR'Jl—JZIC'Q, either, or, or else. R'sc', yet, but yet, as yet. KIN, 5'3q'wr-i', now too, still. KN, é’q'fi, H", are interrogative signs, or express “if” if, but if. it", a doubt, whether, or 2 they KIQI'FI, 75W, may be forme'd of any word, by mri'q, a“: } reduplicating its final letter, qq'§R—§'?'s, Q“, and adding a N 5 as in 1581' Ilql'i—i'gi'fi, if—thcn, so. X“, qu'filq; :Qfl'ri’, whether I or KlQl'fi—fi'i, “1“, he, I or he a 5'5, if 1w, '1", J if, if, or but if; as, 8Q“, 'i'sw'q—fi'é'at'gw'q, if you can, but if you Q'QN, or, or so, 01'; thus, or. cannot, &c. in“, :2," am, not even so much as, not even, &c. ; an, , é’wé‘, then, therefore, nevertheless. a'qvqg'qzq'ngv‘zsq’ (there is’ not even Squaw so much as a single grain (or corn). v v , il'it'is, nay, nay rather - yea what is more~ Qa' a: ’ though, although, albeit, not- _ , , , awn“ besides; yet more. é'arss', ’ withstanding. “’ I v . . “a, pray Pra ' for because. a“ 2‘ }though, although. (a , , y ’ ’ ss'ss', 4"“ § 189. INTERJECTIONS. 14?, a mystical interjection, denoting the es- it Q'fil sential body or person of a BUDDHA or any WSW I @‘QIIW, other divinity. m N61 Wit, are vocative parti~ we, ditto, denoting the word or doctrine of in 6'5 I W'i, cles,O,holla! &c. Q ditto. in war ‘il‘Wi Vivi", \ V V\ V~vg Fr, ditto, denoting the mind or mercy of ditto. emu W'Qr WI. 1 rm. , i DD ( 106' ) 5'8" irgg 1 figs, }interj. expressing grief; very well! true! truth ! yes truly ! &c., V SKI Q'Qs alas ! oh ! woe ! O! W'FTW'II'II, interj. of disapprobation, dis v \ v WWI warm warm, Q'I'H Q'l'l'tl, } pleasure. }intery'. of admiration. \I V \/ WWI W'WW'V), SKIQfi/i W511 QIIL'i, interj. of endearment W'QI'QIY w'm'orb’, ditto of wonder. vial-fit a'a, } or affection. W'Q'QJ'W'QJ'QI, ditto of great joy, happiness. W'Ti'bi WWII l, . . . . I _ . . _ mlery. expressive of pain. W15, inter-J. ofJoy, of admiration. Q'g'q, W'WI WW, interj. of recollection, ho ! yes. W's, Iwiq-s, I, I V t‘ v v v ditto of sorrow or anguish. War LKW'NI Hays, denote ap- urn av'rx, \ Ida's/I RN'R‘J/I NEWS], probation ; bug I W'Q'Q, ditto of pain from cold. QIEW'NI \ V (KKIN'RJI'Q‘JKW'Q’, \ Orarelwell w'él w'g'é, ditto of pain from heat. V \ V s x a “ NR'R I s'udwa IR'R'IIQQ'S’, done! well! w£i w'g'g, ditto of fright, horror, dread. ~03!“— SYNTAX. § 190. If the structure or construction of the Tibetan language be compared to that of the English, the first seems, in many instances, to be totally the reverse of the last. Thus in the sentence HRII'B‘iN'Na/G'qa'fiii'all'q, in a book seen by me, the actual order of the words will he found on translation to be exactly inverted : me by seen-book a in. In the Tibetan, the articles, both definite and indefinite, are put always after the noun ; as, 838117, the eye; fi'al'l, a man ; i'ti’, the mountain ; awn, a or the hand ; E'N, the or a superior; Bfi'ifi'ifll, a woman ; B'dfll, a child ; await, a garment, &c. § 191. The several cases of a declension are formed by postpositive particles; and further, all the English prepositions are expressed in this tongue by postpositions. As for instance in a declension: Singular. Nom. the hand, Qin'q. Gen. of the hand, ‘Ilii'lla. Inst. by or with hand, Qltq'qw, But. to, into, hand, Qiq'q'qu Qllq'qLI 9;:ng Accus. the hand, ‘ Qill'li. (107) Lacat. in the hand. Qlll'u'm emul Abl. from, out of the hand. Qin'q'w. § 192. Relation of Prepositions and Postpositions. to the ocean or sea, said or swim. in, on ditto. e'uiv'w.é'ug'q. out of, from ditto. to, up to a hill. i'q. on, upon ditto. i'q. from on ditto. i'qw or i'qw. to mount a horse. fi'm'qé’qwl sitting on a horse. t'q'qsn'q. descending from a horse. WQW'QIW'Q. to beat with the hand. Olll'uw'ngz'qx. to go together with him. fi’q'sq'zywin'qfi'wx, come before me. =3'usws'fl‘i’n. stay not in the way. Q'N'qw'ir’g. from whom hast thou that obtained. li's'fiw'i's'qw'é’q. for me P =3'§I~'s. to, near, by thee. ré’fi'fi'§§'s from the town. life'rél'w. to the town. — — 5 in, at, the town. — — q to go to, into, heaven. ma's'nfiqw'u. to sit, or be in ditto. KMN'Q'IIQFIN'HL. to descend from ditto. MWW'QIITI'NL. § 193. The nouns in general, precede their attributes, and the verbs stand, for the most part, at the end of the sentence ; as, dr'qa'li, a good man ; 61"“, a bad man ; a'Blill, one man ; a'llgw'q, the third man ; ii'wq'iil'iw'q, a much-knowing man; N'NR'S'EfN'q, Q a man that has heard much (very expert) ; N'qsiq'ql'g'q, Q a man that must be taught or instructed. (108) § 194. Verbs occur at the end of sentences, thus: G'S'fi'al‘iw'iv', I do not know that; wruu'gq'fi/rfi'arfiw'isfl myself also did not know it at first (or have not known). é/g'm'i'gw'ix, by whom is it told or said to thee ? or, who told it you? wcw'éw'ql'yn'qtiqrd', reverence (be) to BUDDHA. Q'g'tgariq's'qg'qrgriil, may you (thou) live long! Q59; q'fi/w'nsqrqrs‘q'fill'qiq or IISQI'Q'QS‘ZI'K‘II‘V'sz, the subduer (instructor) has subdued (disciplined) those that were to be subdued (civilized). § 195. The auxiliaries follow the principal verb, and it is they only that are conjugated in the several tenses, the root of the principal verb being invariable ; as, in éfi's'QEM'QL, to cause make; QR'QN'QL, to can make; éq'qi’s'qx, to wish (or will) to do ; (in these the verbs 533, and is, remain in all tenses invariable.) § 196. The article is expressed sometimes, when speaking definitely, both after the substantive and adjective; as, QW'fil'éq'A‘fl'the great king. Sometimes it is dropt after both ; as, éQl'iufi'ltfs, the four great (fabulous) kings ; gfi'q'qq'ztlor gq'qq', the black valley ; QG'KI'MI'K‘II'Q or QG'QKI'Q, a man (or native) of the black valley. The article is likewise dropt in short and general enumeration ; as, ifsq, great and small; QQI'SYJI, the king and the ministers ; ltd/1m», high and low; it in qr Q3 for i'q'gq'r ir'q'flfi't W‘q‘fiti' TQg‘It‘S/IT there is birth, old age, sickness, and death. But it is dropt especially, when nouns in opposition are enumerated; as, ESQ/KW (for i'q'gq'i’mw'qg hope and fear or anxiety; \fi'i‘ml, (for qfi'q'gq'fiq'qg virtue and vice ; mew, (for Kiqfl'n'ss'w'né‘g heaven and earth. § 197. When two substantives are connected by the genitive sign, the article is generally expressed after the last noun; but when they are contracted into one word, by dropping the genitive sign, the article also is dropt, as in the following examples: aq'fi'g'rt —- ai'g, the root or bottom of a tree. _. __ firfq __ _§{§, the middle part or body of ditto. ._ _ il'a‘f — -_ Q, the top of ditto. _ __i1/q'£{ -- _§r’q', the stem of ditto. (109) fic'fi'mrsi ElR'QFH, the branch of a tree. .___ _. Q', the leaf of ditto. _ _ quv'g -_ QQN, the fruit of ditto. This contracted form is very common; the learner should therefore bear it in mind in difficult sentences. § 198. Nouns generally precede their attributes, and then it is only the last ofthem that is declined in the several cases; as, it"éQ'QQ'SI-q, these great men :_(here a‘ifidi'oi‘ this great man, is in the singular, but by adding to Q1; the plural sign qlq, the whole is made plural; and now these four syllables remaining invariable, all the other cases are formed according to the rules of general declension.) § 199. A noun denoting possession or connexion of any kind with another, or the matter of which any thing is made, is, for the most part, put in the genitive, and always precedes the other noun ; as, aa'gw'if, a man’s body, or, the body ofa man. Such genitives may be expressed adjectively also, in English ; as the human body. Other examples : qu'qfi'iv/L'ii', the finger of the hand; mq'qé‘wéioi, the sole of the foot; FR'Qa'avKl, the roof or terrace of a house ; EgQI'§'QK\l/'ll, the head or chief ofa village; gjgvfi'wwa'l'filttv, the limbs or members of the body; Klfil'é'Q/q'jj, agold coin; figm'é'fllgq'u, a silver basin; fiq'fi'iii'q, a wooden cup; nQr'é-gqq'fi’q, golden fetters or chains (for a malefactor); Qd'é‘rw'q, a drop of water, &c. The genitive sign sometimes is dropt, thus: NG‘V'EW'IWWQ (for qu‘éw'fi'ng'q) the doctrine, or religion, of Banana; Qiiwiqwilh'zf, (for Qé‘ll'awé'WQ/Wfij) the lord (or patron) of the world (BUDDHA). § 200. When several words are connected in a sentence, they seldom require above one sign of the case they are in; as, g'g'alr'QI'Q’MWQ‘NWGN'in'orgq'gvgj the gods, Nagas, men, et cetera, paid homage to (reverenced or saluted) BUDDHA; 3:21.56unavauq-zq'fi'ng'llsq'ifl the only refuge (or protection) of the king, minis ters, and of all the subjects (or vassals); 1:'Ei'mwsq'fi'qeq'awvzs'Q1, to my own (father and mother) parents, and to every other person. § 201. The adjectives, generally, are put after their nouns, and are declined in the several cases of both numbers, according to the form of general declension, the nouns being then invariable before them ; as : (110) Singular. Plural. Nam. é'Acc. ii‘mc'ftil, a (or the) good man. a‘i'uac'51"8uu, good men. Instr. fi'qzz'fi'w, by a good man. a‘rqau'iiiidw'fiv, by good men. Gen. or Poss. a good man’s. a‘t'qac'fil'mw'é‘, good men’s. Dat. i'qaq'fi'wt, to a good man. fi'flflq'ill'iatw'm, to good men. Abl, fi'qzrc'if'qw, from a good man. I‘l'q'dfi‘l‘tl'mw'qw, from good men. § ‘202. When the adjectives precede their nouns they are invariable in all cases, and stand either without any article, or in the genitive form; as, Riva/N or gat'qa'gw, holy religion ; slaw, dry land, the continent ; MN'NL'QII'QL, to arrive at dry land (to reach the continent, or to land), § 203. Numerals, both cardinal and ordinal, like adjectives, are put always after the substantives with which they are connected ; as, 51481351, one year; 6.1311511, the tenth chapter. § 204. Cardinals, expressive of any great quantity, require, in general, that the preceding noun be in the singular; as, 5315, ten men ; (ii/"1:15, a hundred years ; gun'a‘i'fi'q'tgtl'qg, a hundred thousand soldiers, (or warriors ;) gq'fi'g'niq, a myriad of dwelling places or houses; ifq'lfil'QEN'thl, a hundred thousand towns, (or cities ;) fi/G'J‘l'N'QI, a million of inhabitants, &c. &c. § 205. To facilitate the formation of sentences, and the distinction of the sub ject and the predicate in them, here follow some questions (together with answers to them) made by the interrogative pronouns, g and 3N, who? and by whom ? IIG', which ? whether? nc'fiw, by which? by whom? 3, what? 3“! or 3"3N, by or with what? The answer must conform with the question in the repetition of the postpositions, &c. § 206. 5, who ? Rfi/Q'NKKI, GOD; NGN'le, BUDDHA ; you]: the king; aw, the chief priest ; fila'g'fiflw, the ministers or officers; QIIRN'aNW'zR, all the people or subjects. § 207. Qfi'uvatés (1193“! or an), by whom is made this ? or who has made this? i'fiil/Q'Ngll'élw'fléfi, it is made by Goo, or Goo has made it. i'waw'éw'gw'wéq, it is made by BUDDHA, or BUDDHA has made it. fi'é‘II'YII/N'Néq, it is made by the king, or the king has made it. la'fl'iw'ités', it is made by the cheif priest, or the cheif priest has made -'it. r 111 \) i-fi'q'fiimw'fivqéw, it is made by the ministers, or the ministers have made it. i'QIIRN'aNN'zR'fi'V'QN, it is made by all the people, or all the people have made it. § 208. Klq' or IIG'Fq‘KI, which? whether? who ? (quis? uter? quisnam P) KIG'REI, plural, who ? Qi‘, this; Qi'é‘, this here; Qi'vl. these; Qfi'sn'i‘, these here. i, that; R's, that there; g‘fixl, those; i'RKl'a, those there ; N13, this here ; H'a, that there. é'ii‘fiil, these here (on this side) ; ’4'13'581, those there (on the other side). KIG', Klq'dll, whether 1“ or which of two or of more? is'rt, the greater one, or the elder; QC'II, the little one or the younger. flaw, the high or higher ; RNQ'II, the low or lower. '51:, the heavy; own, the light. guru, the white ; arm, the black. guru, the rich; snow, the poor Qiqw'u, the wise ; go'q, the fool. Il'qw'u, the right, (hand or side ;) Il‘i’fi'u, the left, (hand or side.) § 209. qi'nc'fiiv'é‘m-Qt, by which, or by whom, is this written ; or who wrote this e fi'qqq'fiw'fim-Qf, it is written by me. _ cu, _ — or I wrote it. \j V - ._ p'qw, -- -- ditto. - QQN, -— — this wrote it. _. fin, _ --- that ditto. _ vi‘m'anaqfiw, _ -- it is written by the clerk. or Q'fi'fi'qw, — -- or, the writer wrote it. § 210. i'i'Qsll or S'i‘rq, what is it? fi'hitvi'w'v‘iq, what are they or those P \Q'irallm book; gel'illm sheep ; BYN'RRIL'if'aq, a white garment ; 'l‘tlw'dfll or i'fi'tz'fim, a hare ; fill/'6“, a cap 01' bat; Qa'fili's'fifll'l'a‘hfilriiq'g, these are soldiers (or warriors). i'q'i'ifs, what is there P NGN'éZN'fi'Q'qu'i-Tw, the foot step, (or the impression of_ the foot step) of Buvmu; nfix'i‘tn'fivé‘vqa'finvqw'én, a volume written in golden character: gira'qrat'r‘q‘rl, a printed book ; \an'fi'omww'fi’ or gun'aw'taw'd’, there are warlike instruments. (112) § 211. Examples of the agentive and instrumentive cases being used in the same sentence ; as, fi’q‘fiw, QIKI'QN, by him, with the hand, or he with ditto ; fi’s'fiw'rs's'iv (or fi'v‘iv) 1155*], with what has be beaten thee? (or with what thing has thou been beaten by him P) ' fi’s'iiw'c'wl'rqw'rtfpwv, he beat me with the hand. —— ———— Q5'QU'fiN —, he beat me with the back of the hand. ——————- RQEI'KW —, he beat me with a stick. —-—-— 'gKl'JW —, he beat me with a rod. — -— fifi'lil'el/‘IW —, he beat me with a wooden hammer. § 212. Qén'ia'qfi'iw (or Suits) Q-é-‘s or Qésrurés (or Qi‘ésrurq g1), by what is (or will be) this world destroyed ; in: or a‘t'Q‘PQ, by fire ; as: or Q'tiiv, by water ; gs'iiw, by wind ; g'filt'éa'i'ng'iiw, by all sorts of eflicient causes. §213. Qfi'sé‘ (0r xvii) via, whose is this ? sfi’s'ua‘s'srfi, Gon’s ; swerve, Bunnus’s ; awn/5, the king’s ; H'ita, the chief priest’s or high priest’s ; fia'ficww'fi, the minister’s or oflicer’s; nm'it'sn'n‘i, the villagers’; upfiaré, the great LAMA’S of Teshi-lunpo; (Hal'av'gwitl) é'qll'illli'itiwfila, the Chinese Emperor’s. § 214. 36'51, (-ifi'5I-§’J|'3t-Sjv5,) on whose account? in whose behalf? for whom? gfi'awgq'il'gr. (or firs, 2.3 or $53, Q’s or P’arg, ms or 55's,) for Gon’s sake, on account of Goo, &c. &c., (add $33 in the same manner to each of the genitive or pos sessive cases in § 213 so far as; é'qq'il/q'fl'iwfi'd 35's, on account of, for, in behalf of the Chinese Emperor.) § 21.5. Sg'QI,‘ to whom; RKQ'NKRI'Q, to Gov; NRN‘QW'QI, to Bunnua; gm'ii‘q, to the king; fl'it'ql, to the chief priest; QIQ'QI'KNN'QI, to the ministers or oflicers; it'dfiattv'q, to the citizens. § 216. @331 (for 2'5) le, into what will that be changed or turned P or, what will (or shall) that become P fi’h/Q'Ngq'g, into Goo ; lilq'qu‘éxw'g'tzgl, he will become (or turn into) a BUDDHA ; git—(for 5'2.) ditto a Gon; &W'LYL'QQL, he shall become a king ‘2 H'N1,——int0 a LAMA or a LAMA ; inn—(for Q's), into a man, or a man. § 217. gm or gem, of whom P from whom? sfi’q'atxsrw, }of or from Goa. 0r — — Ow, (113) N g N v a“ V am" of or from BUDDHA or — -— aw, ésrif'w . ’}of or frOm the king. . or — — QW, iaw'auw'ss'w, from all quarters. a‘i'gq'qw, from all men. § 118. The expressions formed in English, by the auxiliary verb ‘to have’ and to have not, (or not to have) are rendered here by the substantive Verb 'ZI'R ‘ to be’ (to one) and its not to be ; as : s'qrwi/s, to whom is? or who has ? sfi'q'uis'a'q'fi’a'wawv'zs"is, (to Goa are, &c.) or GoD has all good qualities or perfections. NGN'QN'Q'fi'q'i'wq'im, (there is no defect,‘ &c.) BUDDHA has nodefects, or is without imperfections. QQ'il,'Q'3|/L"dlfi, the king has riches. H'N'G'gv'é‘fi‘ll'a‘is'Q/R, the high priest (or LAMA) has spiritual dominion. i’q'si'fiwv'srsrts'ifs, the ministers (officers or magistrates) have power or au th0rity. fiQ'd'i'fifiN'WQ'fl'fll-I'L‘II'QSII, the country people have much to do. § 219. The use of the correlative pronouns RIG—a (MG'Qif—Q'Q, to whom—to him, or who—to him.) “ ns'q's‘t’q'as'wiqwsq'ru ivw'ew'i'srssraaq'éfn” “ I pay homage to that BUDDHA, Who has the chief perfection.” (or salutation to the Supreme Intelligence). § 220. Since there is no variation in verbs, with respect to person and number; these are determined by the preceding subject, consisting of a pronoun, noun or pro per name; as, q', I ; is, thou ; nil, he, she; was, we; lgq'zll, ye ; [$681, they, Qfil, going: for, I go, thou goest, he goes, we go, ye go, they go, (114) 2: JV "3N1; ', by whom has it been brought? or who brought it? 'QQ'RKI'ii'V'Q’G, by these men has it been brought, or these men brought it. V J‘I 'fia'gw'qmqu'w, G I have perused (read over) it. rags: -— -, you (thou hast) have ditto. J"J0J1! ii! 'riq'fiw I - --, he has perused it, (or it has been read over by me, thee, and him.) 'R‘l'afi'WW'fi‘V'TJEIIIN'Q’, we have perused those (read over). q'riq'iatw'é‘w -_ --, you have’ditto. J1J1 q'filc'iatw'gw - -—, they have ditto,~ (or they have been read over by us, you 11" J? and them.) HZN'EQ'QRN'fiw'IWQ'fi‘H'U, Bananas commanded or said. NRN'QN'WN'EW'IWQQWQ, the BUDDHAS commanded or said. flq'gqq'fi/w'lldqu, Ananda begged, (or asked, requested.) qq'a’w'fiatw'fiw'lial/m'q, the hearers (shra'vakas) begged (requested or asked). § 221. The objective is the same with the nominative in Tibetan, and this case is used before neuter and intransitive verbs, even when it denotes the object of action ; as, won't}: I‘go; i'g'tiiq,'what is that; SQI'l‘fBI'WIIQKtN, where is the king? Ii/'KI§R'N'<2\]/lll, he has not slept; lils's'ifi'Q‘Sll, what art thou doing? tis'qlt'il'qw, when are you'come, (or arrived)? ‘fi'it'fil'dt/G' or mail, the sun has arisen ; a'q'a'q'difi', the moon has set; lit/'qu'qx'és, he is beaten ; Qfisl'afi'Qéil‘LlL'éR, the world is destroyed. § 2‘22. The case denoting the agent, by whom, or the instrument with which, any action is produced, is called the instrumentive. This case occurs very frequently, since it is used both before active and passive verbs, or before every verb denoting a transitive action on an object or person. ln the languages of Europe, it may be rendered properly by the subjective or nominative case, and by the preposition ‘ with’ or ‘by’ (when any instrument, manner, 0r way of action is to be expressed); and in the passive form or voice, with the particle ‘ by’; as, i'qgn'iivlt'éi'qq'uw'fi‘w, I wrote it with my own hand, or it is written by me; gm'it'fla'éw'q’gx or qu'qrég, the king is respected by all, or, all do respect the king. gw'qfiwsvavfiw'agcvfif, Iltgq'a', Klflfi'fil'qgri/n this doctrine has been, is,- and will be taught (commanded) by Bonnus; or, Bununa- has taught, is teaching, and will teach this doctrine. (115) PROSQDY. § 223. In Tibetan, verse differs little from prose ; since there is no distinction of vowels into short and long, accented and emphatical; consequently there are no poetical feet measured by short and long syllables. All poetical compositions are in a sort of blank verse (rhyme not being in use, except in some few instances) differing from each other (or from one another) only in the number of syllables. Although several poetical works, (as, the “ Kavyédarsha,” by DANn1,) have been translated by the Tibetans, they have not adopted the metrical feet usedin Sanskrit versification. §224. The several poetical pieces (or verses) occurring in the KAH-GYUR and STAN~GYUR, and in other works derived from India, have been rendered by the Tibe tans, in blank verses, consisting, generally, of four lines each of seven syllables. But in the invocations and benedictions, at the beginning and end of some treatises or works, a few verses or stanzas of four lines, are sometimes introduced, consisting each of 9, ll, 13 or more syllables. i § 225. By adopting the mythological and religious systems of the Brahmanists and Buddhists of lndia, the Tibetans have indeed formed a copious poetical lan guage; borrowing many epithets and mythological embellishments from those sources. But since their verses are free from the fetters of rhyme and metre, all the poetical pieces in Tibetan, originals or translations, may be read with as much ease, as if they had been written in prose. LIST OP VERBS. § 226. Note. The Ll, pa, and It, va, terminations are used with this difference,‘ that the st is put after the following final letters of the verbal root; viz. It'§'8|'11'8t'4V; and the II after '-'~'Q IJQI (Or after any vowel). The verbs in the following list, as they now stand with-the LI and It terminations, are properly participial or verbal nouns. ln the infinitive the terminations would be L11, par, and 111, var, which likewise fre quently occur in» this language; but‘, since the participial form" is more consistent with the Tibetan practice, they have been so expressed in the following list, in that language; while the English meaning is given in the infinitive. (116) ALPHABETICAL LIST or TIBETAN Vsnas: ain't], v. a. to read, peruse ; v. umq'q. Kll'éfi'q, v. a. to dance. EQ'RI‘QR'H or EQ'RI'QSQ'U, v. a. to censure, M'It, \I o. a. to perceive, - understand. blame. til/ail, v. a. to put on, wear. alarq, v. a. to mend, patch. glam, V v. a. ditto. o .‘JQI'II, 0. In. to yawn, to gape. mvlq'u, v. a. to read ; v. 31811:. fiq'q, v. a. to mend, patch shoes, &c.; 0. 518.1]. giq'tt, v. n.to discourse, talk. F'Kli’fi'q, v. a. to cover (the month of a ves~ £11111, 0. a. to make fiat, level. V sel, &c.) 5151], v. a. to loose, relax, slacken. p'swiq'fiyq, v. a. to flatter. I‘l-Bl‘q'tt, u. a. to conceive, mind, fix in the mind. R'sq'fig'q, v. a. to give fair words. “will, u. n. to cut ofi'. ll'il'fl, v. a. to abuse by ill words. sworn, v. a. to scatter, spread, put asunder. F'fi'qig'q, u. a. to say, utter, repeat with a 81311, u. to make water. ‘ loud voice. Eli'q, v. a. to twist, wreath, wind. rs'sfi'q, v. a. to subtract, diminish. KIQQ'Q, u. a. to make soft, pliant, tame. Won'q'q, v. n. to snow, to fall (as snow). 8151.1, 0. a. to compress, include, bring one F'Q‘g'q, v. n. to open, blow (as a flower). to an extremity, F'QQL'II, v. n. to change in colour. nix'qq'q, v. n. to lie naked. pvqfi'q, v. n. to open, to blow (as a flower), Ilsll'q, \l v. a. to break, to break asunder, off. p'Qfig'q, v. a. to open his, &c. mouth. qzs'q, v. a. to cut; v. 81.311. [Ti/KIN, v. n. to be still, silent, not to speak. Eli/131i, v. a. to spread, scatter, disperse. p'iq'fi'qiq'q, v. n. to sit still, to hold his llamas, v. a. to examine, explore, spy. peace. qiiJL'II, v. a. to get, acquire, procure, pro~ F'fiR'E'fi'll, v. a. to boast, brag, glory in. vide. V n 0 F'gl'tt, v. a. to change the colour of, &c. SMITH, v. to desire, Wish earnestly, strive, Ecru, v. a. to encompass, pervade, compre endeavour. hend, include ; to.conceive. ‘ 5171!; 1;, v. a. to give over, to bestow on; v. Isn't: or IIG'Ii‘M'Lt, u. n. to be full or replete. misfi Klq'IIL'fifi'q, v. a. to make full, to fill. El‘l‘fi'll'l'é'fl'q, v. a. to give thanks; to remu Ill-I'qx'qgr'q, v. n. to become full. neratc. turn, 11. n. to abscond. qqq'gq'ng'q, u. a. ditto. (117) l‘lfifi'tl, v. a. to give to, intrust, commit to; v. Els'q, u. a. to gather together; v- gran og'q. miss. sworn, I). a. to make tame, break, subdue, BIBL'H, v. a. to bleed, to let blood. to discipline, educate; v. Q501'q. Klfiq'q, v. n. to drop, drip, fall in drops. qiq'q, v. a. to lift, hold, take up, to weigh; lifiq'sl, v. n. to be overcast with. v- QiliiV'q Klgfil'q, v. a. to touch, reach to. join, meet. Eli/fl], v. a. to utter, say, tell with a loud qaq'q, v. a. to cut into small pieces. voice; v. Qi’qu. KIBQI'II, v. a. to reduce into powder, to grind. mew, o. a. to allow, grant; yield, permit. Elia/It'll, v. a. to make a noise with the fin 81mm, :1. n. to dwell, abide ; be, continue. . gers. Slit/Wit, v. n. to be ashamed. Elev/KW'II, v. n. to belong, appertain to, to be 813/51], v. a. to hurt, to do harm to. taken to. lisp/Jr“, v. a. to depress, humble, deject; sur affirm, 0. a. to give, yield, bestow, grant ; v. pass; v. 31311. ' mac'zi. 11135111, v. a. to strain, filter; let out blood; n'B/KI'S'QSFI'LJ, v. c. to cause to give. v. Qén'nn Qésrq.‘ th/G'Ill'iv'q, to be able to give. Ilé'i'q, v. a. re rub together. BlTi’R'QL'il'QW'q, not to be able to give. Klg'q, v. a. to hurt, to do harm to; v. Qi'q. qfi’c'qx'ég'q, the act of giving, or the state qgl'q, v. a. to injure, hurt, do wrong to. of being given. Klq-Kru, v. a. to lay, place, put ; v. QIE’KI'Q. Elie/511, v. a. to give, commit, entrust to; v. Kqu'q, v. a. to weigh, measure; pay, repay; Il‘Ffi'll V- QFQI'IL Ilfill'tl, v. a. scatter, spread, disseminate; v. qéq'q, v. a. to try, prove, examine; to be Qé'rq ruined; v. Q§W§L iqgtuv'q, u. a. to tie, bind, fasten, compose; Lqéi‘qw, v. a. to suck out; v. Qfiq'q. v. iii/ava udqw'q, v. a. to put, place in order, to ar BIRG'TJ, v. a. to open wide, to menace. range. 8151111 1). a. to cast, spread, scatter; make; qriioy'q, v. a. to overpower, subdue, conquer; v- sieve v. Qés'q- ' algwq'q, v. a. to advise, counsel. sign, 1;. a. to smite, beat. Instr-q, v. n. to be, to be found. MQKI'H, v. a. to lay, put; shut; v. QEKI'U. Ilgti'tl, v.a. to spread on the ground; v. Qfiq'q. ng'q, v. n. to attend, be heedful. ' (118) 8151'", v. a. to cut away the branches and Bli't'q, o. n. to be ashamed, to be in confu‘ leaves, to prune, lop trees. sion; v. QSN'H. lifiw'u, u. n. to sit, be, exist. 515111;, v. n. to ache, to be in continued pain. lid/Wit, v. a. to cut, hew, chop ; v. Qfs'qu. Eli/'11, v. a. to own, to acknowledge. Ila/NW, v. a. to subdue, vanquish, conquer, Big/Wt], v. n. to be spent in vain. (entirely 3) v. QFVN'V'Q. ‘ ll'dl'fl, v. a. to borrow any thing; to adopt. Ital/WW, v. a. to apply himself earnestly to a KMQ'H, v. n. to yawn, gape. thing. li'iifil'q, v. n. to be hindered, stopped. IIIKI'KI, v. a. to strain, percolate; v. nfirrq. KI'QL'II, v. n. to bend, to bow down. 515W“, 0. n. to eat up, to eat; feed on. Kl'afi'q, v. n. to fluctuate, be unsteady, be 81111:, v. a. to lay, put on. agitated ; to be inattentive. QHN'LI, v. a. to begin, to have intention to do. Blit‘t'q, v. to practise fornication. ll'ilW'q, v. a. to look on, see, view, regard, nirq'q, 11.11. to be negligent, idle; v. a. to behold. forget. Klz‘iit'q, v. n. to go to bed, to sleep. Elsi/TI, o. v. a. n. to to dress. be agitated, moved, shaken llal'q, v. a. to press, squeeze, to crush, &c. ; v. Qil'q. Ella/81W, v. to cover; shelter. mini], 0. n. to ache, to be in pain. nit/Ir“, v. a. to wave, shake, brandish, turn, qznw'q, v. a. to set, place, fix, plant, fix fan. thoroughly ; v. Q3811, also It§8|'q. Illa/11m c. a. to cover, offuscate, darken. 8138.11, 0. a. to seize, take, hold fast, con qvlr’w'q, v. a. to bake; dress victuals. ceive, comprehend 3 v. Qélrm qzc'q. qasrq, v. a. to split, cleave; confess. Il‘ifi'll, v. a. to turn, convert to, make to en. Ill-'5'" for 118511, 0. a. to unfold, explain; ter into; v. Qfifi'q. tell. 8138111, v. a. to shut, close entirely ; v.Q§8t'q. natw'u, v. n. to sit in order, series. 513131;, c. a. to turn out of one’s way, to go ng'q, v. a. to chide, rebuke, reprehend. aside (not to meet, &c.) 3 v. Q%L'q. nir'q, v. n. to abuse, revile, speak ill. IIEQI'H, v. n. to creep or enter in an inclined Klfill'q, (v. lsWWW) v. a. to split, cleave; con posture; v. QQQ'II. fess. ' Iriq'q, v. a. to keep, hold; put, lay on; v. Kl‘ll‘W'lI, u. n. to go, walk stately; to die. aés's Ktfil'tt, v. a. to ask, beg. (119) Iii/r11, v. a. to pour out, shed, diffuse. S'Il, v. n. to weep, lament. 8liilll'll, v. a. to split, cleave, divide; v.81fl8l'q. S'QI‘IIR'LI, v. n. to weep and sob, to weep with IIKR'Q, v. a. to unfold,dress, comb; v. nag'q. convulsive sighs. “Haw, v. a. to put on or upon. 5111:,11. n. to grunt, to make agrumbling KIA/It'll, v. a. to prepare, make ready. noise. dI'EW'LI, v. a. to know, to be acquainted with. llzil'ti, v. a. to measure; to let go one after another; to chase, hunt. st'IW'q, v. a. to know every thing. HIVG'U, to conceal, hide, keep secret. &KW‘LI, v. n. to be conceived, to be origi IIN‘R'Q, v. a. to kill, slay, murder. nated. lerq, v. a. to hear fully, to hearken to. &N'q, v. n. to begin, intend, go. llN‘q'LX, v. a. to return a kindness; to repay. qwq, v. a. to hear, hearken to. Il‘iill'll, v. a. to cast or fling back, up. earn, a. n. to lie down, to sleep. Il‘GQ'q, 11.11. to toll, sound, ring; split, divide. aqrq, v. n. to fall or break down. Ilgt-I'II, v. a. to command, order, bid. 381's), 0. to feel, touch, handle, search after. KlQ'q or Ilfifi'q, v. a. to pick, cleanse, put jq'q, u. n. to creep, move slowly ; u. a. spy, asunder. observe. lls‘ll'q, u. a. to repair, mend; cure, heal ; feed, Ei'qn'ofi'w, v. n. to approach, go near to. qt'fq, u. a. to soften, mollify, make soft ; v. bring up. Blitz/51w, v. a. to collect, gather together, heap ate-In News. up, make ready. {'11, v. a. to buy, purchase. Rial/Wit, v, a. to conceal, hide, keep secret; E'q'ig'q, v. a. to endeavour, be diligent. gqu, v. to reach, go, come, to. v. FING'II. a’q'q, v. a. to find, get; discover; v. Qfilq'lt. tub/311, u. a. to kill, slay, murder, destroy; alarm, 11. a. to. hear, to be informed or have v. Kama. qdi’q'q, v. a. to repay a kindness, repay; v. notice of. 52:11, 0. a. to draw, cite, (quote; invite; v. rim-1'14. _ mil/1'11, ma. to turn, brandish, (in one’s hand.) Qia'u. 53,1), 1). n. to remember, have in memory ; Ruiz/mi, v. a. to pray, entreat, beg, petition; o. a. to recollect. I to take of meat and drink; to put on gq'qyég'q, v. a. to bring or put into one’s a. garment, &c. GQ'H, v. n. to be weary, fatigued. ' memory, or notice. ( 120 ‘) sg'q, v. a. to run a race ; to run a horse. qqq'q or RGIW'II, u. a. to commend, praise. sfi'q, v. a. to wrap round about, wind. RCR'II, u. n. to be terrified, afraid. Rally, 11. a. to trouble, stir, shake, move up 31.18111, 0. a. to weigh, ponder (mentally), v and down ; coagulate, curdle; to churn. measure, mete; v. sultry. Rfi/E'l'll, v. a. coagulate, curdle; to churn. RLIL'II, u. a. to dictate, say or tell what to \gql'q, u. a. to play on a musical instrument. write. gilll'q, v. a. to stop, hinder, preclude, pro $21,811:, v_ a. to weigh, measure, &c. ; v. gammy hibit; v. QEIKIW'U. Rat/1'11, v. a. to dictate, &c. ; v. guru. RKIR'II, v. u. to fill entirely, replenish, make figq'q, v. a. to hang, suspend; v. RQIR‘II. full; v. inv'q. \gq'q, v. a. to examine, prove, try, essay; REIT", u. a. ~to cover; overspread; v. v. sir/Wu. Qimw'q; git-1'11, v. a. v. 3512'!! REIL'U, v. a. to separate, seclude, fold up. gfi's'u, v. a. v. 5551;. views, 0. a. to load, put a load on ; v. “first, 1:. a. to maculate, stain, spot. Qilq'a. . gram, 0. a. to let down, to put in order ! le'q, u. a. to tear, rend, cleave, divide ; v. arrange ; v. Q‘qutv'll. ‘Ql‘w'q. sgll'u, v. a. to bore or pierce through; v. sait'q, v. a. to kill, destroy, murder, ex QBRW'KJ. tinguish ; v. Qi'lit or Qiiawmy. $5111], 0. a. to extend, dilate, expand, cover, Eli/Garth v. a. to think on, remember, he fix; v- agnv's merciful to. QQJL'II, v. a. to make smooth or even. ail/5'14, v. n. to laugh, smile; v. a. to build, ggq'u, u. a. to offer, present, give; v. QBQ'II. frame, prepare; v. QEl/R'lt. RTE/'11, v. a. to pour out, empty ; v. Qif'q, Rfi/N'll, v. n. to want, to be necessary. R‘El/Bi‘q, v. a. to give, bestow, transfer, im \fi'q, v. n. to sit in a reclined posture. part, communicate ; to maculate, stain ; \éw'u, v. n. to be merry or glad. v. RUKI'KI. 51:13:11, v. a. to scatter, spread ; v. QQN'LI. qfi'q'it (for Iii/WE) v. a. to squeeze, force out. gfi/q'q, v. a. to kill, murder, destroy; v. qfi'q, v. a. to blot out, efi‘ace ; v. Q§TL Qs‘i'sw'u. figil'q, v. a. to brandisb, wave, wag, move. sit/Wit, v. a. to unfold, untie, explain; v. gi'rt, v. a. to divide, separate, open; v. Qavsrat Qimrrt. aés'u. ( 5) 1 ) “01w, v. a. to separate, force, or put asun fi/s'q, v. n. to dare, be bold, have courage, der; v. QHQ'H. be audacious. asi'q, u. a. to diminish, subtract, lessen; v. @511, v. n. to go, walk, travel, arrive at. Qfi'ri. Q/KIN'U, v. n. to turn to or towards. $5,811], v. a. to take or carry away by force ; 'Q’ll‘l], v. to envy, to impart unwillingly. v. Q‘Zl'l'k'. rqu, v. to meet, join, encounter, find. RQQI'II, v. n. to smile. gll'll, v. n. to flow. Rit'll, v. a. to defile, pollute. 55's}, 0. a. to do, make, act, perform. stir/5'2], v. a. to abuse, curse, censure. BC'II, v. a. to take, receive, accept; vv. @1511. ggorq or sgol'ql'éq'q, u. a. to grind, re 531;, v. a. to chew, grind with the, teeth. duce to fine powder. git, v. a. to ransom, redeem. .sglq'q, v. a. to show, or point at. gq'q, v. a. to pour into. WU, v. a. to be sick. gs'q, v. a. to make or cause to drink. fit, 11. a. to suck, draw milk from the breast. qqu'q, part. pret. of Qilqvq, to hinder, pro 5R1}, v. a. to suckle, nurse. hibit, &c. JU‘q, v. n. to set, sink, decline, decay, tmq'rr, part. pref. of Qiicw'q, to fill, make grit, v. n. to approach, draw near to. .full. , QN'LJ, v. a. to can, to be able to do. 1?qu, v. a. to hold fast, to extend. 351.11, v. n. to sink down. IW'Q'Q, part. pref. of Qiitpv'q, to cover, spread Xt'tl, v. n. to commit a fault, be faulty. over. 813's, 0. a. to perceive, take, receive. warn, to be separated, selected ; banished $5151], v. a. to depress, humble, surpass, out Imql'q, to he laden, to spin. do ; v. ai’s'q and News. naive, to be split, rent, cleft. liars], v. n. to be satisfied or content with. ng'q, to be drawn down ; to be called, 311.11, 11.11. to err, mistake, or to be mistaken. SIQI'II, v. n. to agree, meet. summoned, gathered together. 1:136:11, pref. pass. of Qgflw'q, to destroy, nat'q, u. n. to be defeated, to lose the field, kill, cut off. not to_ win, to fail. qgrq, v. a. to carry, convey, to respect, im'q, v. n. to come to, arrive at, a place. reverence, honour. 13111;, 1'. n. to be proper, tit, decent, be qfi'q'q, part. pass. of Qfi'twq, to pull, pluck, coming. draw violently. (122) qfi'c'q, part. pass. of Qil'r-z'q, to frighten. ziliif'll, to be made dry. 'qfi’g'u, part. pass. or pret. to build, make, WISH, v. a. to separate, fold up. frame, fabricate; bring to. 'qg'q, v. a. to besmear, bedaub, anoint. Ila/611, v. n. to be angry with. 'ng'q, v. a. to hide, conceal. nil/01w, u. a. to spare, not to use much. qgw'u, v. u. to contract, shrink up. UQQI'II, v. n. to talk nonsense. 1131.11, 1). a. to send, dispatch, bestow, give. 'Rfifi'q, v. a. to bind, tie; to bind hand and qul'q, v. a. to exhort, incite, bid. foot; v. ori‘qu. 11341;, v. a. to choose, elect. 1151!, v. a. to spread, diffuse, scatter. qfi'q'q, v. a. to put on (as a garment). ufiq'q, v. a. to extend, widen. trig/1'11, v. a. to encircle, surround ; to make 1451511, v. a. to reprove, rebuke. turn round ; v. tm'q'q, v. a. to select, choose. qfi’Q'fi, v. a. to make boil, to boil ; v. qqat'q, part. pret. of Qfifl'll, to scatter, dif trx'q, v. a. to carry, convey, take away. fuse, show, display. 1136111, v. a. to spend all. qslor‘q, part. pret. of Qilqw, to unfold, ex ugq'q, v. a. to protect, defend, keep safe; plain, explicate. v. “gt-1'11. qii'n, v. a. to conduct, guide; v. Qfiqq, flail], v. a. to measure out. qg'q, v. a. to wash clean, to cleanse ; v. 1:131:11, v. a. to protect, defend; v. 8,11%. saws 1:13am], 0, a. to stir, move, shake up; v. glfl'q qfiq'q, v. n. to be indigent, poor, hungry. yarn, v. a. to repeat, add to; keep or hold Jifi’q'fl, part. pret- Of Qimrq or le/‘X‘II, to up; v. g’x'n. untie, unfold, explain. “LIQQI'II, v. a. to conduct, convey, carry, send : “way, u. a. to read over, peruse; v. 51811“ v. fiW'II. illlru. qfi'tr, v. a. to borrow, take on loan ; v. i'tr. qx‘aq'q, v. a. to desire earnestly, to long qiq'tr, to be gathered together, to assemble for. in the middle. qg'rr, v. a. to steal away ; v. 3'1 qga'q, u. a. to leave 01?, put aside, renounce, lib/"q, v. a. to dig up or out ;‘v. iii/"q. forsake, relinquish ; v. 3:11, 115:1, o. a. to stretch out, eXtend. qgg'q, v. a. to forget ; v. 33%. :mq'q, v. a. to fulfil, accomplish, make up, qgrtl, v. a. to leave ofl", cast away, relin satiate, satisfy, content, perform. quish ; v. yrq. (123) ngs'q, v. u. to produce, generate, form, 1:518:11, v. a. to raise, erect, build; v. iq'fl, mil/‘11, v. to argue, reason, consider. make, cause, breed, rear up, beget, pro create ; v. @311, v. a. firm, v. n. Ila/R11, v. n. to go on or over. "qiiorq, v. a. to ford; argue, dispute ; v. Iii/3'14, v. a. to move, agitate, shake ; to ' move one’s self, to go, walk ; v. QIR'R'. {WITH or £161"; qi'q'q, v. a. to put, lay, hang on ; v. first. ‘QQG It, v. a. to extend, dilate, widen. Ugfi'll, v. n. to expel, eject, banish; v. 115611, v. a. to adorn, embellish. v. a. to hurl, fling, dart, throw with fig'u, v. a. to expect, wait for. News, uga'u, v. a. to beget, procreate, form, make, violence; v. art's" iti'll. USQJ'II, v. n, to fall down senseless, to faint. cause, breed, rear. flg'tl, v. a. to put into a cord, order, series. ng'q'q, to rattle, make a noise. zillil'Ll, v. u. to hinder, obstruct; v. n. to be qgsru, v. n. to run, to run away. qgn'q, v. a. to put on oath. stopped, hindered. WWII, v. n. to be or become full or replete HKWLI, v. to laugh, deride. rtmt'q, v. a. to try, prove, tempt. with ; v. IG'H. 115111;, v. a. to make dense or thick. nif'q, v. a. to put on a garment, to divide. again, 11. a. to expect one, to wait on, to sag-q, v. a. to divide. tarry till one arrives. Ital/1'11, v. n. to linger, tarry, remain long, to mlqrq, v. a. to move, agitate, shake ; v. be long on one’s way. Ital-1'11, v. a. to prolong, procrastinate. 3,91"; qfil'T-‘t, v. a. to proclaim, publish, make known; rifi'tt, v. a. to do (hereafter). v. ill"!! qfis'q, v. a. to do, make, act, perform, &c. qi’q'q, v. a. to conglomerate, make into an to number, count up, to com flaws, v. a. oval figure, to make round. pute ; v. n. to grow cold. 'qi'at'q, v. a. to imagine, represent in one’s ‘qu'q, v. a. to open wide, to menace. mind ; v. lit/It'll. Iniiql'q, v. a. to roll, to roll up. Iii/1:14, v. a. to detain, withhold ; thicken, &c. ug'q, v. a. to cleanse, make clear (from the quq, a. n. to stretch with yawning; v. husks, &c.) a. to defecate, strain, let sit down. fis'q. mgr-“cu, v. qu'q, v. a. to turn, change; translate; to IIQR'KI, v. a. v. 13511. multiply (as in arithmetic) ; v. g L'It. WITH, 11. n. to grow old. J ( 1'24 ) itQQI'Ii, v. a. to turn upside doWn, to over 'qfiaru, v. a. to reward, give a reward ; v. throw; v. éQI'II. we. 1338111, v. a. to proclaim, tell openly, pub rigrrq, v. a. to draw in and let out breath, lish, preach. to inhale and exhale, to breathe ; v. 511:1; “Til, v. a. to enumerate, count up; up qgfi'q, v. a. to parch or broil, to deceive ; v. braid; to cool, make cool ; v. qaq'q, a... v. fifl'it. qa'qw, v. a. to chase, hunt ; deceive; v. gq'q. ILWOJ‘IJ, v. a. to save, deliver, rescue ; v. q§8|'q, v. a. to praise, commend. ifsrrt nitrq, v. n. to be faint, weary, tired; to Ilfil'l'q, v. a. to adjust, compose, put together; decay. v. firm. Iii/'11, v. n. to become green, mouldy, rot Iqfi'q'q, v. ii. to ofi‘uscate, overshadow ; v. ten ; to prosper; v. a. to bless, give 1311's. benediction _ _ ; v. i'fl. \/ itfiat'q, to endeavour, make great efforts ; v. v-qs‘é'qr'atéq'q, v. a. to make green; bless, filt'q. prosper. .,_ ‘qfiQ'q, v. a. to wrap, roll, wind up, twist ; qQ'q'q, v. a. to fret, vex. v. fiorq. ‘ 'qarrq, part. pref. of Eli/8111, v. a. to break, qu'q, v. a. to pick up, gather, collect. the fut. of anrq, to walk over, per ng'tt, v. a. to mix, mingle, put together; to ambulate; v. a. contrive, feign, relate falsely; v. 1171!. qzq'tr, v. a. to wear, carry, use; v. osc'q. ng'q, v. a. to liken, compare, estimate ; v. 13.6511, part. pref. of Eli/$11, v. a. to cut off. Earn. IISRI'Q, v. a. to conceal, hide, keep secret, ‘ng'u, v. a. to prepare, make ready, render cover; v. Qifli'k'. propitious; to acquire, learn, obtain, guru, v. a. to bargain, make an agreement; get ; v. Elt'q. to dance,jump; v. Qéfl'll. ‘ qfi'q, v. a. to repeat, (what belongs to the 'qu‘It, v. a. to make, prepare, make ready; 7 same class.) v. QéQ'II. ing/mu, u. a. to go on ; perambu'late ; v. IML'II, v. a. to wreathe; to pull by force. zrfi/Jru, v. a. to embellish, decorate with ; v. qzor'q, part. pret. of QISQJ'U, to weigh, pon ig’mi. ' der, measure; pay, pay back. qit'fl, v. a. to reap, cut down ; txi'tt. 113:1, v. a. to bind,'tie, fasten ; v. ng‘lt. (125) 1131111, v. a. to ascend, mount a vehicle,horse, “W11, v. a. to scorn, disdain, contemn. &c. ; v. ng‘k'. Hat-2'11, v. n. to grow old ; be worn out ; v. qfil'q for 'qgr‘q, v. a. to squeeze, press aims. out entirely; v. Qil'tl. Hgi'q, v. n. to fade or wither away ; v. afi'q. 112Q'U, part. pref. of Qfiaqr'q, v. a. to depose, nave, v. a. to find, get ; v. as'q. divest, expel, cast out, eject, drive out, "$518111, v. n. to be troubled or stirred up, banish. dirty ; v. all'll. #51:, v. a. to fetch or draw up water, &c.; rigs'q, v. a. to tell, say, report, give notice V- Q5"!! of; v. fifi'q. trgq'q, parf. pref. of lel'li, v. a. to put, lay, "WW, 0. a. to extend, stretch out; v. place; close, shut; make, cause. it's'sr. 1:58:11, 0. n. to contract, shrink up ; v. Itfifi'll, v. a. to make even or level, equal; Q5511! to balance ; v. fllt'll. zri'q, v. a. to promise, assure, afiirm; v. 751%‘11'11, v. a. to lay flat on the ground, to lay Q3": to sleep ; v. Q'orq, v. u. QQ'U, v. n. uiit'q, v. a. to chew or grind with the teeth ; ‘qfilw'q, v. a. to give over to another, to re v. cistern. turn. 1:31.11, 1). a. to heap or pile up. UQ‘QJ‘H, v. n. to break or fall down (as a rock); 1.13411, v. a. to make, prepare, form ; v. Qg'll. v. ism Iii/N's], part. pref. of oi'aw'q, v. a. to over qiq'q, v. a. to dip, immerge, moisten; v. come, subdue, conquer. 351's! qZ/q'q, par-f. pref. of ngrtl, to commend, agave, v. a. to make less, to reduce ; V. commit to, entrust; v. ngj'rq, gene. qafi'q, v. n. to shine, glisten, glitter, &c. cigars, v. n. to grow or become sick; v. 'qé'q, v. a. to barter, change, turn ; v. 38111. i'n. REQI'II, v. a. to wash, cleanse (the hands, &c.) Inig'q, v. a. to honour, reverence ; to forget ; ‘qil't'q or qgri'q, to endeavour, make haste; v. is'q. v. fiil'q. Hiya, v. a. to say, utter, pronounce; v. 'qiq'q, v. n. to be afraid, to fear; v. it-w'q. a... qi’wq, v. to approach to; propitiate, gain, to 115W“, v. a. to borrow, take from others. i induce to favour; v. view. (126) ‘qiL‘II, v. a. to make grimaces to. Whirl}, v. n. to be in confusion or hurry; v, qiql'rr, u. a. to forget, neglect. frq'a'. Iii/51w, v. a. to have a desire or lust, to desire {$111, 1:. a. to pull down ; v. ifi-v. earnestly, to long for. Uhli'll, v. a. to hold, support, depend on ; fltI'KI'q, v. a. to give over, to deliver, to give v. *iQ'k'. into one’s hand. nil/5'11, v. a. to fasten with a peg and rope. qi’q'q, v. a. to accuse, charge with a crime. Ila/Wit, v. a. to squeeze or forcev out ; v. thirty, 11. a. to weave ; to grind. as: a. tram-q, part. pret. of m‘fizrq, to give. Ugl'tl, v. a. to look on, behold ; v. TIL Iqrfq'q, part. pret. of Qfi'qvq, to throw, cast, ‘q'gq'u,v. a, to fold up, (as a garment ;) v. hurl, fling. I en's. ng'q, v. a. to drop, to let fall in drops. q'gu'q, v. n. to be full or replete, to be Iqfiq'q, ground. part. pret. of flew, to spread i on the born. ngvu, v. a. to put on a saddle, to saddle. new, r. a. to pick up, gather, collect ; v. nyq'q, v. a. to show; instruct, teach; v. QQ'II. t'a's'. 75125111, 0. a. to cast down one’s self at the mu, 0, a, to give, ofl'er, present, bestow; feet of another. v. gli'll, afi'ord. qgc'q, v. a. to drink up the whole ; v. QQIQ'II. 1:311:13, v. a. to decorate, embellish, put into 115511, 0. a. to bow down ; v. Qs'i'k'. order or series ; v. gym, award, 11. a. to cover, put a cover on ; v. qg'q, v, a. to receive kindly, refresh, put to qgu'u. rest or respite; v. $1 “qr-,Qr‘q, part, pret. of Q5011, to subdue, over 'qfic'tr, v. a. to chide, reproach, abuse 5 v. come. @s'q. "qiq'q, part. pret. of oilw'q, to lift up. qgu'q, v, a. to infuse, instil, inspire, pour “lib/51'“, v. a. to pull, pluck, up, out. into ; v. §N'q. nqq'q, part. pret. of Qfi’q'q, to eject; cast out, 1:113o q'tr, v. a. to shorten, abbreviate; v. gfi'rt. draw out. 1:35.311, v. a. to repeat, to do many times; v. IG'IJ, v. n. to grow thick or fat. er“- . 135111, 0. a. to examine, investigate, try, &c.; 1:3 art], v. a. to make agree, concord, to con v. “111. fer ; v. gq'q. (127) IJQQ'LI, v. a. to keep, hold, support, main 1:511, v. a. to collect, gather together; to tain ; v. with abridge; v. g'i'tl. uirq, v. a. to give, bestow, grant; v. figlt'q, v. a. to make agree, to reconcile ; v. iru. gu'u. tfi's'u, v. a. to exalt, praise, commend. ngrrx, v. a. to confer, compare. QRQ'II, v. a. to carry, convey, take with, off. nil'q'q, v. a. to exchange, barter; to mix; 13131:, 0. a. to file, polish, cleanse; to fret; v. i'q'q. ' whet, sharpen. “Riv/'11, v. a. to hazard, to expose to accident ng'q, v. a. to fumigate, perfume, smoke. or danger. qsc'q, v. a. to strike, beat. Iii/51W, u. a. to compose, prepare, make 'qt'q'q, v. a. to clap, beat, strike, knock : ready. v. first or i'zru. IIQIR‘U, v. a. to associate, unite with. HQIN‘U, v. a. to add together. $1311, 1;. a. to whet, sharpen; v. il'tl or 2111:. tritium. n. to mind to suffer; to grow full IKQI'TJ, v. a. to spread, scatter, extend; v. of corrupt matter (as a sore). tort; or qu'li. qfiq'q, v. n. to be suffocated or choked by nic'u, v. a. to beat, strike on, to thresh; v. any thing in the throat. fDG'II. IIM'Q, v. a. to attend or look on. qzq'q, v. a. to beat, strike, smite; v. qi'n or first, 0. a. to. draw to, to attract. ism. qgvr, v. a. to hurt, to make a wound on, qqq'q, v. a. to lick all over, to lick; v. “q'gq'u, v. a. to increase, augment, add ism. to. qqg'q, v. a. to chew the cud (entirely), to “It'll, v. a. to take into one’s hand, to put chew, to ruminate, to muse ; v. '19:]. on, receive, to smell the scent of ; v, Q‘EII'LJ, v. a. to repeat, say again ; v. gum, fiscal. qn'u, v. n. to sit down; to wait for; v. 11318;, v. u. to prolong, to lengthen out, to Q’R'A'. delay, to extend far. qgat'q, v. a. to bind, tie, fasten ; oblige one’s 'q‘garq, v. a. to draw long, to spin out, to ,_ self, &c. ; v. il/li'q. prolong. aim or 'qi‘mw'q, v. a. to menace, threaten ; UEQ'U, v. a. to suckle; to pierce, to stab. v. iqvq. qiu'q, u. a. to abolish, destroy ; v. any. . (128-) “mg W1}, 1:. a. to smell, try the smell; v, to boil, dress, dye, tinge, to refine ; v. 4 Earn. Qi'u, in. 1:311, 11. a. to make less, smaller, to bring Hglru, v. a. to cut, hew, engrave, inoculate, nearer; v. 31w. beat, smite ; v. lefl'q. IVEN'LJ, v. a. to move, shake, agitate. qgw'q, v. a. to sell away; v. Qgfi'fl. qsil'n, v. a. to mix, mingle, make a mixture 118?", u. a. to dispute, argue, debate ; Y. of; v. *Z'II. fi's'u. Iii/N11, v. a. to smell, try the smell of; v. qgu'q, v. a. to begin, compose, write, make; {Wm v. $3M]. iii/1'13, v. a. to confound, disturb, set in 'qfi'rt, v. a. to count or number up, to ad disorder ; v. “3,1111 mit, acknowledge ; v. 12%;. nin'q, v. u. to strain, defecate, purify; v. nfin'u, v. a. to build or raise up a wall ; v. Qéq'q. iilru. flifi'fl, v. a. to press forward, to open a qig'q v. a. to love, be kind or merciful to. way to one’s self by pressing among the qfiqu, v. a. to raise one thing above another, multitude. to raise stories; to grind ; bind, tie, 1121.111, 0. a. to cut short. truss up; v. gsl'q. 'EIéQ'II, v. to watch over, to observe; to bring HQG'II, v. a. to shorten, gird or tuck up ; v. forth, to be born. fis'n. fl-iQI'II, v. a. to seek, to look for ; v. 1155'“, v. n. to endeavour, strive, labour. ngl'ti. ngrq, v. a. to give, bestow, afford ; v. 13211, v. a. to squeeze, press out. {15111. “ng'q, v. a. to set, plant, fix, establish ; v. 'qiq'q, v. a. to send, despatch, commission, Qélw'u. put into; v. é’wm flgfi'll, v. a. to put in, to inject; v. QQR'H. qé'q, v. a. to depress, oppress, to tread un “$3411, 0. a. to shut or close entirely, (the der one’s feet ; to make sink ; v. \ eye ;) v. QQN'Q. qg‘q, v. a. to transform, transfigure mira 1131!, v. a. to hurt, injure, do harm to; v. culously; v. 5'11. aim. qé'q, v. a. to menace, threaten, to make 1158111, 11. a. to sew (entirely) ; v. Qifl'k'. grimaces, to tuck, gird up ; v. i'q. 1:31;, ‘1 v. n. to become ripe or mature ; v. a. q-qq'u, part. pret. of QfE/II'H, to put, place, lay. (129) IIQR'A', v. n. to smile, laugh; v. a. deride. nam'u, v. a. to waste, destroy, rase, erase, 'qq'q'u, v. n. to go or creep in unawares ; to turn upside down. v- Qin'lI trawl], v. a. to moisten, make wet; v. n. to 11611:, v. a. to shave, cut with a razor. grow wet. qg'q, v. a. to melt, to digest ; v. QE'II. 'anl'u, v. a. to confess, declare. quW'LI, v. n. to sit (stately), be, exist. “HR'U, v. a. to explain, tell fully; v. Q6311. IXQR'LI, v. n. to go, depart. II‘W'LI, v. a. to prepare, make ready. 72:31.11, 0. u. to cut, chop, shave. IIFIQ'II, v. a. to kill animals for food, to butcher. qés'q, v. a. to rise, build, erect; to stand up. UHL'II, v. a. to put into series; to measure, racism, 1:. a. to will, wish, desire. to hunt. qéw'q, v. a, to take, receive, accept of; to qnq'q, v. a. to cleanse, wash clean, purge. put on. qfiri'u, part. pret. of Qill'q, to pull down, 145/'11, v. a. to milk, draw milk, &c.; v. Qél'q. destroy ; break, violate. Rani], v. a. to hew, cut, chop with an axe. qgfil'll, v. a. to flay, strip, take off the skin; Irm'q, v. a. to eat up, to eat the whole; to to copy. eat ; v. TIL 1151‘, v. a. to sell, give to another. nfi'q, v. n. to be intoxicated. 115311, 1;. a. to rub. ng'q, part. pret. of ngq, to take into one’s 'qgu'u, v. a. to weep over or for, to lament. hand, to seize, to catch ; v. Klgu'q. qgr'q, v. a. to burn slightly. 1:1 111, pret. of Q3111, to turn out, or aside 1:5!1‘11, v. a. to confront, compare, to face. from one’s way. qiw'u, v. a. to know, to know a person or qfis'u, v. a. to keep, hold ; v. Qés'u. thing unknown before. tig'q, v. a. to make, form, fabricate, work, rig/'12:, v. a. to spill, shed, pour out. frame. qzl/L'q, v. a. to chase, course, hunt, pursue. nay/5w, v. a. to suffer, forbear, have patience. qiq'm'q, v. a. to put away, to defer, to delay. qg'q, v. a. to repeat, turn round; pass over IlW‘l'lI, v. a. to collect, assemble; to hoard up ; v. “‘JIKI'U. (a mountain), double (a cape) ; v. 5'1; or as twt'tl, v. a. to purify, cleanse, clear up. qgfl'q, v. a. to gather or bring together. qwg'u, par-Lyra. of Iva/‘11, to kill, murder. Ila/BTU, a. to turn back, to force to go back, to qw'q, v. a. to return, to do like, to render, reform; v. ain't]. repay, supply; v. Qéq'll. (1:30) IINN'U, v. a. to think, meditate, muse on, to 11941;, 1:. a. to warm, heat moderately. qmc'q, v. a. to erect, set up, raise, to lift, consider; v. $131 or 515%?“ ‘RNQI'II, v. a. to put away, cleanse, clear, heal, hold up, rouse or excite; v. Q’q'q. cure ; v. IIIQI‘II. qgg'u, v. a. to mix, mingle, alloy. "illilfil'll, v. a. to agitate, shake, retake; cast quaru, v. a. to patch, mend ; v. awn. 'qgiq'tl, v. a. to teach; learn fully ; v. filq'lr. up. filQJL'Q, u. a. to whirl about. qg'q, v. a. to deceive, impose on ; v. g'q. ufiq'q, v. a. to refresh, cool; wash. Iqaj'tl, v. a. to twist, wind. qg'q, v. a. to receive one; solemnly to go to qfi'q'u, v. n. to arrive at a place. ‘qQ/KI'LI, u. a. to turn, reverse, to turn inside meet one, &c. qg'q'q, v. a. to efl'ace, blot out, destroy. out. txgfl'q, v. a. to shut or close the mouth, 8w. 36%, v. a. to swallow down. Ilil'q, v. a. to pull asunder, to anatomise. a‘lq'u, v. 11. not to be. IIQIR'YJ, v. a. to pull asunder, to pick, cleanse. 511, v. a. to grind or cut with the teeth; Raft-2'11, v. a. to make right, straight, equal, to to chew. keep, hold in equilibrium, to balance. QQI'H, v. n. to smile. qNJp'q, v. n. to harden one’s self, to suffer 5:311, v.12. not to be, to be wanted. anything. ir'qu, v. a. to command, order, say. will], u. a. to refrain, hold back, to curb, atvq, v. a. to esteem, have regard for. to disperse. ‘ gfi‘fl, v. a. to taste, enjoy. q§"q, v. a. to keep, hold; not to give much. germ, v. a. to spy, investigate, explore. qfic'q, prolong, v. a. to extend make fart-her;longer, to to protract, bring up, to 51;, v. n. to be intoxicated. Q’qw, v. a. to taste, enjoy. breed; to send, despatch. Mgs'q, v. a. to keep, hold, embrace. quz'q, v. a. to defend, take care of; to ob attiirq, v. a. to know, understand. ug'q, v. n. to rejoice, be glad. serve, keep. qg‘q'tl, v. a. to churn, agitate, curdle. qu'u, v. a. to send, commission, ablegate. qfi'q, v, a. to add together, collect, aggre atqq'u, v. a. to curse, to wish evil to. atqQ'rI, v. n. to be ; v. a. to have, to possess. gate. 'tlirl'u, v. a. to burn, to consume. ug'q, v. n. to go or repair to. 7-1591“, v. a. to feed, rear, keep. _ NSQ'LJ, v. n. to be, to be there. (131) ua‘svu, v. n. to spread, to be difl'used. gqq for ngrq, to seek, look for. Jig/Cw, v. a. to leap, jump. Q'II, v. a. to beg, request, entreat; ask. Ngs'q, v. a. to offer, to sacrifice; to worship. @311, 11. a. to twist, spin. Ngl'q, v. n. to slip or fall out of the hand. @611, v. a. to desire, wish, will. arrqfior Qélll'll, v. a. to lay, place, put down. NEQI'IX, v. a. to meet, visit, have. an interview. 8195111., v. a. to hear fully, to hear, hear (Ti/aw, v. a. to mount, ascend (carriage, &c.) ken to. H'II, v. a. to eat, take food; v. IIZQ'ZI. smart], v. n. to be even, level, equal. guru, v. a. to yelp, bark. 851w, v. a. to mollify, soften, rub gently. 5131;, v. a. to say, tell, speak. NEW“, 0. a. ditto. an or 5'11, v. a. to pass over, to double, to IGQI'II, v. n. to be weary, fatigued. repeat. Neva, v. n. to be merry, glad. ‘ 5811!, v. a. to return, make to go back. tilt-VII, v. n. to cdme. warn, v. n. to be freed or delivered. Eta/Cw, v. a. to see, view, look on. d'q'u, v. a. to bring. wa‘én'q, u. a. to confess, declare. 5131:, v.a. to put, lay down. 88mm], 11. a. to depress, humble, conquer, ers'q, v. a. to censure, accuse. out-d0; v. 3hr", v. ni'q'u. Qtut'u, v. n. to be out of one’s senses, to stqq'u, v. a. to put on his clothes, dress. fall down. atqat'u for 'pr'q, v. a. to smell, perceive by Qllfi'll, v. n. to stop or be stopped. the nose; to touch, feel. QIIQI'II, v. a. to spin. IMJL'II, v. n. to suffer, be afflicted with. QB‘U, v. a. to vie with, to hate. steam, v. n. to sleep. Q36“), 0. n. to groan. eta/'11, v. a. to think, or fancy. let'q, v. n. to shrink, contract. fist/Kyla v. n. to be content, or satisfied with. QBL'II, v. a. to carry, convey. Nay/R'II, v. n. to be conscious of one’s fault. QBQ'R, v. a. to subdue, subject. erg/arm, v. a. to show, represent, figurate. Qlaqvq, v. n. to be stopped or hindered. _ Néfi'q, v. a. to do, make, act, create, form. QliKN'KI, v. n. to be full, replete. 33's; or iq'g'éq'um. a. to measure, prove. Qp‘s’g'u, v. n. to sit down, settle. £1111, v. n. to be done, to be finished. Ql'R/WU, v. n. to be angry with one. girl], 0. n. to be content or satisfied with. Qfi’q'u, v. a. to encircle, compass. 31:11, 11. a. to feel, perceive, to hear. oil/1'11, v. n. to go round about, to wander. (132) QQIQI'IX, v. a. to play on a musical instru Qii’m'q, 0.1!. to boil, to be hot. ng'u, v. n. to freeze, be congealed. ment, mad-Pu, v. n. to err, wander, go astray. Qllfil'q, v. n. to stop, to cease. QtQL'II, v. n. to go astray, to err. QKIN'U, v. a. to taste, to try the taste of, to put Qéfiru, v. a. to bind, tie, fasten. into the mouth. ngl'q, v. n. to turn, go round about. QKIQJ'U, v. n. to secede, withdraw from. Qngl'Il, v. n. to be gathered together. QKIL'q,v. a. to transgress, violate. QQ'II, v. n. to run, to run away. QKW’LI, v. n. to open, be split or cleft. QQKI'LJ, v. n. to run, flee. QQKW'H, v. a. to draw doWn, to call, summon. QER'IJ, v. a. to embrace, comprise. Q5311, v. n. to decay, decline, be spent. QQJL'U, v. n. to be separated, divorced. QQN'LI, v. n. to die, perish. QIER'U, v. n. to be spread, or distributed. QQQl'H, v. n. to be agitated, to move, shake. qrérq, v. a. to carry, convey, take away. lesw'q, v. a. to hinder, prohibit, stop. Qii/G'II, v. a. to bring. QEIRN'LJ, v. a. to fill, replenish, make full. Q'EN‘Q, v. n. to be stirred, moved,~troubled. Qgifi'kl, v. a. to diffuse, spread, extend. QQIL'U, v. n. to miss, fail, to be giddy, QfiIIW'll, v. a. to cover, overspread. ngQl'q, v. n. to arrive, reach. Qilfl‘q, v. a. to kill, destroy. _ Qrs'q, v. n. to lean to, to depend on. Qilql'q, v. a. to load, put on a burden or load. Qll'tII'll, v. a. to strike, beat. QEW'LI, v. a. to split, cleave, divide. Q-IR'U, v. n. to be involved in, to wind. Qil/‘II, v. n. to be stained, sullied, inflicted Qfifil'q, v. n. to cohere, stick together. with. Qfis'q, r. a. to lead, conduct. QKYKI'Q, v. a. to hinder, stop. Qigqi‘tl, u. n. to be twisted together or Qil/‘G'II, v. a. to bewitch, enchant. QIEIIR'LJ, v. a. to build, frame, construe. round, qg'q, v. n. to wash one’s self, to bathe. le/N'Ll, v. n. to be accustomed to. Q5811], v. n. to be stirred, troubled. QETL'II, v. n. to tarry, loiter, linger. qgu'q, v. n. to be born, produced. Q5128"; v. n. to go astray. Qfaa'q, v, a. to wash, cleanse. QQEI'LI, v. n. to be sold, spent, expended. QBQJ'q, v, n. to err, be mistaken. QQR'II, v. n. to be a long time, or late, to be Qfgu'q, v. n. to be scattered. delayed. Qfgq'q, u. n. to long for, desire. Qéfi'tt, v. n. to stretch with yawning. (133) qg'q, v. n. to run, flee, vanish, disappear. Qil/R'q, v. a. to go on, over, to travel. Q‘QIQI'II, v. n. to be unfolded, untied. qgl'q, v. n. to become, be ; change, turn. Qé'q, u. n. to go asunder, to disperse. QJQKI'Q, v. n. to break, to walk; 1:. a. to full Q5311, v. a. to disperse, diffuse, scatter. cloth. Q501'q, v. n. to be turned upside down. Qét‘tt, v. a. to wear, put on ; keep, hold, Q5511, v. n. to repent, be grieved for. carry. Q‘iKl'LJ, v. n. to sound, he rumoured. qas'q, v. a. to explain, tell, instruct; 0.1:. QEJG'II, v. a. to number, count ; be filled, to be rent, torn, dissolved. - satisfied. Q6111], v. a. to conceal, hide. qqg'q, v. a. to extend wide. Qéfl‘q, v. n. to dance, jump. le'q, v. a. to vie, contend, strive with. Q&Q'q, v. a. to prepare, make. Q'EJN'Q, 0.11. to be scattered, difl'used, spread. qasr'q, v. n. to rise, go up. Qfifll'q, v. n. to congrue, agree, suit, be cofl Qaq'q, v. n. to fluctuate, be unsteady. herent. Qg'tl, v. n. to die, cease to live. Q‘i'ifl'q, v. n. to grow less, decrease; be of Qgfi'll, v. a. to bind, tie, fasten. fuscated. lei‘q, v. a. to mount, ascend. Qfili'q, v. n. to go, walk. QQ'H, v. a. to fetch or draw up water; to Qiiq'q, v. n. to roll, fall down. water, irrigate. Q91}, 0. n. to endeavour, strive. Qfifi'q, v. to yield, confess. qgrrq, v. n. to be ready, to be produced. QQN'LI, v. n. to shrink. QQN‘LI, v. n. to be broken, maimed. Q§'II, v. a. to promise, assure. QQQ'H, v. n. to go, walk, march, pace. Q5511“ v. a. to cleave, split, confess. Q'fi‘q, v. n. to be repeated; to roll about, or QiNN'lJ, v. a. to grind, to cut with the on the ground. teeth. Qis'q, v. n. to stand, stay erect. Q3911, v. a, to believe, give credit to. Qilw'qw. a. to sprinkle, scatter; expose to Qg'rt, v. a. to prepare, make ready. sale. le'q, v. n. to run away, escape. leql'fl, v. a. to unfold, explain. QZQI'II, v. a. to command, commit to, in Qif'q, v. n. to go, walk, march. trust. Qfilsw'q, v. n. to converse, associate with. QgN'U, v. a. to prepare, make ready. Qfi/GN'LI, v. n. to die, cease to live. QEKI'LJ, v. a. to establish, settle, fix. (134) OEU'LI, v. n. to creep in secretly. QaIIW'lJ, v. a. to take into one’s hand ; to QEQI'U, v. a. to weigh, ponder, pay. hold. Qfi‘Kl'll, v. n. to be destroyed, ruined, to perish; Qgfi'll, v. n. to go out, issue, be uttered. v. a. to destroy. Qaat'q, v. n. to doubt, hesitate, mistake, err. Qall'q, v. a. to scatter, diffuse, disperse ; v. QEII'LI, v. a. to put, place, lay, make, cause. qu'q, v. a. to subdue, make tame. Elfi’rq. Q5N'q,v. n. to shrink, be afraid of. QE‘X'TJ, v. a. to declare, confess, not to hide. in'q, v. a. to express, squeeze, milk. an'q, v. n. to become pure, clean; v. a. to an'q, v. a. to put, place, lay down; cut, lick. hew. QRN'LJ, v. a. to choose, select. Qfi’aw'u, v. a. to overcome, subdue, con QQQ'q, v. n. to go, pass away, to escape. quer. Qfil'tt, v. n. to tremble, quake, shudder. QRYQJ'II, v. to turn aside from the way. QQG'II, v. a. to spread on the ground. Qafi'll, v. n. to be fit, meet, convenient. Q5'II, v. n. to assemble, gather together. Qaq'q, v. to fight, quarrel, dispute. QS'FW'LI, v. to represent in the mind, be dawn, v. a. to embrace, include. conscious of. an'II, v. n. to pass away, go beyond. Qsfll'q, v. n. to be, exist, sit, be present. ' lel‘q, v. n. to drop, fall in drops. Qffi'q, v. n. to bow, incline, bow down. Qalt'q, v. a. to pervade, diffuse over. qu'q, v. a. to desire, wish; will. og'u, v. a. to gather, collect, pick up. Q'gq'u, v. n. to be fatigued, weary, tired. QQR'II, v. to drink. ant'q, v. n. to agree with, be in concord. ng'q, v. a. to cut into small pieces. Qsl'fl, v. n. to trot, to ride in a trot. QQH'LI, v. n. to cover, cast, spread over. ngl'tl, v. a. to tame, break, subdue, educate. QQQI'TJ, v. n. to spread wide; to smoke. qilqw'tt, v. a. to lift, raise, hold up, weigh. Qall'q, v. n. to depart, commence a journey. Qifi'fi, v. n. to go, resort, to proceed. Qém'q, v. a. to draw, make fast. Qifi'q, v. a. to follow, carry, convey, lead. Qaqw'q, v. a. to take, seize, hold fast on. Qfi'qw'q, v. a. to cast, throw, utter; found, Qaaw'q, v. a. to shut, comprise, cover, in establish. . Qfil'q, v. a. to say, repeat, answer to. clude. QH'QQNN‘KI, u. a to fret, vex. Qfi’mrq, v. a. to bind, tie, fasten ; v. KIRKIQ'RI. (la/51's], v. a. to pick, pluck up. Q‘YG'U, v. n. (v. QQG'H) to go, march, proceed. (135) Qilq'll, v. a. to wish, desire, long for ; will. Qfiqu, v. a. to shoot, throw, cast, ejaculate. stqu, v. a. to utter, eject, expel; v. n. to eat, QIEQJ'Q, v. n. to increase, multiply, augment. drink. QQII'II, v. n. to shift, change, turn ; migrate. qiu'q, v. n. to meet, come together, unite. QR‘I'II'Q, v. a. to strike, hurt, touch. Qfi’flw'q, v. a. to advise, counsel. QQIGN'Q, v. n. to be indigent, poor. QQIL'II, v. a. to cast off, reject, not to take. Qg'q, u. to rebuke, chide. QSQI'U, v. n. to be rent, unfolded. ng'u, v. a. to sweep, make clean. stu, v. a. to ask, make a question. QQG'U, u. n. to hang down. QQR'H, v. a. to deceive, impose on. QQQ'KJ, v. n. to go astray, be lost. lel'q for Qfiif'q, 11. a. to distribute, to give le'q, v. a. to display, exhibit, show; to each. Q§'II, v. n. to be blotted out ; v. a. to wipe ofl', Q‘E‘M'fi, v. a. to roll down, turn about, fall blot out. down. Q§§'q, v. a. to wipe, to blot out. Q§"q for Qg'q, v. a. to dig, make a hole; ng'u, v. n. to blunder, mistake, err. fret, vex. QgL'II, v. n. to rise up, be difl’used. ng'q, v. a. to rub, file. Qg'tt, v. n. to crawl, creep, go slowly. Q§Erq, u. a. to sew, stitch, join together. QQ/"q, u. n. to float, to swim on the surface Q§<21'q, v. n. to become putrid, rancid. of, &c. WITH, 11. n. to-mix, mingle, unite with. Q'Q'H, v. n. to kick, strike with the foot. Qil'l'q, v. a. to shave with a razor. QgKi'q, v. a. to envy. Q5611, v. a. to draw; bring, govern, invite. Q'g'q'u, v. a. to kick, strike with the foot. Qiq'q, v.12. to slide, glide, slip. QQQ'TJ, v. a. to separate, put asunder, divide QUII'H, v. n. to arise; lift up one’s self; 0. a. Qrfi'q, a. a. to subtract, diminish, lessen. to rear, to throw his rider (as a horse). Qfiq'q, v. u. to palpitate, flutter. warm, 0. a. to shoot out, ejaculate, throw. Qfidl'q, v. a. to let know, to send intelligence. QU'N‘KJ, v. n. to lose, be defeated. Q'gll'q, v. a. to scratch, rub. QUL'Q, v. n. to spring, rise, be promoted. ngw, v. n. to change, turn, (miraculously.) QEG'H, v. n. to be indigent, poor. - Qfi'rl, v. to lean, incline to. Q3511, v. a. to put 06', (as a garment, &c.) Q'Z'rl, v. to scatter, diffuse, be scattered. QEL'TI, v. n. to fly ; v. a. to cover, cast over. Q’Z‘l'll, v. a. to take by force, to rape. ng'tl, v. a. to repel, drive back. Qfifi'q, v. n. to be delivered, given, paid. (136) Qus'q, v. n. to be steeped, macerated. Qéfi'll, v. a. to open, divide, separate. Qlwq, v. a. to endeavour, make an effort. Qil'q, v. n. to disappear, vanish. Qél'q, v. a. to pour out, transfuse. Q‘q‘qu, v. n. to descend, fall, flow. Qélil'u, v. a. to lick, touch with the tongue. Q'qL'II, u. n. to burn, be inflamed. Qélfi'q, v. n. to be, or made ready. Q‘qQJ‘II, v. a. to pick, make rough, hairy. Qiiil‘v'q, v. a. to pierce, bore. Qi’fi'q, v. n. to come, arrive. QB'II, u. n. to open, bud, blow. le'q, \/ v. n. to come in,u arrive; o o. a. to find, QBKW'Q, v. a. to pierce, bore. get, be united with. QBRN'Q, v. a. to exercise, endeavour. QQIQI'IJ, v. n. to deflect, turn aside, deviate. QQR'U, v. a. to blow (the fire); to put off QHG'II, v. to bring, or be brought forth. (as a garment). QHR'LI, v. a. to rub, fret, scratch. QQA'KJ, v. n. to itch. QSII'Q, v. a. to snatch away. QQII'Q, v. n. to fall flat down. QEQI'II, 1). 71. to go asunder, separated QBTJN'II, v. a. to cover, vault, overarch. from. QBQI‘II, v. a. to offer, present, give. Qfi'tl, v. a. to write, express in characters, Q'EI'EW'II, v. a. to let down, shower, rain. or figures ; v. n. to grow less, decrease. Q15, '13, v. n. to be poured or shed out. Qfi'i'q, v. a. to make less, lessen, deceive. Qfi/B'W'll, v. a. to transfer to, confer on. Qé‘lt'q, v. a. to distribute, give, share. QI‘I/R'q, v. a. to call, name, invite, summon. Qg'q, v. to pick, dig, fret, vex. Qfi/L’It, v. a. to put, place, lay down. QQR'LI, v. a. to rub, fret, dig. QEQ'U, v. n. to be purified or clean. Q5111], v. a. to distribute, give, lend ; o. n. QQN'Q, v. n. to overflow, be of wide extent. to flow. QQL'II, v. n. to stick to, adhere; to infect. Q5 "q, u. a. to draw, stretch, spread out. Qi'q, v. n. to be wiped or blotted out. Qiiil‘ll, v. a. to shave with a razor; v. lel'q. Q‘ifi'q, v. n. to sink, drown, be immerged. QiC'II, v. to follow, go behind, imitate. Q§R'u, v. n. to pass away, he spent, to slide.v Qi‘ll'q, v. n. to be joined, or united with. Q§§'q, v. a. to draw, pull out; receive in Qfi/N'q, v. n. to run away, desert. to, &c. Qésl'll, v. a. to sift, strain, squeeze. lel'u, v. u. to hesmear, bedaub. Qifi'q, v. n. to be pure, whole, perfect. ng'tt, v. n. to come forth, be born, rise. Qé'q'q, v. a. to return, repay ; supply. Qi'q, v. n. to open, be divided, separated. Qérw'u, v. n. to fear, be afraid. (137) Qk'tl, v. n. to be finished, to grow, be grown Qéb'w'q, v. a. to fix, put, sit, plant, found, up. establish, build. ng'q, v. to do, know, require, desire, &c. Q§$'q, v. a. to put, place, lay; turn, convert Qiflrq, v. n. to be burnt, or burnt by fire. t0. Qil‘q, v. a. to press, squeeze, force out. Qéi-t'q, v. to wink, (close and open again the Qéllw'q, v. n. to be established, rooted. eyes,) to smile, to look gay. Qgg'u, u. n. to enter into, be contained in. le'rt, o. n. to turn or go aside from one’s Qéfl'q, v. to turn, whirl, (rapidly.) way, (not to meet.) Qg'q, v. a. to hurt, injure, do harm to. Qg-II'II, v. n. to Icreep in, to enter in an in qiq'u, v. a. to return, repay, give back. clined posture. QiR‘II, v. n. to advance, get up, improve. Qéll'q, v. to climb or ascend. Qifi'll, v. a. to boil, dress, dye, tinge, ripen. Qég'q, v. a. to hold, contain, receive. Qifl'll, v. a. to sew, stitch. Qéét'q, v. to blush, be ashamed for. Qii'q, v. n. to shine; to grieve for. QéL'q, v. n. to be hoarse; v. a. to speak, Qg'q, v. n. to live, to be alive ; v. a. to feed, utter. cherish, nourish ; boil, dress, dye, tinge. leq'q, v. a. to gather, heap together, (con ng'q, v. a. to cut, hew, engrave ; to prick, fusedly). pierce. {lg/it'll, v. n. to come together, associate, as QgIW'KI, v. n. to assemble, associate, flock, semble, meet. I Qélfi'g'QEIl'q, v. c. to make or cause to meet. come together. lei'fl, v. a. to sell. _ ngrq, v. n. to err, mistake. QSR'LI, v. a. to boil, dress victuals ; dye, QIQI'II, v. n. to be insipid or flat. tinge. 'i‘rq'q, v. n. to abscond, hide one’s self. Qiiq'q, v. to act as a deputy, to depute. 3111:, v. n. to slumber. I ngr'q, v. a. to seek, look for, search after. i'tt, v. n. to be worthy of so much, to Qéll‘q, v. n. to drop, fall in drops. cost, &c. QER'N, v. n. to be spent, lack, want. £8111, v. u. to know, understand. Qérq, v. n. to hang down. iKW'Ll, v. n. to be convenient, just. Ql‘i‘fi'q, v. to quarrel, fight. 5:1, 0. n. to be apt, fit, meet, convenient, Q2151! v. a. to take, seize, hold fast, keep. &c. (23111;, 0. n. to drop, fall in drops. 55's}, 0. a. to assault, fall on, attack. (138) QQI'IJ, v. n. to be rotten, putrid, rancid. fi'fl, v. a. to reap, to cut with a sickle. in, v. to hope. will, u. a. to reward, give a reward. ill'q, v. a. to touch, feel. isn't], v. to pant, long for, wish, desire. iG'I! or itw'q, v. n. to be stiff, hard. filt'll, v. to long for. IQ'II, v. n. to delight, or to take pleasure in, aaw'n for mww, idem. to amuse one’s self with. 3141!, v. to draw in, to breathe. “I'll, v. a. to long for, desire earnestly. 5911, v. n. to sweat. 3'11, v. a. to steal, thieve. £11 for \‘I'a’q'q, to be able, to may, to dare. ‘ *PII, v. a. to dig, carve, grave, cut. gym, 1:. a. to parch, burn slightly; to deceive. fic'q for grit, v. a. to stretch out. airs}, v. a. to chase, hunt, pursue; to deceive. 921?, v. to swim. 55's; or gg'u, v. n. to grow less, abate, decrease. I 5:11, v. a. to stretch out, distend, extend. irq, v. n. to become, grow old; IW'LJ, grown é'q, v. a. to barter, exchange; to change. ' old. i‘is'q, v. a. to honour, reverence. film'rt, v. a. to ford, to pass over without gym, 0. a. to say, utter, speak, tell. swimming. Qfi‘q, v. a. to cleanse, purge. 513'", v. n. to laugh, to be wild. Sq'q, v. n. to grow old, to be worn out. it'QI'II, v. to dispute, oppose. as'q, v. n. to fade, wither, pine away. 8511!, v. a. to cast, throw, beat. 3911, v. n. to break or fall down (as a rock). @1111, v. a. to throw, cast, beat. as'q, v. a. to find, get, obtain. #11, v. n. to triumph, to be victorious, to ism, v. n. to be stirred up, agitated, trou be emancipated, to arrive at final be bled. atitade. 5R1, v. a. to snare, ensnare, entrap. Q'It, v. n. to rise, mOVe, flow, proceed, go, 5811!, v. n. to be firm, steady, permanent, walk. lasting, never ceasing, durable. £8111, v. n. to run, flee. first, v. n. to he in a hurry. gswfl. a. to put into a string, series; to col tn'eq'u, idem. lect, to gather together. Balm). n. to be copious, abundant; fat, thick. in, v. a. to abuse a woman with violence. gq'q, v. a. to pull, break down. iq'q, v. a. to extend, widen, dilate. \‘qu, v. a. to keep, hold, support; 0. n. to g'q'q, v. a. to cast, throw, hurl. lean on, to depend on. ( 139 ) i’ll'q, v. a. to judge, examine, try, prove. QKI'U, v. a. to build, make a wall, construe. i'q'tr, v. a. to make to spring or gush forth, Q'tt, v. n. to play, sport, amuse one’s self, to squeeze out, to arrive at. game, frolick, trifle. (I: v. a. to clap, to strike together, to beat $8111, 1:. a. to raise one thing above another, on. to tuck, truss up. UL'II, v. a. to whet, to make sharp. §C'II, u. a. to tuck, truss up. tq'q, v. a. to spread, to extend wide. fiq'q, v. n. to play, sport, game; v. it'u. 2111;, v.11. to drop or fall down suddenly, gs'q, v. to dispute, debate, contest, fight, to break in, quarrel. fillt'q, v. a. to begin, make, compose, write. for-1'11, v. a. to beat, strike, hammer. le'q, v. a. to strike, beat, smite. é'q'q, v. to endeavour, make an effort. 2,1111, 0. a. to clap, strike together. é'q v. a. to press, force, squeeze, urge, op 2,1111, v. a. to whet, sharpen. press; v. qfi'q. i'q'q, v. a. to spring out, gush forth, to is 5'11, 11. a. to change or turn one’s self into, sue ; spring a leak, to have a hole. to transform. tg'u, u. a. to excite, incite, spur, stir up. it's! v. a. to tuck, truss up. first, 1). n. to roll, or fall down. 13% I! or EG'II, v. a. to make ready, to send, It'q, v. a. to wound; to ask. despatch. it"II, v. to dream. Qq‘q, v. a. to purge, carry off, produce. an fon'q, v. a. to bite, to wound with the teeth. \ abortion. 3131;, v. to snarl, wrangle, quarrel. gll'q, v. a. to overthrow, lay waste, destroy. a'li, v. n. to be defiled, stained with. gay", 0. n. to be wet, fresh, green. ig'q, v. a. to say, speak, ask ; to plough and (gal'fi‘v) 5TH, 1). a. to bless, to give his bene sow. diction to. iiq'q, v. a. to pick, cleanse (as wool). 51,3111, 0. n. to boast, be proud with. 1111;, v. a. to plough. QIKW'YJ, v. n. to be, to exist, to be found. i’g'q, v. a. idem. Q‘II, v. n. to cough, to get up phlegm. QR'IJ, v. n. to yawn, gape, stretch with yawn 1151;, u. n. to burst, to overflow suddenly. ing. guru, v. n. to remain, to be left. £11, 1). a. to count, reckon, number; to ac~ Slaw, v. a. to take, receive, seize, fetch. cept, admit, yield to. Q/ll'q, pret. of '1‘5’81'", v. n. to turn back, (140) qu'tt, for 61451:, to take, receive, seize. fc'q, v. n. to be or become blind. QI/G'II from ill-1'11, to be blind. Q/Q'q, v. a. to return, give or pay back. 61111111, 0. a. to learn ; v. gull. i'q'u, v. to perceive easily, to be witty. gq‘q or gnaw", to be dumb or mute. Iglw'q, v. n. to arrive at, resort, go, come to. 3'1: for Kié'q, v. a. to turn round, twist, 3:11, pret. of inn, 0. n. to fall down from. wreathe ; to turn as a screw. QT}, 12. a. to twist, wreathe, wind. gym, 0. a. idem ; v. syn. 3'11 (pret. of Q£"q, v. n. to die), to be dead. fit], 0. to perish, destroy one’s self. 5'1}, 0. a. to flay, strip, take off the skin ; to Q'KI'Q, v. a. to shake, quake, to be agitated ; to copy a book, &c. can, be able to do, may. QC'II, v. n. to breathe with a noise by the flint, v. to enter into, penetrate, affect. nostrils, to snore. ‘g'tl, v. a. to look, behold, view, see. gg'u, v. a. to rub together, to fret. @1111, v. a. to fold up, to plait. fi'q'q, v. n. to whisper. 'gw'q for qrgat'q, to be full, to be born. fifl'q, v. n. to weep, lament. 'gt'q, v. n. to fall, to sin. QL'II, v. a. to hurt, burn slightly, cut. 158111, 1:. a. to lick, touch with the tongue. £16111, 1). a. to know, understand. qc'q, v. to get of, to be given of ; to rise up, A/R'II, v. n. to have room, to be received into stand up, arise, to be difl'used. (a vessel); &c. to shite, to go to stool. 'EYLI, v. a. to chew, cut with the teeth. Ham], v. a. to prepare, make ready. ‘EWLJ, v. a. to have, possess; to be (to one). X1311, v. a. to chase, hunt. 'g‘q'q, v. a. to repeat, reiterate. aqg'q, v. a. to prove, try, tempt, to awake. 1511:, v. n. to be faint, weary, languid. £18111, v. a. to retake, move or lift up a little. QC'II, v. n. to soar, fly aloft, float. w'q, 0 v. a. to soak, imbibe. 'QL'II, v. to be puffed up, to make a noise. wat'q, a v. n. to be refreshed, recreated, satisfi ESTA], v. a. to pour 'into; v. gqu. ed with. gym, 0. a. to make or cause to drink (cattle). 3511,11. n. to cough or breathe with diffi 'g'rl, v. n. to bask ; sit near the fire. culty. Qq'u, v. n. to quake, tremble. fiq'q, v. a. to pick, cleanse. QN'LI, v. n. to shake, quake. ‘ fiat'q or Runway, 11. to think, mind, meditate. Ig'q'u, v. n. to return, go back, to be turned &QJ'IJ, v. a. to cleanse, make clean, mend, upside down, to be overset. repair, correct, improve, relieve, cure, ( ] 41) heal, remedy; disclose, discover; v. gfi‘fl, v. a. to put under the ground, to hide, RWQI'U. bury, to put into a hole. $118111, 0. a. to gather together, collect, hoard gs'q, v. a. to smear, bedaub. up. 3pm, 0. a. to contract, shrink up. iii/WU, v. n. to go, depart, pass away; pret. 31:11, 0. a. to send, despatch ; bestow, give. and imperat. of Qal'll. game, v. a. to exhort, incite, bid. Iii/WAY, v. a. to try, prove, tempt; V. NR'KI. 5181!, v. a. to make dry, lean, meagre. £1161! for tit/Fri, to go, come, arrive at a place. lit/"q, u. a. to elect, choose. III/Wt! for Rial/Q's], to be alive. Q'G'II, v. a. to fulfil, accomplish. fic'q for fitrq, v. a. to send, despatch, order, Q/Q'q, v. a. to put on (as clothes). commission. sit/awn, v. n. to thirst, be thirsty. QR'II, u. a. to lengthen, make longer. Q3311, v. a. to turn round, encircle, surround, gG'II, v. a. to keep, observe, defend, preserve, enclose. watch, spy. tit/mm, v. a. to boil, make boil; seeth. gq'q, v. a. to stir up, agitate, move. yq'q, v. a. to spend, lay out, expend. gem, v. a. to make rotten. fi'q, v. a. to borrow, ask a loan, take on credit. £11,1-. a. to add (as in arithmetic); v. 'qs‘rrx. 5811!, v. n. to vex. @8111, v. a. to burn. fiqrq, u. a. to bend, cross, or put in the form fil'q, v. a. to warm, heat moderately. of a cross. gen, 11. a to make right, straight, equal, keep gq'q, u. a. to vomit, to cast up from the sto in equilibrio, equiponderate, balance. mach. gm, 1). a. to deceive, impose on. gf-Z'U, v. a. to leave off, put aside, renounce, i'q, v. a. to twist, wind, writhe. forsake, relinquish, to leave behind. fitrq, v. n. to arrive. gs'q, v. a. to forget. £8.11, 11. a. to change, turn, convert ; to turn gr‘q, v. a. to leave off, cast away, relinquish. the outside inward. 8'11, 11. n. to be born, to be produced, to come fi'q'q, v. a. to raise up, erect, gather, amass, forth. askv aims. gq'tl, v. to be ashamed of. fi'q'u, v. a. to protrude, force out. @511, v. a. to produce, generate, form, make, s‘j/trq, v. a. to teach, instruct; learn. cause, breed, rear up, beget, procreate. QL'II, v. a. to separate, fold -up. gall, v. to make haste, to strive, to endeavour. (142) £811, v. n. to be thirsty. {1.11, v. a. to thicken, coagulate, form clots. QQIWJ, v. a. to carry, convey; conduct, accom £6.11, v. n. to stretch with gaping and yawn pany, lead ; bring ; send. ing. in, v. n. to grieve, be sorrowful, mournful. fiqrq, v. a. to overset, overthrow, subvert, i/G‘tt, v. a.- to defend, guard, protect, keep overturn. QIR'II, v. n. to be hidden or secret. safe. ig'u, v. n. to move, go, walk ; v. a. to move, HG'II, v. a. to enumerate, reckon ; v. 'qzq'rt. agitate, shake. £8111, v. a. to adjust, compose, make agree, iii'q, v. a. to put, place, lay on. put together. gum, v. a. to protect, defend, keep safe. Q‘q'q, v. a. to ofl'uscate, shadow, darken. gat'u, v. a. to stir up, move, shake, agitate. 831'“, v. a. to hold fast, twist together; to 51311, 0. a. to repeat, add to; keep or hold up. endeavour, make an effort. gBl'q, v. n. to fear, dread, be afraid of. QQ'II, v. a. to roll, wrap, wind up, twist. 31:11, v. n. to swell, to be swollen; to pufl' up. Q’G'Il, v. a. to mix, feign, relate falsely. HIK'LI, v. a. to beat the ground with one’s glru, v. a. to liken, compare, estimate ; to feet. emulate, vie, contend with. fi'q, v. a. to lead, conduct; v. Qfiq'q r qfi'tr 1111;, v. a. to prepare, make ready ; render gs'q, v. a. to eject, expel, drivc out. propitious; to acquire, learn, obtain, get. gq'q, v. n. to be filled or replete ; to be ful firm, 0. to belch, to eject wind from the filled. stomach. flu'q, v. a. to. spread over, to cover with. fiq'q, v. a. to raise, erect, lift up. Elm, v. to wait for. $411, 1:. to argue, reason, consider; to debate, EQ'II, v. a. to move, agitate, shake. discuss, take measures for; v. qfif'q. fill'q, v. n. to puff, boast, brag. fillq'q, v. a. to proclaim, publish, preach. i’wq, v. a. to bid, order, proclaim, publish. gg'q, v. to go on or over. i'wuw. a. to make swear, to put on oath. fiq'q, v. a. to embellish, decorate. i’tz'q, v. a. to make round or globular, to fi/q'q, v. a. to untie, loosen, deliver, save. conglomerate. 3131;, v. n. to snort, make a noise, &c. il'q, v. to grow green ; v. a. to bless. i'fl'q, v. to be accustomed to, to be exercis ed in ; to represent in the mind, to awn, v. a. to tell, report, relate, say; accuse, think on; to fancy, imagine. charge with. (143) $8111, a. to think, suppose. gi’g'q, v. a. to magnify, extol, exalt, praise. 'EKW'LI, v. n. to be degenerated, grown worse. girl], 11. a. to show, instruct, teach. gl'q'lt, v. a. to give into one’s hand, to give, 'l‘i‘Ql'II, v. a. to break down, destroy. 3511!, v. a. to dip, immerge, moisten. deliver. fill'q, v. n. to go astray, to be mingled among. 3TH, v. a. to make fewer, or less, to reduce. 361:, v. n. to be debilitated, sick ; v. a. to QC'H, v. n. to abhor, dislike, be angry. disease, afflict. 381V“, v. a. to menace, threaten with. Qua, v. n. to lean on, to rest against. gs'q, v. a. to collect, gather, amass. 56111, 0. to make haste, to strive, endeavour. gflt'u, v. a. to make agree, pacify, reconcile. QRN'LJ, v. n. to fear, dread, be afraid of. irq'u, v. a. to mingle, mix; exchange, barter. @511, v. n. to approach; 1). a. to gain, pro s11, v. to hazard, expose to chance or danger. cure. gall, v. to sit, tarry, wait for, attend. iat'q, v. n. to boast, brag, be proud of. iI/N'll, v. a. to bind, restrain ; oblige one’s Q's'q, v. a. to feed, to give to eat and drink ; self; to vow, promise. to tell. XG'II, v. n. to be light, to be evident, mani fest; to seem, appear. I i/‘II'LI, v. a. to lift up, stretch out ; v. n. to reach to. $11, 0. a. to hurt, wound, injure, to do harm i’at'q, v. a. to make equal, level. to. Q'Qi'rt, v. a. to lay, place, put flat down. gat'q, u. a. to take, receive ; put on. g‘q'q, v. n. to hurry, to be in confusion. Earn, 0. a. to prick, goad, pierce; to suckle. grit, v. a. to put in order or series. grim, v. a. to abolish, destroy. $11, 11. n. to rest, refresh one’s self. 3811, v. a. to smell, perceive by the nose. &‘C'II, v. a. to rebuke, chide, upbraid. 3131;, v. a. to make less; bring nearer, an gat'q, v. a. to infect, pervade, penetrate. ticipate. gc'q, v. a. to shorten, abbreviate, make short. “341:, v. a. to make small pieces of, to dimi gown, v. a. to iterate, repeat; to put together. nish. gait, v. a. to make agree, reconcile ; confer. err/Witt, u. a. to augment, increase, add more to. @1511, v. a to keep, hold; to keep in pay. gat'q, u. a. to smell, perceive by the nose; QL'H, v. a. to give, bestow, grant, allow, per to take, receive, put on. mit. i/L'II, v. a. to confound, mix, mingle, dis v gc'qw‘h'q, v. n. to be empty. turb, to mistake. (144) "g/Qi'n, v. a. to comprise, include, embrace. fiq'q, v. a. to give intelligence, make acquaint awn, v. a. to carry, or bring by turns. ed with ; inform; send orders. gq'q, v. a. to leave off, renounce, quit, aban $8111, v. a. to shake off, cleanse ; rub, scrub. don, cast away. 30.11;, 1:. a. to change or turn (miraculously). urn, v. a. to exalt, promote, raise. 51!, v. a. to like, wish, will, be pleased with; gc'q, v. a. to heap up together. to scatter, diffuse. gqq, v. a. to adorn, embellish ; put on. 531;, v. a. to compose, put together. gq'q, v.a. to turn upside down; to place 3'11, v. a. to hide, conceal, keep secret. with the face or mouth downwards. 3‘11], 0. a. to dirty, foul, soil, stain. grit, v. a. to make fly; to excite, to egg on. flq'q, v. a. to macerate, steep in water. fiQP‘q, v. a. to augment, increase. 381"“, v. a. to gather, collect, put together. fil'q, v. a. to change, shift, alter. HL'II, v. a. to kindle, inflame, light. fi'q'q, v. a. to carry or bring forwards by 5511, v. a. to hide, conceal, cover, keep se turns. cret. fi’t-R'II, v. a. to leave off, cast away. Ql'q, v. to puff, swell up. EL'II, v. a. to raise, promote, advance. fi/Kl'q, v. a. to make dirty, foul. “'11, v. a. to let down, to hang down. fi’u'q, v. a. to steep, maceratc. 851;, v. a. to use, enjoy ; practise, do. Q’IJII, v. a. to kindle, light, inflame. 8:1, 11. a. to make sink, to submerge. gilt, v. a. to take away a part, subtract; gown, v. a. to expel, banish. cleanse, purify, exercise. g'q, v. a. to mock, ridicule, chide ; rail on ; gl'q v. a. to compose, join, put together, blame, censure. write; mix, mingle; dress, prepare, 551;, v, a. to use, enjoy; practise, do, per £1511, v. a. to give alms, to give, bestow, con form. fer on. girl}, 0. n. to come, arrive. all-1'11, v. a. to diminish, subtract; kleanse; g'at'q, v. a. to show, to expose to view ; to exercise. boast, brag. gl'q, v. a. to join, put together. 5'11, 0. a. to adorn, decorate, embellish, gq'q, v. a. to bespot, besprinkle; summon, grin, v. to mendicate, beg, ask alms, call for aid. 531:, v. a. to give into one’s hand, to deli-l QR'LI, v. n. to sneeze; to be numb, or be ver; compose; meet. 1 numbed. (145) 3'2: or 3511, v. a. to knead, work dough with 3Y1}, v. a. to mention, tell, say. the fist. £11, v. a. to blame, &c. ; v. as'q. ifi'q, v. to play on, or sound a musical in £311, 1;. a, to desire, wish, will, long for. strument. gar-1'11, v. n. to fast, to take no fopd. ‘EQI'II, v. a. to join or put together. gol‘n, v. a. to hasten, make haste. {8,11, 0. a. to call on for aid, to summon ; to 35-41;, v. n. to be mad, distracted. bespot, besprinkle. {11, v. a. to speak, say. 3511, v. a. to blame, chide, abuse, curse ; gem also £9111, v. a. to give, grant ; order. contemn, disdain, scorn ; to bend down, wif'q, (v. KYTL) v. a. to understand, perceive. depress. (thaw, v. to look to, to twinkle. fiq'q'viiq'u, v. n. to be ripe or mature. gq'gq'fig'q, to look hither and thither. END or THE GRAMMAR. qs'fi'v l APPENDIX. 4"— I. TIBETAN MODES OF RECKONING TIME. §. 227. The Tibetans, having derived their astronomical and astrological knowledge both from lndian and from Chinese sources, as also from other parts of the eastern world, have thence become possessed. of several distinct modes of reckoning and measuring time. The system of astronomy and chronology formed on the Indian principle is called “ Kar-gis" (qu'iliv or all'ilu, d,kar-rtsis or skar-rtsis) ; astrological calculations (especi ally the black-art), and the mode of reckoning years, in the Chinese manner, are denomi nated by the Tibetans “ Nair-gis” (qu'é’N, nng-rtsis). Of both these are an abundance of works in Tibet, expounding the particulars of the various systems. § 22. . The most common mode of reckoning time among the people at large, especially in calculating the years of the present generation, or in estimating the age of indivi. duals, is that by the cycle of 12 years, in which each year is denominated from a certain animal, in the following order. Cvcu; or 12 Ynaas. Tibetan. English. Tibetan. English. 1 byi-lo, the mouse-year. 7 W81], rta-lo, the horse-year. 2 31:61,, glang-lo, the ox-year. 8 luglo, the sheep-year. 3 viral], stag-lo, the tiger-year. 9 spré-lo, the ape-year. 4 yos-Io, the hare-year. 10 Q'QY, byu-lo, the bird-year. 5 Q3816]; hbrug-lo, the dragon-year. ll k/zyi-lo, the dog-year. 6 sbrul-lo, the serpent-year. l2 WIPQY, phog-lo, the hog-year. (_l48) But in books, epistolary correspondence, and in every transaction of importance, the Tibetans make use, generally, of the cycle of60 years. This is of two kinds. The one in the Indian, and the other in the Chinese, manner. We will give them both here below. § 229. The years of the Indian Cycle of 60 years, as they are reckoned south of the Nermada river in India, (See Col. Warren's Chron. Tab. XXI.,) exactly coincide with the Tibetan era, with the exception only that the Tibetans have translated literally the San scrit names into their own language, and that they count the beginning of the first cycle from a more recent epoch than that stated by Col. Wa1'ren to be in use among the Hindus. The present year, 1834, (called Jaya, in Sanscrit; in Tibetan rGyel-va, QQITI, meaning Vic tory or Victorious,) is, both in South India and Tibet the 28th year of the cycle. In Tibet, it is the 28th year of the XIV. cycle, reckoning the beginning of the first cycle from the year 1026 of the Christian Era; but the Indians date the commencement of the first cycle from an anterior epoch, sometimes from the Kaliyuga, and sometimes from the reign of Sulivélzana. § 230. In order to preserve a correspondence between the years of the Chinese cycle and that of India, the Tibetans give the designation of first to the fourth year of the Chinese cycle ; probably that cycle was in general use when they adopted the calendar and com putations of India. The Tibetans, like the Chinese, divide the year into lunar months, calling them thus : the first, second, third month, &c. &c. And during the period of one Lunar Cycle (of 19 solar years), they insert seven intercalary months, generally one every third year, to make them agree with the solar years :-in fact, their calculations exactly correspond with the luni-solar system of the Hindus, which is fully explained in Col. Warren’s work above alluded to. § 231. The Chinese cycle of sixty years, differs from the Indian, in the mode of naming the years: the latter has a distinct name for each year of the series: the former is made up by combining the names of the five elements, (made ten by afiixing the male and female termination), in a regular series, with the names of the zodiaeal animals of the cycle of 12 years; the series of 10 is repeated six-times, while that of 12 is repeated only five times in the 60 years, which causes a different combination for every year of the cycle. (149) The names of the five elements, repeated with the masculine and feminine aflix, in Chinese, as written in Tibetan, with their translation in Tibetan also and English, are as fOIIOWS: The 10 Elements. Chinese. Tibetan. English. 1 Kya or Q a]: (It‘ll) or sizing pho, Wood, 121. 2 Yi or at (51/) or sizing mo, Wood,f. 3 Ping or 13; it (57) or mé pho, Fire, m. 4 Ting or fit; it (121/) 0r mé 1110, Fire, f. 5 Vou or <54 N (121:) 01' so p/w, Earth, m. 6 Kyi or é‘ N (at) or w 1110, Earth, f, 7 King or fit; Igsw (121/) or lchags pita, Iron, m. 8 Zin or 58; any (it) or lchags mo, Iron, f, 9 Zlu'n or 5% Q (if) or 0M" 11/10, Water, m. 10 Ku/n' or 56 g (a?) or chhu mo, Water, f, The names of the l2 animals or signs of the zodiac, as written in the Tibetan character, are__ Chinese. Tibetan. English. 1 Tsi or .3, §, or byi Mouse. 2 Tsln'hu or $2,, Ell-2', 0r glang Ox, 3 Yin or via, ea, or stag Tiger. 4 Malta or at , if“! or gas Hare. 5 Shin (tchin 5’) or it‘s, Qgil, or librug Dragon. 6 Zi or 2?, 3‘2], 0r sbrul Serpent. 7 Hu (u) or 3, 3, 0r rla Horse. 8 Wuln' or £51, 01‘ lug Sheep. 9 Sizing or 3W, {1 or spré Ape, 10 114/124 or '53, E, or bya Bird. 11 Zuhi or 36, is, or kin/i Dog, 12 Huhi 0r W3, 145], I or phag H0g_ It should be remarked, that the animals of the cycle of 12 years are to be taken alter . v a v V v v nately, male and female, thus: 14'9, N'QJC, U'g'll, N'QIN, &c. &c. to accord with the genders of the elements. After the five (or ten) elements are frequently introduced, also, the parti cles 14 V (male), and ill/(female), thus : filli'aij'é‘, drama, \/ N‘TZI'yll, \ ' it‘ll/WEN, \ &c. but they may be omitted at pleasure, without any danger of obscurity arising therefrom; since the names of the 12 animals are always coupled with different elements throughout the series. (I50) §. 232. Sanscrit and Tibetan names of the years in the CYCLE or Six-rir YEARS, as they are reckoned south of the river Nermada, in India, and in Tibet, expressed in Roman charac ter. They accord with the Tibetan version of the two first columns in the succeeding table. Sanscrit. Tibetan. Sanscrit. Tibetan. l Prabhava, Rab-byung. 33 Vicari, sG yur-byed. 2 Vibhava, rNam-hbyun g. 34 Sarvapati, Kun-ldan. 3 Shukla, dKar-po. 35 Plava, (or Siva), hPhar-va. 4 Pramodi, Rab-myos. 36 Shubliakrit, (lGé-byed, 5 Prajapati, sKyes-bdag. 37 Shobhana, mDses-byed. 6 Angira, Angira. 38 Klirodhi, Khromo. 7 Sriinuklia, dPal-gdong. 39 Vishwabandhii ’ .s-Na-tshogs-dvyig. 8 Bhava, dNos-po. (or Viswz'wasu,) } 9 Yuvika, Na-tshod-ldan. 40 Pariibhava, Zil-gnon. 10 Dhritu, or (Dhatii,) hDsin-byed. 41 Pravanga, sPr€'hu. ll lswara, dVang-phyug. or Plavanga, } l2 Bahudanya, hBru-mang-po. 42 Kilaka, Phu r-bu. 13 Praméthi, Myos-ldan. 43 Saumya, Zhi-va. 14 Vikrama, rNam-gnon. 44 S§,dli5rana, Thun-mong. 15 Vris’habha, Kliyii-mchhog. 45 Virodhakrit, hGal-byed. l6 Chitra, sNa-tshogs. 46 Paridhari, Yongs-hdsiii. 17 Bbénu, Nyi-ma. 47 Pramédi, Bag-ined. 18 Bhanutiira, Nyi-sgrol-byed. 48 A'nanda, Kim-dGah. 19 Pirthapa, Sa-skyong_ 49 Rfikskasa, Srin-bii. 20 Aks’haya, Mi-zad. 50 Aiiala, Mé. 2] Sarvajit, Thams-chad-hdul. 5] Pingala, dMar-ser-chan. 22 Sarvadhéri, Kun-hdsin. 52 Kélarlfiti, 23 Virodhi, hGal-va. (or Kélayukta,) }Dus-kyi PM-"ya. 24 Vikrita, rNani-hgyur. 53 Siddliarthi, Don-grub, 25 Kliara, Bong-bu. 54 Rudra, Drag- po. 26 Nanda, dGah-va. 55 Diirmati, bLo-iian. 27 Vijaya, 1-Nani-rgyal. 56 Dundublii, rlzla-chhen. 28 Jaya, rGyal-va. 57 Rudhirura, 29 Mada (or Manmatha) Myos-byed. (or Rudii'odgari,) }Khrag-skyug' 30 Durmuklia, gDong-ii an. 58 Raktakshi, Mig.dn]3r_ 3| Hémalambhi, gSer-hphyang. 59 Krodhana, Khro-vo. 32 Vilambhi, rNam-hphyang, 60 Ks’haya, or Ks’hayaka,Zad-pa. 30-v 35;“ -. A W‘ (152) CYCLE OF SIXTY YEARS, Continued. In Sanscrit and Tibetan. In Chinese and Tibetan. 31 i'a'ig“ nfix'qss' fis'irg s-g 32 ta"ng $326 mi 33 my. grass as? was; 34 will; gags it? 'glqw'é‘ 35 2”“ QM": $333 abw'aw 36 £251 “is; devils 33".!“ 37 Rigs aréw'és 55 avg a. 18’s: 38 vii/g“. r3457 s'iiq ec'qgn 39 13*2‘5150'2 a'iaw'sé‘n Iii-z“; sag <21 40 qggq fim'KIS/s 15ing in. 41 min fig fis'g “ a‘rizi, 5] 4243 figsgm,“ (3's1521.3 é"gag. ‘3 are v.5 44 M5115 gait: 13:33 saw (5 45 iii’gfiq am, 9‘5 awed sewers: 46 qigi‘ 'z‘r'qugs (36% 3% 47 sag? swim 55' “g g'as' 48 was s 11¢qu en‘s fis'gn 59 gigs: fis'g ‘3' g fis'ifiv 50 was it iiwhs it'an 51 iic'KrQi sarfirza fire-2i irgQI 52 east? své'rz's 33 vs 53 £1ng {q'gq é‘vgg “ age 54 55's serif “we: anvfi 55 351% first 'éis'irg save 56 ss'sfi was a. 36 a, 6 57 $51 saga sé'wi gum 58 ln'z-Q“ iifirswl I e; 3“ fisfi 59 if? lil'flv I ‘3' “g fis'mu' 60 arm as'qr ris'v‘is Srss (153) § 234. Names of the years of the CYCLE or sixr! mans, according to the Chinese reckoning, in Roman characters, and bearing reference to the two last columns of the pie ceding catalogue. Chinese. Tibetan. English. l Kya tsi, Shing byi, Wood- mouse. 2 Yi tshihu, Shing glang, Wood-ox. CD Ping yin, Mé stag, Fire-tiger. 4 Ting mahu, Mé yos, F ire-hare. Vou shin, (or tchin P) Sa hbrug, Earth-dragon. €O®\IO>9‘ Kyi zi, Sa sbrul, Earth-serpent. King hu, lchags rta, lron- horse. Zin wuhi, lchags lug, Iron-shee p. Zhin shing, Chhu spré, Water-ape. 10 Kuhi yéhu, Chhu bya, Water-bird. ll Kya zuhi, Shing khyi, Wood-dog. 12 Yi hahi, Shing phag, Wood-hog. l3 Ping tsi, Mé byi, Fire-mouse. 14 Ting tshihu, Mé glang, Fire-ox. 15 You yin, Sa stag, Earth-tiger. 16 Kyi mahu, Sa yos, Earth-hare, 17 King shin, lchags hbrug, Iron-dragon. 18 Zin zi, lchags sbrul, Iron-serpent. 19 Zhin hu, Chhu rta, Water-horse. 20 Kuhi wuhi, Chhu lug, Water-sheep. 21 Kya shing, Shing spré, Wood-ape. 22 Yi yéhu, Shing bya, Wood-bird. 23 Ping zuhi, Mé khyi, Fire-dog. 24 Ting hahi, Mé phag, Fire-hog. 8588383 Vou tsi, Sa byi, Earth-mouse. Kyi tshihu, Sa glang, Earth-ox. King yin, lchags stag, Iron-tiger. Zin mahu, lchags yos, Iron-hare. Zhin shin, Chhu hbrug, Water-dragon. Kuhi zi, Chhu sbrul, Water-serpent. ( 154 ) Chinese. Tibetan. English. 3| Kya hu, Shing rta, Wood-horse. 32 Yi wuhi, Shing lug, Wood-shee p. as Ping shing, Mé spré, Fire-ape. 34 Ting yéhu, Mé bya, Fire-bird. 35 Vou zuhi, Sa khyi, Earth-dog. 36 Kyi hahi, Sa phag, Earth-hog. 37 King-tsi, lchags byi, Iron-mouse. as Zin tshihu, lchags glang, Iron-ox. 39 Zhin yin, Chhu stag, Water-tiger. 40 Kuhi tnahu, Chhu yos, Water-hare. 41 Kya shin, Shing hbrug, Wood-dragon. 42 Yi zi, Shing sbrul, Wood-serpent. 43 Ping hu, Mé rta, Fire-horse. 44 Ting wuhi, Mé lug, Fire-sheep. 45 Vou shing, Sa spré, Earth-ape. 46 Kyi yéhu, Sa bya, Earth-bird. 47 King zuhi, lchags khyi, Iron-dog. 48 Zin hahi, lchags phag, Iron-hog. 49 Zhin tsi, Chhu byi, Water-mouse. 50 Kuhi tshihu, Chhu glang, W ater-ox. 51 Kya yin, Shing stag, Wood-tiger. 52 Yi mahu, Shing yos, Wood-hare. 53 Ping shin, Mé hbrug, Fire-d ragon. 54 Ting zi, Mé sbrul, Fire-serpent. 55 Vou hu, Sa rta, Earth-horse. 56 Kyi wuhi, Sa lug, Earth-sheep. 57 King shing, lchags spré, Iron-ape. 58 Zin yéhu, lchags bya, Iron-bird. 59 Zhin zuhi, Chhu khyi, Water-dog. Kuhi hahi, 60 Chhu phag, Water-hog. (155) § 235. TIBETAN Svmaoucar. Wonns USED as NUMERALS. There are great many works on astronomy and astrology in Tibet, exclusive of the treatises on these subjects introduced into the Kala-gyur or Stan-gyar collections. Of these the most celebrated is the Bei’dt'u‘_1/a Kérpo, written by s,Dé-srid Sangs-r,g_yas r,Gya-m,ts’ho (§'§'=,' %1qw'§N'$‘itg,) a regent or viceroy at Lhassa, in the last half of the seventeenth century of our asra. In this and indeed in all works of science, symbolical names (5RN'Hi grangs brda, numerical signs), are used instead of numerals, for arithmetical and astronomical calculations. As for instance: + Q18], for -|- 2 ; 5:. for 3; x §,, for x 4; ___'_ £1/, for _;..32. This mode of expressing numbers in evidently an exact imitation of the Indian system. For some of the numerals there are several synonymous terms, as is also the case in San skrit, but it is sufiicient to allude in this place to those which are of constant and general occurrence. Although the nine units, together with the zero (0), would have been suflicient to express any sum whatever, yet for a few of the higher numbers corresponding symbols have also been supplied; they are: 10, ll, 12, I3, 14, 15, 16, 18, 24, 25, 27, and 32. When dictating to an assistant in symbolical names what to write in figures, the com pwter commences the operation from right to left: thus if he says §'8{ (I2), I~fl'lQ (0), Hg (4), the other writes 4012, &c. This method is the same with that followed in the Shéstras of lndia, therefore it is unnecessary to add any thing further on the subject. The rationale of the adaptation of these numerical symbols will be obvious in most cases; thus the body, the moon, and their synonymes express unity from their singleness: the hand, the eye, wings, twins, &c. denote a double object, or 2; &c. many others, as an arrow, for5; Rishi, for 7 &c. are derived from the mythology of the Hindus. The following is a list of these expressions, with their signification in English, to which the corresponding Sanskrit terms have been added (with a few exceptions). 7 or 1. El3l'~'lN*, gzugs, body; S. shariram. 3, zla, the moon ; S. chandra. 6/§'qR|;L, Izod-dkur, white brightness, the moon ; S. shwéta-rochis. 1::€J'{.,, bse-ru, rhinoceros; S. gandaka. \/ \ " Note. The articles, (U, U, '51, W, N/, Pa, pa, va, uo, ma, mo, &c.) have been omitted after the roots, since the words occur mostly in this form. (156) a or 2, QIEI, lag, the hand ; S. bhqja, hasta, or pani. J?!-‘|, mig, the eye ; S. nétra, clzakskus. 3G'§K|1v, zung-phyogs, or simply QR, zmzg, the two sides, wings. halves, a pair, couple ; S. chhada, paksh6, &c. Q|§81 bkhrig, or 1115?, bgrod, the twins ; copulation. 3 or 3. Q‘|%51'7l6, /jig-rtan, the world ; S. loka. rzY1!|'1'-,8’, yon-tan, quality ; S. guna. 5;, mé, fire; S. agni or anala. §, rtsé, top, summit ; S. agram. Q, or 4. fig, (also EH5) mtsho, a sea or lake; S. samud-ra. -5, chhu, water ; S. jala or wari. ma, rkang, a foot; S. pdda. i1=1'§=, Rig-byed, a Véda ; S. Véda. Ll or 5. Qgrz, hbyung, an element; S. bhutam. ffqt, dvang, an organ of sense ; S. indrag/am. BJRQ, mdah, an arrow: S. bdna or véna. gt, plumg, aggregate of the elements constituting the body and soul; S. skdnd/za. 4-» or 6. NQNW, mtshams, the six cardinal points: the north, east, south, west, zenith, and nadir. 1_'Q'1:I, \/ \/ 1-o,bro-va, taste, savour; S. rasa. 3&1, dus, time, season ; S. samaya. 'u or 7. §‘|5l'l!, Thub-pa, a sage; S. Mum’. 5R'§\{/C, Drang-srong, an hermit; S. Rislzi. i, ri, a hill or mountain; S. parvata. ' iN'K|EIQ, Res-gzah, a special or chief planet; S. Gralza. J. or 8. §, lrlu, an hydra or snake; S. miga. HQ}, sbrul, serpent ; S. sarpa. ll§€N'-6%, gdengs-chan, a hooded-snake ; S.? Q/'Q§1/, lto-hgro, creeping on its belly ; S. uraga. 3'1. nor or 671.1, nor-lha, wealth, or the eight gods of wealth: S. Vasu or vasudéva. @311, sred-pa, affection, passion ; S. Tn'sn'6. (157) a or 9. 3, rise, root (or vein) ; S. mula. Rlfil, gter, treasure ; S. kosham. 812m, gzah, a planet ; S. graha. 15°11, bu-ga, a hole; S. chiddra. Srin-po, an imp or goblin ; S. Rékshasa. 7*» or 10. 5,81%], phyogS, corner, quarter, point; S. Dik or Dish. The ten points, (4 cardinal, 4 intermediate, the zenith and the nadir.) 79 or 11 Qfi'qifi, h,phmg-byed, that takes by force ; S. Hari for Siva. SKI'LY, Drag-p0, the brave or fierce; S. Rudra, for Siva. qi'qgc, Bde-hbyung, the source of happiness ; S. Shambu, a name of Siva. sqqgrl, Dvang-phyug, the powerful; S. Lshwa-ra, for Siva. 92 or l2. 55%, Nyi-ma, the sun; S. Surya, Arka, Bhénu. all, hhyim, the sun’s place in the zodiac; S. Griha, the 12 zodiacal signs. 93 or 13. Qfi/R'q, hrlod-pa, lust, desire, wish, Cupid ; S. Kdma. garég or gw'és, myos-byed, that infuriates or makes mad, lust, desire, wish, Cupido ; S. Illadana, Kdma Déva. 7t}, or 14. ll‘fiht/id, the mind; S. manas. N5, Manu, ditto ; S. manu. $11, Srid-pu, existence, birth, the world ; S. Bhuvanam. qq or 15‘ gmfiq'qq, tshes, nyin-zhag, the 15th day of a lunar month ; any day of the semi-lunation ; S. Aha or Alum. '9‘» or 16. &‘IIRKI, hIi-bdag, lord of men, a sovereign ; S. Narapati. QQJ'LY, ngal-po, a king, prince; S. Rr'y'a. 9.1 or 18, Ew'u, or $3,, nyes-pa, or shyon, vice, fault, blemish; S. Dasha. at or 24, gqrrx, ngal-va, he that has been victorious, a Jina or Buddha ; S. J‘ma. 21.1 or 25, i'fis, de-nyid, the same, self; S. tatwam 211 or 27, gr“, Skar-ma, a star, one of the 27 constellations in the path of the moon ; S. Nakshalra. 22 or 32, it‘ll, So, a tooth; S. danta. 0 or 0. NIEQ, mkhah, void, space; S. Icha, ékdsha, gaganam. ail, thig, a spot, stain ; S. ? nabhas. @lq'q, Stung-pa, the vacuum ; empty space, zero ; S. shrinyam. (158) lI.—SPECIMENS OF THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. From the Kah-gyur and other classical Works. 1. ‘ ATTRIBUTES or A vmruous woman. [Extracted from the Bkab-hgyur, mda, kha, leaf 106-7 ; corresponding with the 12th chapter of the Lalita vistara, the original Sanskrit text.) §. 236. The required qualities in a maiden who may aspire to be united in marriage with Sim/Kya are thus defined by himself: See IWQ'QQL, NQ', volume ll. leaf 106-7. sen as'm'gvs'szu'iia'w qfis'srd'a‘ilris's I gs'iis'ram'u'sls'ws' nam'ii'gw ng'a‘hi r Kis'aq'stssl'ii'imvg' “E's'qrsm'ss'is' T ris'vi’s' spear wily gw'imvsa'w 523v T iv S'aiqwq'éavg'nzs'i'il'fi1'13“! I QQ'Qsé‘ g'a‘i‘ ata‘tw'a' newer new fibrin r gfi'mrq' N'ZIQWN' IWII' <21'arr5v 'N'QIEWT ii’s'm' ais's'u'e‘i'aa' Naiv'a' “81%??qu \L'Ss' Ingmar Ric'sq'ws' agmw'éj'imw'ss'sq 759.59.“..QI' an“. ,glv gmvwi. ,Qquaaraq' I mas'q' we? siege sa'a‘" Qq'éqrzq i ' fi'qsfi' 159 '6?" ata‘éww wrré‘w' man'fir’w'iil I ns'srs' ear liw'sc' G'sc'a' aiw'i‘is' l m‘f'ss' sq'fi’n'g'asw' ss'm‘i' nc'ésrzsq l i 53'Q1uwws' gw'Q'ns fi'Ql'JaKW'RR’SQI T rismfi' ré’w'S' a‘t’lr Qém'fin'su'nmwa‘iw'sn ‘ 5svuww£v Q" Emir-'0 aw gu' éQr Qa‘s'fis' i wear wwélv Qéc'sc' sqrrw ss'h‘qé‘q i g'g'il'qr at'aKW' éG'W-N'éilvi l Qfi’s' aqr aw Qwv' u'wagw'ac'fi'i’rév QéQJr ( 159 ') wimr nw'iic' fi'qgr nim'n' N'QIKW'KH El'éd'illw Q39? il/fi'fifi' liwv'q' uw£v 81w 1 'g'qu' nm'fiw' N'm'v' fifl'a'gw'q' till/6 I BL‘V‘RR' “raw '3???" Re/‘V'fil' ltl'RKI'KH 81%“? gm'u' Ii' "w weir a‘q'sqré‘c'i i’qwlan' ‘HQ'QI' silw' ut'i'qm' aaw' m'gs'fi1 5v gjr mfi‘v'QIQR' i'lfi'Q'qé‘a'é'iw' 15’1"“ I saw: saver m'siqs' mm'niiw Q'W'N‘QI'HI aR'Qi/c' Haws" rigq'rti'lv' 8481' Qésré‘q' urwr Bifi'é‘v' W'é‘s' {as amrw'iq' rié‘s'qr ‘s suw'uvfivfirlw' N'Ilé‘s'éw' Q$’w' a" ata‘éw'ur fi'Qv‘i' 5w 5w waiw'q'qm'fiw' nan'fir’w'i‘n r {'W'gm'ifaw'méc' mr invg' nzs'w Qfi' fifil'é/‘VWV r wsqw QRVQ'QI' aw'u i sn'i'aiq'if' evfi' &1'3‘3' Elw'él' {El-1151' 56'51’1' 'ifwmi é‘w'auvss's‘zs' {ifs'i' r s'if'w' ,é/qu. 81,?qu 5;? ,5wa §.,§.5.w.,;f§.q , ______5.55%“. £163. 3,, __'_ _ $3.3; guy's vaq‘ QQ'RKI'QR'QWWY : ém'im'sfl'ifi'g' its? 11 gg'iqw'ww'inw'fi'qé‘q'fii sys'm‘fi’q'wqfi'irls'qé‘ n 139'&"§'3'Q§1'5’a|'2=| 1 c'fi'g'Qa'inw'sn'sc' n sw'q'g'uérngw'iiq I 'iii'nq'qiwq'é’w'fi'm“: n fi'm'qfi'vi'fig'mfin Translation. “ No ordinary woman is suitable to my taste and habits; none who is incorrect in her behaviour; who has bad qualities, or who does not speak the truth. But she alone will be pleasing and fit for me, who, exhilarating my mind,‘is chaste, young, of good com plexion, and of a pure family and descenti” He indited a‘ catalogue ofthese qualifications in verse, and said to his father, “If there shall be found any girl with the virtues I have described, since I like not an unrestrained woman, let her be given to me in mar riage.” “She, who is young, well portioned, and. elegant, yet not boastful of her beauty, (lit. with her body ;)—-WllO is affectionate towards her brother, sister, and mother ;—Who, always rejoicing in giving alms, knoweth the proper manner how to bestow them on the priests and brahmans :—if there be found any such damsel, father, let her be brought to (160) me. One, who being without arrogance, pride, and passion, hath left off artifice, envy, deceit, and is of an upright nature ;—who_ even in her dreams hath not lusted after any other man ;-who resteth content with her husband, and is always submissive and chaste : —-who is firm and not Wav8ring';—Wl10 is not proud or haughty, but full of humility like a female slave ;—who hath no excessive fondness for the vanities of sound, smell, taste, (music, perfumes, and exquisite meats,) nor for wine ;—who -is void of cupidity;-—who hath not a covetous heart, but is content with her own possessions ;—who, being upright, goeth not astray; is not fluctuating; is modest in her dress, and doth not indulge in laughing and boasting ;-—who is diligent_in her moral duties, without being too much addicted to the gods and festivals (or righteous overmuch). Who is very clean and pure in her body, her speech and her mind ;—who is not drowsy nor dull, proud nor stupid ;—' but being of good judgment, doth every thing with due reflection ;—who hath for her father and mother-in-law equal reverence as for a spiritual teacher ;--who treateth he r servants, both male and female, with constant m_ildness;—who is as well versed as any courtesan in the rites and ceremonies described in the S-hastras ;~_-who goeth last to sleep and riseth earliest from her couch :—who maketh every endeavour with mildness-, like a mother without affection ;--if there be any such maiden to be found, father, give her unto me as a wife.” Afterwards, the king (Sans. Shaddhodana, Tib. Zas-Qtsang-ma), directs his brahman minister (Sans. Purohita, Tib. Mdhun-nu-hdon), to go into the great city of Capila-vastu, (Tib. Ser-skya-qzhi,) and to inquire there in every house after a girl possessed with these good qualities, shewing at the same time Sn.\KYA’s letter, and uttering two Slolras, or verses, of the following meaning : “ Bring hither that maiden who has the required qualities, whether she be of the royal tribe, or of the brahman caste ; of the gentry, or of the plebeian class. My son regardeth not tribe nor family extraction: his delight is in good qualities, truth, and virtue alone.” 2. VERSES AGAINST WE.-KRING THE VEILI The objections of the Buddhists to the seclusion of woman may be gathered from the following imaginary conversation of SnAxv.4’s wife, extracted from the Kah-gyur, Do. vol. Kh. leaf 120-12], (corresponding with the Sanskrit Lalita vistara,) at the end of the 12th chapter. (161) §. 237. sen i'sw'gafi's'ai‘ W'Qi/‘il" figwnwwi‘mw ué’s'vus'gs'iu Kli's'a'i'is'i’t Q'slrss'i'm'na'm'a‘t‘S'gu'gu'ii’rqlw ua'ilw-‘q I Qfi's'ta's'wKlifavsl‘ew'as'i's'fis' ir'aq'uriri’ri ifi'g' gefi'g'i‘t‘vqg'flw' IWI' i'é'w'w' ns'a‘rtuw'fi' "M's QSWET iaw's'nzs's'ei'sa's'v'i" fl 1. “ asa'ss' afis'as'easa'u'qr l Qaqw'q'sa'i‘w ad'aw' uéwr zl's'iwis' 5s'rwa'qr I N'uéa'zi'a‘t’r nivq's'uéw n 2. Qwaw'u' ail/saw uiw'q'ii r é’s'aas' i'rtas' aéw'u'vi‘m l Qfis'rtqwfi' sugar Qsa'q'ss' 1 l auw'ss's'qs' arasww'sriw u 3. qwaw'q'a'aos' wéw'u'itr wi'gr aslrac' i'qfiq' mien sfirs' a'a'fisw'é‘ r was sc'g'éw'i'né‘a'ai n 4- a'efi'fi’w'i' 5mm? 1 ifi’w'ss'é'wss'gw' is'qr i'ii-m'ii' nfi'v‘lw' aim ir'q'w‘sa'q'sl'a'w Iraq it 5- “ll-T'QI'Q‘I'Q'SR'QL'NI l Quav'q'ga's'sfi'q'fiq l vaiia'u'és'q'i l Ié'is'qes'ss' wé'vu'sh n 6. ns'srr iii-var fia'q'ir/s'is' 32w Qsar'l: l fi'sn' snail" giver 1155's? gnw'lr smile i aa'ii' inun' gq'w'g'gx' as' m? gain i'qs' i'ssr gm'é'rl'er gli'q' ads u 7. fiw'ws'qa' mars; gs'o’s' gs'sa' ann Quu' sis-w awv'ss' 'g'gr Qlfil'q'gs'éw'aift Qaavq'sa'fi' sa's' a'é’w' aas' 38m“ Ilsa' is' sa'q'i' QS' flé’sw qa'i‘iw' s51 n 8. Ils'sll' ilqufi' gnw'fil'gq'lw if: N' iii-1' <3: i sirmi' qiw' new is‘if-aiw'il' 'i'w' qgs'qu fill'q' tu'fi's' wqw'ew'gw'w' ai'ar mars: T fi'a'g'sa' aé's'rt' Iva'fiw' st'g' 151% n 9. _ arranger aawv' gw'fi'g'q' &wv' Mr qswv'ss' r ns'sq' isr water has ia' Qm'a‘w grm l sits-17' av fis' iii-13' usaw'er'iis'ss'wi fi'a'q; vr afi’s' afihw'fi'i' fi'é‘sl'e n 10. Kim'i' gem? li'w'i' i'c'ii'v' Era/KW‘ Q)! are I “'5‘? WW viva" é'iw 8:1?! is'ss' l .( 162 ) nc'sn' as“ QE‘S' ir'q'aa'im'ic' niar iu'ie, i @381. fi,.,}’.qw.gq. gqq‘h. (Ii-q. swg , 11. ns'é‘n' fiwv' 2w twp. 'snc‘ E1" usaw'gris' i usurii' é’v' at’n' dwv'ss' asa'm'ii' flaws: Y §'Qs'q's=r§'s"n§wsw' n'z‘r'nw' ss't §'QS'U‘RII' ni’s' nn’nw'fi'fi'i'én's n 12. nea'ws' r ss'tl’c'usn‘fis' i'RI-T' new imv 15' 'aew'sc' i i'ué‘s' a'évnw' swam rR/w‘v’fi' rwam'qc' i ri‘aifi'gm' éuw' v‘r’s'aa' alu'sc' qn'ifi’s' min I fi'g'rws' was ni'c' umr 3'é‘sr silly n” sn'fi’s'sm QW'QI‘EN'fiis'WV' 5953,43" N'Qil'fl‘i' fi’rqus' nst'ut‘i' inw'g'nss'tr MW. qugg. (lag/“q, ,a'wwwgq. iwaq. "aquamvfiiqfi.“(2.53? WWWRQQK. qi'zriw'ww :w' qu'g'ch'l‘r it'd/13' s'uw'flw'q'gs'nin'ss' T g'fin'fi'¥flQI'Nt-I's'fl' raga. fig“. , ygqgflrql. an. gvuvqg. mug. qwzw. $53.3. ,‘fw. ngq. unrrw' ais's'nfivs'q'ai" 55's; rig/R'Ql“ n 13. “ 641533 '3' it’s'aa' fi'Qsiv' HQQ'N'RC' l JMQ'N' Ls'fi'v‘r’a'aa' 5“";11' Lq'g'zu imvsq'swq'fi nfiw' ss'wu 2111's l wrusc' arré" ic'lg' 15“";1' os'rr ads 11” g'fisl'nva'ut‘i'dg' i'ug' niivut‘z' n [This is the twelfth chapter; On the displaying of dexterity in the arts.] Literal Translation. Thereafter San'rs’noam')’ (S. Goes) the daughter of SHAKYA (Lagna béchonchmt : Qm'q'fi'ZQ'zq, the gladiator) when in the sight of her father-in-law, and mother-in~law, or of any of the domestics, neglects to conceal her face (with a veil). They say ofher : “ It would be proper that this new bride remain with some restraint, for she never veileth herself.” * These few lines of the text are translated only in general terms. T Shis is called also Gases HDSlN-MA, the celebrated woman, (qqrv'q gq-ar, in Sans. Yxsaonnaai-l (163) . Then, S1-1A'rs’no1u.4, the daughter of SHAKYA (the gladiator), having heard this disagreeable upbraiding and talk of herself, sitting before the domestics uttered the fol lowing verses : 1. “ Sitting, standing, and walking, those that are venerable, are pleasing whennot con cealed. A bright gem will give more lustre if put on the top of the standard. 2. The vener able are pleasing when they ‘go ; they are agreeable also "when they come. They are so whether they stand, or whet-her they are sitting. In every manner the venerableiare pleasing. 3. The man excellent in‘ virtue is pleasing when he speaks; he is so also when he sits still. As an example, doth not the Kalapinka bird appear more beautiful when she chaunteth her lovely song in your presence P *4. The venerable man who putteth on a garment made of the kusha grass, or whose squalid clothing concealeth not his ema ciated body, still shineth with his own lustre. He that hath goodqualities is adorned by those qualifications. 5. They who have put off all vices are venerable. Fools, committing vices, how much soever they be adorned, are never pleasing. 6. Those that have malice in their heart, yet speak a sweet language, are like a poisoned bowl into which nectar is poured ; or a cleft on a rock that is rough both inside and outside. Communion with such men is like ‘contact with the mouth of a snake. 7. With respect to the venerable, all resort to them, all reverence them. They are supported and cherished by all men, as the stairs descend ing to the water’s edge are kept in repair by the multitude. The venerable are always like a bowl full of milk and curd. It is a great happiness to see human nature capable of such purity. 8. Fraught with blissful consequences is the gift of such men as have renounced the company of the wicked, and being directed by a venerable religious guide, are become ena moured of the doctrine of the most perfect (Buddha). 9. For such as have restrained their body, have suppressed the several defects of it, have refrained their speech, and never used a deceitful language; and having subdued the flesh, are held in restraint by a pure con science: for such, to what purpose is the veiling of the face? 10. They that have a cunning heart are imputlent and shameless; and having not the required qualities, do not speak the truth :_though they should cover their body even with a thousand clothes, they would go about in the world more naked than the unclothed. ll. They that have concealed their pas sions, and have kept them under subjection, and are content with their own husbands, and think not on any other ;-such women,when not concealed by a veil, shine forth like the sun and moon : for such, to what purpose is the veiling of the face P 12. Moreover, Duane Snouo, (S. Ris’hi,) the great Lord (God), who is wise in knowing the hearts of others (164) yea, also the whole company of the gods, know my thoughts, my good morals, my virtues, my vows, and my chastity. Therefore, why should I conceal my face ?" Zas-leang-ma, (S. Shuddbodana, the father of SHAKYA,) her father-in-law, was much pleased with these expressions, and presented her with several precious things. He uttered at the same time a slfika, the meaning of which is this : l3 “ My son being adorned with such qualities as he has, and my daughter-in-law having such virtuous qualifications as she describes ; to see two such pure persons united together,‘is like when butter and ghee (clarified butter) are mixed together.” 3. Ra'ruavau’s Ln'r-rna T0 SHAKYA. §. 238. Muh'g-cben, (S. Ratnavali,) a young princess of Ceylon, the daughter of the king of Singular, having been informed by some merchants of Central India (Madhyam) of Buddha a'hd of his doctrine, she was much pleased with it; and, when those merchants returned home, she sent some presents to CHOM-DAN-DAS (SHAKYA), with a'letter of the following contents: W il'f'tl'a'i'ai'fi‘v's'l'sé‘vu 1 1iss'ugs'ss'niw'mw'iw'ii'q'é‘s' 1 ni'li‘awv'we'srm'slww 1 1s:'ss'rtss'ii'as'swgnw'iiv'ni’s' 11 “ Reverenced by the Suraa, Asuras, and men ; really delivered from birth, sickness, and fear; Lord! who art greatly celebrated by thy far extending renown, from the sagé's ambrosial portion, kindly grant me ! (meaning religious instruction or wisdom.”) SHAKYA received this letter, and sent to the princess a picture of_Budd/m on cotton cloth, with some verses written above and below the image, containing the terms upon which refuge is obtained with Buddha ; Dharma, and Suugha, and a few fundamental articles of the faith ; together with two stanzas recommendatory of Buddhism. In a letter to the king of Singala, SHAKYA prescribes with what solemnity this image should be received, the letter perused, and made known in Ceylon. The stanzas are these. See Dulvd, vol. 5, leaf 30. 1. new flxw'szi's'é‘s'qgc'qrs 1 1 wcw'sw'nya'W'qgll'u's 1 qu'gfi'éa'q'as'atq'qé‘q 1 1Q£'=1s81'§'3111§’fl's11'21 2. ns'én'xrrg'rmvis'ux 1 fivesq'fi'q'gfi'gl's 1 i'aé'eii’x'q'm'asw'yv 1 1 gsrqszm'a'urévuregx 11 1. “ Arise, commence a new course of life. Turn to the religion of Buddha. Conquer the host of the lord of death, (the passions,) that are like an elephant in this muddy (16-5) house, (the body,) (or conquer your passions, like as an elephant subdues every thing under his feet in a muddy lake.) 2. Whoever has lived a pure or chaste life, according to the precepts of this Dulvd, shall be free from transmigration, and shall put an end to all his miseries.” 4. COMPENDIUM or THE nocrnma or Bvnnnn IN one smxa. §. 239. Q ll §F|'lI'§"lIR'$l'B'§ T “No vice is to be committed, R|?|'11I'§61'*gN'£/¢lN'l1l'Q 1 Virtue must perfectly be practised,-— 9.‘: .212 3:9 11 Z. 15. n< ‘\J'*_VD'El$QI I Subdue entirely your thoughts. D)" J1’1" Z 2, 'Z*V'5;*\I"'5I%'51'lI"?I5| l This is the doctrine of Buddha.” 5. A Mortar. MAXIM. §. 240. es 11 aww'ss'$'w'§1'atqs'=t1's 1 1 é' 7. WHY Gon IS CALLED Koucnox, IN TIBETAN, “ THE Cnuar or Rzuurv.” §_ 242, ~39 [1 (§§|’ Translation. Banana, VISHNU, and the great God (Isuwana) et cet. ;——the Négds, Yaksluis, and Kumbhandés (demi-gods) ;—the sun, the moon, and the planets; any mountain (or hill), lake, and green tree; any rock (or large mass of stone,) and the hill gods,--all these are no protections. The only refuge for him, who aspires to true perfection, is BUDDHA. alone. The two kinds of moral instruction (dogmatic and argumentative), and the collective body of priests, are no permanent refuge. (167) 10. Win! wnom maroon MAY BE TAKEN. I See ng'qgu qé’g'évqw, vol. Kl, leaf 89. §- 245- w l KI='<11'§'@|'3"§M=Q'<3=' 1 ifi’wm'sun'iwucq'rrac'v auw'zs'flrilrvi'gnvé'zm v fi'q'qw'i'gqvg'atdi‘? n Translation. Who is void of all defects, and who abounds with immense good qualities (perfec tions) ; who is all-knowing and merciful, to Him will I fly for protection. 10. ON THE SAME svamc'r. Ibid. leaf 47-48. §. 346. sell qu'm'iq'e'gq'iir’vi‘m'm 1 fi’a'wauvzw‘x’s'gra r tiw'sq'ewqgn'sqc'gn'ér Ii'wc'nw'nn'i’q'q'lfiq n Translation. In whom there are no defects, and who has all the perfections (required in a Bunmu) ; be he called BBAHMA, Vrsmw, or the great Isnwmu. He also is my teacher (or Buddha). 1]. Here follow two specimens of Tibetan translation from the great Sanscrit Epic, the Maha’ Bhdrata, by Vyésa, the Rishi, called in Tibetan SC'QIG'QN'LJ (Drang srong rgyas pa, meaning: the copious hermit or sage); first, the speech of Arjuna, and secondly, 'a short description of the quality of the soul. 11. THE ADDRESS or ARJUNA 'ro VISHNU. Extracted from the Stan-gyur nir’q'inw, vol- "I leaf 25, 11150 leaf 51, 52. §.247. w“ gq'fia'gw'fi'fi'nevu raaw'zs'nfiq's'm'qrnwr wish'a'qi'rlw'ilq'u'i‘wr i gw'u'iivi'qfi'nww n eu'qgm-nsmwwé’c'qw'm I Qaq'ul'qis'i'qu'qr “ HREI;§V31N'§'@ZN'§L'2R'T ril'w-"t'ir'wv'g'aqu'ém c'w'gw'q'qu'grza' I I g'wn‘itat'qr'ia'qrqu. t mg'S'M'W'gc'gg'is‘r-vr Iunw'qqc'irsw'g'igwurogx n W'l‘i'il‘fi'g'w'qil'nw r r liwwre'nrsww'gx r ss'fi'fi’ws'ew'fis'ss'r iiwg’swfi'u'oi’s'grq v fi'fis'svn'sc'i’rmwfi r i uw'w'wswtzaq'qrnw n Translation. The son of KUNTI (ARJUNA), perceiving that they were all his relations, being greatly afl‘ected through compassion for them, and seized with horror, thus said : (168 _) “Having beheld, O Vishnu, my kindred waiting ready for the fight, my body is seized with horror, my mouth also is entirely dry; my frame trembleth with anguish, the hair standeth on end upon my body; my bow escaped (escapeth) from my hand, my skin also is all over parched. My mind being in confusion, I am unable to fix it. Those for whom I wished dominion, wealth, and the enjoyments of life, they, abandoning life and fortune, are ready to fight against me.” 12. Tun NATURE or THE SOUL. Ibid. leaf 35. §. 248. as H stuéq'giv'amss'ssw l\ (\ V (A t.\ \I Q rqs'a'u'wivw'ein'm a (\ \ C\ C\ g'v‘lw'qgm'qrarqgrfi 1 1 Qfi's'as'r‘iw'iatw'i‘mgl 11 Translation. The weapon cutteth it (this) not ; the fire burneth it not ; the water corrupteth it not ; the wind drieth it not away“. 13. How 'ran DOCTRINE or SHAKYA suouan BE RECEIVED BY THE LEARNED, AND THE PRIESTS. See HRIQ'QQL, 81% vol. ['8 leaf 230, also trgirqgl, NQ’, vol. é leaf 26, and elsewhere. §. 249. seen nfilqw'qzs'qiL'RQ'MQL'Q§Q'SI INFW'Q‘fiNN'fiN'iI/Rw'qhqv'6Nl risli'ligs'as's'sfi'a‘i’s'w 1 rgw'q3'§x'3'w'i‘1Q'$' 11 Translation. Priests! like as gold is tried by burning, cutting and filing, the learned must examine my commandments (doctrine) and receive them accordingly, and not out of respect (for me). 14. SHAKYA on THE SCYTHIAN RACE. tpqq'qgr, afi’, vol. 6, leaf 288, 291, in the Lankavatara Sutra. §. 250. 92 1| c'S-a'g'w'sd'iniv 1 1 nicwa'lnv'wgs'a'e1 e'quv's‘i‘w’s'es’wé‘ 1 1 a’v'i'auw'ss'ssw'sril s 11 Translation. I (Shakya) am of the Scythian nation, born ofan undefiled place. I teach a religion (doctrine) to animal beings (men) for entering into the city exempt from pain, (i. c. I teach how to be emancipated, or delivered from bodily existence.) * When the author was prosecuting his Tibetan studies at the monastery of Kanum, he was struck with two passages in the Slan-gyur collection, which he immediately recognised as having met with in a duodecimo volume of Robertson's Disquisition on India, presented to him by Mr. Moorcroft in Cashmir. The two ex tracts in the text above are those alluded to; he mentioned to Dr. Gerard having found these Tibetan trans lations from the Mahabharata, and was some months afterwards surprized to see in the Calcutta newspapers, an announcement that he had discovered the lost volumes of that great Indian epic ! The object of the present note is merely to correct the misapprehension Which thus got abroad, as it was only from Dr. Wilkin’s English translation of the passages in question that he was enabled to recognise the Tibetan translations to be taken from the same work. (169) 15. Mean. SENTENCE. The following moral sentiment taken from Chan'aka’s Niti Shasta: “ Svadéshé ptijyaté Rdjti; Vidvr'm aarvatra paijyaté,” (the literal version of which, in Latin, is: “ Suo regno colitur rez' ,- doctus ubique colitur,”) has been thus rendered by the Tibetans: §. 251. ~92 n Sm'fi'xc'fi'gm'q'nnu T qu'w'sq'Q'nq's'ngx n A king is honoured in his own dominion; a talented man is everywhere respected. 16. REMARKABLE SAYINGS, (taken from a work entitled, in Tibetan : $9" 515W?Lil'rtfifi'Wiwfi‘ga'nfiréw'g'qa'qyav Iii/wt in Sanscrit : Subhés’hita Raina Nidhi Ntima Shéstra, that is, “ A Work of Elegant Sayings, entitled : A Treasury of Jewels,” written by Kungti Gyel-tsan (EQ'RIIQ'QQI'NQQ), in Sanscrit A'nanda Dwaja, the celebrated Sa-slrya Pénd’ita, in the 13th century after Christ.) §. 252. saert ww'ew'atfi’wfi‘dcw'asw'fi I i g'nss'g'm'slris'q i fi‘wmwgt‘i'qsws'i‘i l il'u'qvli’q'q'és'sc'atgw it He who entirely rejects Buddha, the Patron, and pays reverence to other Gods, acts like that foolish man, who, being thirsty, sinks a well on the bank of the Ganges. sen iw'lrt'qc'uqat'a‘iq'ais'i r r *7 Rw'q'ss'atqwgn'qwis I qs'sc'os'nfi'sa'aia'i T r Q£'a's='"slt'qfil1w'q'ifi H There is no eye like the understanding: there is no blindness like ignorance: there is no'enemy like sickness : nothing dreaded like death. wen i’rw'ia'q'iq'grm iwvrwww'fi'ilw'u'qu r il‘Qms'afivif'i'W'fiw r T wew'q'fis'g'sm'qrqgl n Low-minded men, should they become wealthy or learned, grow arrogant: a wise man, by these excellencies, becomes the more humble. sen nes'quiq'és'svfifl'qi’s I i i’s'dw'qil'é‘c'licvu'ai t as as'rts’w'iw'is'i‘s'qrqfi’s I ié’s'fi'i'ngwrtsfi'qs'g it To seek to get from others, and yet to desire to fare on delicacies : to live by beg. ging, and yet to have great pride: to be ignorant of literary works, and yet to wish to dispute ; these three actions make you ridiculous to others. (170) III. COLLOQUIAL PH RASES. § 253. @211 '5l§'5l"l‘*J'*_\lD'_§I.'£l'l, may you be happy (may you prosper), may it please (your honour). §<2l'1I[I.'§1'-35!, may you be victorious. 1-m'fi4v'q.L'§‘L'3=l, may you be glorified and blessed. g8|'Q§,Ql'<§, I salute you (I thank you). §’6|'ll'<;IKl\l'*\\I’, you are welcome. 6G'5'gl'l*V'§=l, ] please to enter. or 8|l:'3'§/§'.§K|,iplease to walk in. 5lRfi'Q‘R\"1I"4IFlKl‘V'§'K|§I/Q1, I beg (you) to sit on this couch (stuffed seat). w='q'1qg=1=v'r§'Q§"<21, or on this chair. I 'q§'1q1'irq<\r'~w~r, are you happily arrived? 1='q§'a‘:"§1rw'§q, I have happily arrived. §'l'l’;l”=l*V"El§'8\¢/‘Q$l*l'=lN, are you in good health P 5lR'l‘l"NGQ'Q84', have you no sickness P fi’;I'¢l'N$/=|'l‘l\'§llN'§'ll‘lN I ='0J'R"g'§N'§1'-1'5JJv'*V'§'1il§'1Il'=l§*V'*l" QlN'<‘h'g'G"!I'II1 (8I§Q1'r{I.) N'§!."»'iIt, have you not been fatigued on the road? I’-2'-§Q¥-?'€=!l'31"£J/R‘, I was not fatigued at all. 3'<2l"I:{(§/J|'=,"iJ'1;[~v, on what sort of carriage came you? G'Ql§/lSlN'§g§'<21'a/GM, I came in a palanquin. I_s1D1i|'QJt'fiG'§'&‘1/1q'8t'14v'nY, I could not find a boat (ship), neither a horse or carriage. R'i'a|-\'|'Q§"8p'3L'RQ]'B]iQ ‘i-1 (171) qq'aY'qi'QnN, good morning. §s'ai"us‘"il1*v, good day. gu'it'wi'fimv, good evening. Nifi'fi'q‘x'Qd‘W, good night. qfl'qrqgatw'iiq, may you sleep well. qg'qrnéiwvwn, have you slept well P G'zKI'RG'Nq-IN'ili'illtl/W'F'all'i‘qillr631', will you not drink some tea with us? IISEW'QVR'RK'REIIGN'QEN'Q'MQJ/QI'QIN, will you not dine and sup (with us) 2 fizzlwzrqvac' (h. gaw'qqa') sq'wlrl (h.q§’q':.lq) v‘r’s'qat, have you some acid liquor (distilled from barley), and brandy? ns‘iw'n'qsll, s'zn'm'gq'ass'ws' (h. gs'gaw) it’s, s'w'gq'srgq'avin'w'mn. I beg to give me first a little brandy. aN'YII/‘QSKFIIN, is it (savoury) pleasing to the taste ? aar'if'quq, it is pleasing. (‘q‘u'{Loserayfi'iat'Qag'qfi’q'iq'q'zq'filv'rlqq'laa'ssql'ed: if you find it to your taste, please to drink, we will present you another (bottle) also. gsw'fi‘fi, I thank you. QQ'Zu'is, this is enough. qw'ac'qfi'gq'is'gal'x'qsq, this liquor of barley is a little sour. gs'as'qfi'as'aa'w'iq, from what country is this wine? ivcg'zq'q'flq'§w'a|w'fiq, it is from our vineyard. s'dl'gs'qgw'qu'i! (Q5511?) §G', this year we had fine grapes. [fie'zq'fi'[law'q'g'gq'flwqafl'Izt/R'Q'G'WQR'IR'gm's'qtqq, should you still have any grapes, in your house, I beg you to favour me with some. QQ'S'iq'QqL'i', ngll'lill, these are white grapes, these are black grapes. llaN'RI'IIg'i‘f'RG'NGL'a/‘qu, they both (each of them is) are beautiful and sweet. flares N'Qg'ifl'glrit‘qqll'él‘v'qN'WG'N'eta/G', I have never seen such large grapes as these are. g'gfi'qgldrfiq, be pleased to take yet more, (to help yourself again.) 5'35, (girl'qu uq'ixl'iflv, enough, I have eaten much. (172) glqw'g'i, I thank you. fig'mflatw'zfi'qfi'il'qgllvzill, may you all remain in peace. fig'mu'q'qi'ql'ig'sn, may you well proceed on your way. i'q'qfi’g'q'gq'fl'fi'g'i‘m, what is that large building yonder P Q'qls‘l’q'q'r'q‘ll'aq, it is a monastery. fi'qq'Q'g'fill'Kqu'a‘r’, who dwell there? who inhabit it? Zw'qfiww'fi’, or gw'flés'tl‘iflw'izl, religious men. fi'gq'fi'gil’q'qg'qq's'qii'QR'RN, is it allowable to enter their monastery ? fine], it is allowable (one may enter). 11¢?qu ms"wn'aYs'14'aw‘zs'rmn'fivilivs'n'g'erR’fi"31 should I be Permit ted, I wish to see (examine thoroughly) every thing, that is to be found there. g'é‘rrii'v'fiw'ms'ofiquw'ufi'ai’vwasIrq'zq'é‘ll'fi'gs's‘qix'il'q'gw'fin, let any one (go and) request (or beg of) an intelligent gélong (religious man) who is able to answer my inquiries, to come hither to me. i'i‘llv'é‘q'fi'c'qq's'qé'o', conducted by him, I will enter. [ilg'fi‘QQ/fi'w‘qfifis'fifi'filq'§q'qfil'IZIIN'K}; here is a gélong (priest) come according to your wish. QIQ'Q'QIKW'QII, you are welcome. as'fi'atéq, (what is) your name 2 cfi'ak’w'é‘m'ém'fiawemit/via, my religious name is TshuI-khrims rGya-mtsho, “ Ocean of good Morals.” 5313'u'oifi'am'il'swé'vir’s'li's'fiw'c'm'é‘q's'qns's'KIQ/Ql, I beg you to tell me. in detail, every thing that is to be found in this monastery. fivimés'wilders'qsll'iivfi'auw'ss'rma'qrgé', I will explain every thing according to your (honour’s) wishes. Qa's'fl'flfi'qgllw'w'laq, this (chamber) is the residence of the LAMA (superior, or high priest). i'é’swwi'gweq'fi'fi'nfiwrméiq, there on that side is the principal’s chamber. Q'IW'QQ'Jl'g'fi’q'gQ/Jp'é'qglqw'quiv'ié on this side is the professor’s (teacher’s) apart~ ment (or dwelling place). (173) [IR'Q'SQ'fi/‘i'qli'ali il/G'JI'QKI'NE/R'UQEIN'RII, in that large room, in the upper story, resides the treasurer. fifi'd'll'w'it's'ud'rm'ww‘q'mérq'liw'izfl in the rooms below it, dwells the steward (butler, caterer, provider of victuals, &c.) is'i an iq'il'rtitllvqfins'fin'QQ'W'3'sil'st'é'KIW'w-i'w'fifi these small “aired rooms (cells) above, in the middle and below, are the dwelling places of the priests (or monks). Qg‘g'fifil'QSfi'é'QS'th'ilq, this is the place of congregation for the priests. aa'il'q'q'figwgq'mq'liiq', that above it is the place of sacrifice (or offering). Qal'fill'g'at’zs'lta'qll'é'fiil'l‘]: these are the implements of sacrifice. fia'fi/G'Q'Q'S'Q'BIZC'IIC'QQ, that above the latter is the holy chapel (or shrine). QQ'S'g'nq'iq'fil'é‘q'GJp, this is the large temple of the gods. fi‘an'g'qs'qi"sn'fi'em'gs'qé‘wc' 1 gw'is'tuw'fi'i'a‘i‘ sn'it‘s'mlw's‘f, these pictures here in the vestibule are the (painted) images of the four great (fabulous) kings, and of the guardians or defenders of religion. 6;.qqugquwwggwgiq‘fiq.ngavfia. ,swgqqqavfiqqgavfifiqyfiqw]: the images, within, found on the side of the wall, are representations of Boonaas and of Bodhisatwas. this is a picture (painted image). this is a cast (molten) image. Qg'a'qgl'gfx this is a carved image (bass-relief). i'a'allw'gfil, that is a woven image. Qa'a'g‘fiai'Rl-I', these here a Buddha’s person, i. e. a Buddha image. qfivivngvgq'gq, are the repre_ his doctrine, i. e. a sacred volume. ngngqvfiq'iq-Qq'g =\ a _ semations of his grace 0r mercy, i. e. a holy shrine, or small pyramidial building. axw'mrQQ'RKI'swsvsw'rtiar"ewesN'ss'es'grt'irwvsq‘l'fill'fi='i *Z'Q'éwrwq'tav fivngw'qa'gw'fiuw'ngw'lm in these volumes are contained the moral instructions, delivered (commanded) by BUDDHA, that has been victorious; by Bodhisatwas, and by ancient learned men. (174) i]EW'UN'aKl'Il’EIWii'URKI'Q'qyfi'B'KIiQI/Q, I bég you to Open a volume, and to show it me. fislw'qu'qa's'fléwa'waq, this volume is printed with vermilion (red ink). Qfi'aq'a'filqzv'g (or ;i/El'g) ‘E'qé'ifl'fléw'w‘f, in this (volume) there are about 500 leaves. qfi's'atfil, this is the beginning, and this the end. KKI'Ea'NSQ'Q/KW'RR'EU'{Ellw'i'ilQ'QW'ZIWUSWIISW'ZI/R, there are on the front and back of each leaf seven lines. ' quwwii’hsn, sn'i‘rn's's'gw'sll'ss'i'ss'qs'rrirs'q'QQ'm'iwasit‘ft'wa‘Ew'fi’, the print of it is clean ; if orthography and the correction of the errata be in accOrlla'n'ce therewith, this volume is of great Value. , Q'g"Qflili'g'nng'sgqj'551'fiw'qa'finw'qn'u'ifi'lt'é‘fil'fiq, this is an incomplete volume, written with gold and silver pigment. ' r qfi'gq'a'ql'at, fi'qq's'qufi'gfi'a'fifil'iiqwi; these are printed, those lithographed books. I Q§.q.fi.fi.ss.zq.asviyé°§v qvgwq'ngq'if'ngw'a‘f, there are here many MSS. (manuscripts) also, both in the capital and small character. Qa'q'ql'pq'q'Jp'la/g, where is (here) the printing house? fi'i'é/lqw'q'qglq, it is on that side, a'i'S‘QL'fifi/W'Zlq, fia'ifi'ai'llfifi'i'fi‘l'a'lll'll‘fi/ll'iflfi'ki that man yonder is the princi pal printer, the others near to him are his working men. a‘i'qfi'nq'q'i‘m or nq'ng'iiq, from what place is this man 2 or what countryman is this man 2 v [X—Qequ'fiq or ng'qfi'q'viq, he is from this place, or he is from this country. fi-qvfiq or gq'i'q'i‘m, he is from thence, or from that place, heis from that country. liI'G'651‘74'Q‘l‘lT IX'RQKI‘il'EWll'V‘l‘l, he is from us, he is our countryman. Qfi'QéN'B'fifi'LI'ilq, Q'fi'fiq'q'lafi, this is an Asiatic, that is an European. QQ'Q'QJL'Q', fi's'qn'q'tiiq, this is an Indian, that is a Chinese man. fi'fi‘fi‘l'll'q‘ifi, I am a Téjik, (a Persian.) Qfi'fi’g'q, i'qq'fil'q'i‘m, this is a Tibetan, that is a Nepalese. Q§'%II.'H', fi'iQ/Q'fil'fiq, this is a Turk, that is a Mongol. ( i175 ) Qa'3'81'8‘tl'alliitq, this is a Turkish'woman. ofi'q'a’rgq'ilmgll, there is a Turkish boy. Qg'lle'lI,§'§B'815R'q"3q, this is of Khams-land (or-a Khamba), that is of Utsang (or middle Tibet). qfi'gs'q, fi'zqiq'q'v‘iq, this is of (the province) U, that is of (the province) Tsang. Q???“ or (Qiqiq'qfi'gm'q'iiq,i'QJ/fi'filql'q'iiih this is of Bhutan, that is a Mon. QQ'NRQ'IQYLKI,i'S'Wi'il'Q‘lfi, this is of Nari, that is a Cashmerian. this is a (Pashmerian woman. _ I Qawzlwxwfq; {I-S'gq'fivgq'q'iiq, this is of Ladak, that is ofBeltistan or Little Tibet. q§'ra' qfi‘vgar'i'q, i'fl'gl'lw'q'hllq, this is a Brahmanist, that is a Tirthika, 0r Tirthakara (a Jaina i) I , qfi'irffitv'q, this is a follower of Jesus, that is the same of Moses. qfi'g'q‘u'a‘rqtail,fi'gl'rif'q'lfiq‘, this is a Muhammedan, that is an infidel, a pagan. Q§.g.gw.qg.qq§qv, Q3 gq'qqq'q'fiq, this is of this religion, that is of another religion. qfi':';x|'fi'$'w'g81w'qu‘iq, this is of our religious sect. nga'qq'q'a‘s; fi'ii'g'q (or §'£/~'21'l1)12l'5|, (properly intrinsic and exotic,) this is of the or thodox, that of the heterodox, church, (or doctrine.) qvq'q'qq'q'wqw'éw'qa‘QG'Q'gw'QKW'Qr‘QI'EN'QSKI, how many different religions sects are there in Tibet among the orthodox Buddhists P a‘fq'LY'QSKI'KY, there are many. £~.ng.a.qvfiqvqfivsqwfiay3|; the principal sects are as follows : arrat'q, l, Nyigmapi ; a'sq'q, 2, Urgyenpa; UWQ'KIRN‘V'", 3, Kahdsmpé; sel'aKW'u, 4, Gélukpa, or seesaw. Galdanpé, (01' Ril'ial'li, Ghéldampéd N'Q'q' 5, Sakyapé; sm'gs'q, 6, Kargyutpa; "l’l'qs 7, Karmapa; Qfi'BC'lI, 8, Brikungpa; RG'QQKI'N, and 9, Brukpa. qfi'g'q'gq'g’w'nfiq'q'iiq, this person is of the same religion with me. {'fi'li’g‘gq'gwflsll'qw‘iq, that is of the same religion with thee. Qg'a'fi'fifl'gq'l'lsil'q'iiq, this is of the same place (or country) with me, or this is my countryman. - * The Tibetans call the Muhammedans in general by this name. This word 3] a] (pronounced Ldlo) answers to the Sanscrit Mlecbchha. (176) ai'qfi'sArSam'ss'at’w'fi'nfifil'q'w'iiq'v); these men are all of different countries and of different religions. gg'g'iiq, who art thou? who are you? KIWJIN'fi/GN (h. Bl'qw'imw), whence are you come? fig'Q'QN'QKI'IZI/fi'fifi, have you a passport? era, (or ng'ill) iat'qsq, how many companions have you? (or how many men, 8w.) Q/R'RG'NQN'R‘II'fi'E'SN'QI/q, how many men (or persons) are with you? c'fi'gfi'q'fiq, I am a European. Qs'fill'all'Q/‘U, of Great Britain. g'rg'qg'b'g'qrqv (or s'fi'sic'w) Q’Rw'q'fiq, I am come now hither from India, (from European or British India.) q'q'qat'fiq'a‘i'qsrl, I have no passport. fi'ifi'Q'G'zfil'gw'lgffi'qrqw'i‘rili’q' (or mnq'g'i‘rq), without it (without a passport) we will give you no way, or we will not allow you to proceed on yourjourney. EYR'QQLQQ'ERN, why are you come hither? lilq'gq'q'ir‘fi'qm WG'Q'QQ'Q’fiH'fi'fi‘Q'Hh, are you a merchant, or are you the envoy of any king ? q'gwq‘rqq'fiq T fi‘q'ruq'a‘iq I C'QLQ'QIi/L'Ll'aq'a'fi, I am neither merchant, nor envoy; I am a traveller. figiflququqggmwhwaél.q.qqawa’wngg/s.qua/H.453, on account “Tibet being particularly a high country, I had a desire to see it. 3;m'QQS-wé‘n's‘ia'a'wé'm'ag’vi'sqq'th'iat'qsrl'q'qvl'il‘lv'iw'% I know now, what is the elevation of this country above the sea, (or how many miles be, 8:0.) i'qék's'gs'fi'é'wcswii’ss'ss'i aw‘mfil'é'ifi'qfi‘l'fi‘v'ail'zia, as also (I have found) the measure of the heaviness and lightness of the heat and cold, and of the dryness and humidity of the air. qfi'q'qgfi'iqw'i'g, what sort of corn is produced here? wzq'fi'gm'qi'5le'NgNN'Qi'iqw'NG'$§'Q%G', in our country there do not grow so man kinds of corn as in India. 9 (177) is'fi's'si'sli's’s'si'sd'usmrqrsliq (QN'ZN'QKW'MR'Q‘FJ'), you, who are Tibetans, in what teacher’s doctrine do you delight? (who is the teacher or founder of your religion?) or what religious sect are you P c'ss'S'ni’w'as'Qw'ae'gwsw'lisW'ufi'sw'ué'is’w'w'ss's'és'% we believe in the holy religion taught by Bhagavan Shakya Muni, (the triumpher, the mighty Shakya.) Q'Ell'Q'Qiga'iilfil'm'fié'q'iiflfl'il/'Q£"§I."a'/R'q"fifi, this triple division was of the Shékya race, in India. qg'iaQ'ill'fiI-T’iEQ'Q'SQ'RC'I figg'i'qlq'wi/n Shakya the Great, Shakya Litsabyi, and Shakya the mountaineer or highlander. it's'q'eorii‘&uw'fi'Eq'at'liqo'fi'qéq'fi"q'iq, in Tibet, the kings begin with Nyékhri. tsénpo (about 250 years before Christ.) R'3'811'ngg'éi'é.§'illN'W'Q[§GN', he was born of the Litsabyi race, in India. fi'e'lirsvggnvfi'qwsli Irfi'siv's'llnQ's'mt'sik'gl'sw'fis's'fiqus'fi's'd'q'fi‘sq' 3161' Lfl'fi'ém'il/L'Itfll, he being expelled from India, (or after being defeated in battle,) went to Tibet, and by the Bons of Tibet was honored (acknowledged) as their king. 301'J'QQQ'JLIIN'Q'iu'Q'qé‘Q'Qq'fil'Nq'fil'é/q, in the family (generation or dynasty) of this king, there came (succeeded) many princes in a regular series. a'fi'X'USQ'U'fi'él'a/‘i'iiq, the 27th is Lha Thothori, (500 years after the first king, in the 3rd century after Christ.) Q'QN'I‘GI'HR‘QIN'B' 1151:, this (prince) founded (built) the residence at Yambu. Qi‘fi'g'is'sr warm'w'is'fiiatc‘i'gs's'nuw, in the time of this (king) there fell from heaven a precious chest. id's:'q'a'lt'fi’n'ztiis'qé‘w¥sc'i qfil'fi-uis's'iwwlqw'u 'Hgfllw's‘fn there was found in it a Sutra (treatise) called the “ Constructed Vessel” (a work on moral subjects), and a chaitya of gold, &c. (a small pyramidal shrine). '8'51‘i'SN'§='§'$N'g'N'iIN'4Q; at that time, no one knew those letters. QN'Q'X'BTaW'lI'QC‘USQ'HN'fiai‘m, the 32nd (king) is “ Srongtsan Gumbo." QQ'Q’QQR'Q'SN'UQKW, he lived about 80 years. QQ‘V'QQI'QI'RQ'Q'al‘l'al‘V'Ilgai'g'HGN, this (king) married (took his wives) from Nepal and China. (178) g'aiiofi'sn'ii‘w'wcw'evfi'g'manw'ss'w'qii'gw'ii'sinvnu'aatvfi's's'rs'wv, by these ladies, images of Buddha, and some volumes containing orthodox (or holy) religion, were brought to Tibet. fi'w'eq'a‘r’efi' swfiva§wmwn= 'w'rrsiw'fi'fis'e Qs'vw' ew'irrrse 'u'u, after wards, these queens (or princesses) having erected colleges, the religion of Buddha was propagated also in Tibet. fis'q'mzw'wfiflw'fi'a/Bi'fl'Q'a'l'wlt'g'q'aq, in Tibet, “ Thumi Sembhota" was the first learned man. Qi‘w'e'llre'iqw'gl'é'as'iliw'=1l'rumw'v:'a'efi'w‘i'fi'w'sfi'asw'i'its'fi'dn'masw' \g'as'sa'im'fi'ém'nse'sc' ign'l'pfi'qse'qis'w'tau'aéq'sc' i a‘s’w'i'rtgu'n'rfiq, he be— came well acquainted with the Sanskrit language in India. And, in conformity with the Cashmerian characters, he taught the manner of forming the figures of the Tibetan let ters, both capital and small. swif'sa's's'ses'm fi'fi's'fig'qie'é'svs'ss' t5 5'W'V'3'13" (0r sfi’a'if’) “we iG'Q'RN'Lla'XN'RL';"El/fi'Zl/fi'g/N'iq'ql'gl'fi/n in the time of “Khri srong dehu tsan ” (in the 8th and 9th century after Christ) the 38th king, and under his sons and grandsons, the orthodox (Buddhistic) religion being propagated, that of the “ Bonpo" declined. mrq'ze'qit'é"'E'*Efs'qie'5'sw'ste'nré'qr'g'wss'fi’a'ré‘wiiigrrus'it"sn'fiw'a'qx'as' IIW'I‘IIS'H‘R'S'fifiN'flN'NG'QI/‘Ugls'fiq, in the time of “Ralpachen” or “Khri de srong tsan” (in the 9th century) there were translated many volumes from Sanskrit into Tibetan, by several Indian Pandits and Tibetan Lotsavas, (interpreters, translators.) a'éq'al‘V'ElR'Rl'NN'WGN'SN'UWI'Q'UEIIN, afterwards (in the 10th century) Lang tarma abolished the Buddhistic religion. was'is'W'e'm'fi'qri'wna‘mw'ii'n'sc'i fi’s'isi'sirri fivqé’w'é’wm'dhw'qwavq' 3"?all'hxl'él‘fi'fil'qQ/‘V'fi'fi‘l'hla'gw'll'fl'éfi'&NN'éfi'S'Rl'zll'gl'b," again (in the “ill cen tury) the holy religion being revived by "' Chovo Atisha” (the lord Atisha) by the Tibetan learned priest “ Bromston” and by many other learned men, it was diffused (or propa gated) in the whole snowy country, (Tibet.) RN'Kla'iaii'flfi'iR'S'llfi‘V'QL'gL'sq, may the holy religion remain (or continue) long. {gargo'n'é’w'qi/R'Q'Rq'Ql'ng'ql'grt'gq, may it be proclaimed (preached) in every country, to such as wish for religious instruction. (179) zi’s'gs'orngqiv'ud'mgc'iwfiwwwt‘i'sjrq'q'd'g'grgrin, may the sacred volumes (the representatives of the doctrine of Buddha) be on the face of the (whole) earth, like the sun and moon. fi'esl‘aww'as'qi'nrgrin, may all, that is born and walks, be saved (or arrive at happiness. Sans. Shubbam aslu surva jagatam Ufl'aiv, (Sans. Maiigalam) glory (and) praise. e'q'fi’g'gu‘fs'ud'nys'qu'iwv'fi'sRu.'aKI'IIN'.ti4i‘r=|'EK|'?QI'5'KIQI favour me with a register or list of the literary Works that are to be found in Tibet. fi'taw'fi'i'is'awv'iwfit s'sn'awv'zs'nvl'liiw'nfifi'Lil'ai'svsl’ It é'q'sl'l'QQ'sl'wrv'si’, their titles being numberless, I cannot tell all of them; the larger ones are as follows : L .qquy (qquwq) gqv-qwqg, Translation of Commandments (in 7 classes) 100 vols, gw'gzq'g, the classes are: l, Q5Ql'1ii, S. Vinaya, discipline or education, 13 vols. 2, fiq'Lq'fi'm'i/Ql'g'gwq, (or contractedly 51%;») S. Prajnyd Péramité, Transcendental Wisdom, 21 vols. 3, NCN'QN'WQJ'QI'i», (or contractedly limit») 5. Buddhavata Sangba, As sociation of Buddhas, 6vols. 4, R’ilh'flgll'qi‘xlw'll, (or contractedlyskl/Q'glwg S. Ratnakuta, i Accumulated Jewels, 6 vols. 5, (or 81;), S. Sutra, Tract or Treatise, 30 vols. 6, guy qu'qqq'q (or contractedly QG'QRN), S. Nirvanam, Deliverance from Pain, 2 vols. 7, QR, S, Tantra, Mysticism, 22 vols. 2, qgarqgl, (collection of) literary Works translated (from Sanscrit) in 225 vols, Note .- Instead of IIRIQ'QQL'RG'qgwqgl', frequently occurs this contracted form, q’qq'ng, as also, KIQR'IJJ, S. Pravacbanam, and flyfi'q-g/‘V, S. Shéstram. The bStan-hgyur consists of two classes : the rGyud (23, in 88 vols.) and the mDo (afi’, in 137 vols.) In the rGyud there are 24 different tantrika systems (contained in 2,640 tracts or different large and small treatises), among which the first is that of sw'fi'qfi’pq‘f, s, Kola Chakra, the circle of time, (on the doctrine of Adibuddha) in 5 vols. In the mDo class under several heads, there are many learned theological, philosophical, logical, medi cal, philological or grammatical, &c. works". * For further information upon the several parts of the two Tibetan compilations above-described, see the “ GLEANINGB IN SCIENCE," No. 32, Aug. 1831, p. 243. Also, the “ JOURNAL or was ASIATIC SOCIETY or BENGAL,”NO. 1. Jan., p. l, and No. 9, Sept. 1832, p. 375. (180) Besides the works contained in the bKah-hgyur and bStan-hgyur there are a great num ber of books, in Tibet, under various names. To give some idea of them, we will enume rate a few, in Tibetan and English. 1, sign, annals, chronicle, history. 2, smat'gg, oral account, tradition, traditional history, S. Akbyénam. 3, Z'ngt', elements (or origin and progress) of (the Buddhistic) religion. 4, {await/s, judicious sayings, (or memoirs, reflections, critiques,biographical notices.) 5, tiara; (properly emancipation or liberation), biography (of a remarkable person), legendary account. 6, gut-TN, a fable, tale, fiction ; fabulous history, The El'wl'gcw, Qésm- sgrungs, is the fabulous history (in Tibetan) of a celebrated warlike king (called Qégar) in the high, central, or northern part of Asia; but the time, in which he lived, the Tibetans cannot determine. 7, fi'q'a; or iq'qfil, (a defler) register, records, annals. 8, iq'élfi'q'il', ancient records. 9, @fl'éfi‘, 0r 'E‘IBI'KIQQ', records, annals, chronicle. 10, Q‘ill'afi', ancient writ, chronicle. ll, it's'é‘nz‘iq' ifi', Tibetan records. ’12, N'fl'i‘lil'ifi, records of the Sa-skyu sect. l3, éé‘nfiq'i,c' Chinese records. 14, fiN'E'IJJ'KWQI, very clear science, history. 15, é‘fl'l'qN, royal pedigree, history of dynasties. 16, QQl'l'QWKWQ‘qa'Q'Q/R', a clear mirror of royal pedi gree, or history of dynasties (in Tibet). l7, EQ'LQN'RQEI'HNN‘QIQ'fiG', a work on royal pedigree or dynasty, called the all-bestowing tree (the Kalpavriz'a or Kalpa-druma of the Indians). 18, aq'li‘rrl or th'ac', written advice or instruction. 19, HRIQ'QQN, a bun dred thousand precepts, i. e. a collection of precepts and instructions. 20, an'a‘svw, testament or last will ; IIRIQ'éKW, fragments of commandments or precepts. 2], await, epistles, letters, epistolary correspondence on business. 22, qgs'i/Bw, a collection of praises or hymns. 23, imam, prayer. 24, H, a song; 'qélg'glg, a song of praise, a hymn ; 35%, a satirical song, a satire ; E'QQN, a hundred thousand songs, i. e. a collection of songs. 25, again, chronology or calculation of some events or epochs occurring in the sacred volumes. (181) IV. CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE. § 254. The following short account of some remarkable events, in the history of Buddhism, and in Tibet, is extracted from a work entitled Bai’diirya dkar-po (Easy'fi'ql'fi) written by sDé-srid Sangs-rgyas rgya-mtsbo (i'fifi'NGN'Q‘V'Q'Ng) a regent at Lhassa. (1) He wrote at the beginning of the 12th cycle of sixty years (the Tibetans counting the beginning of the first cycle from 1026 of the Christian aera, and the present year, 1834, being the 28th year of the 14th cycle) consequently at the beginning of l686 A. D. His table expresses the years elapsed from each event up to the time when he wrote. In the following translation, besides this mode of computation, the corresponding year of the vulgar era, in which each event occurred, before or after Christ, has been added. Some explanatory notes have been appended, to which reference is made from the text by the figures in brackets. .1222 Y... 0. “$633 2.1%? A_,,_ a. c. g " qguvrgwqgiq'qrgarq' From the incarnation or birth 4N, fies'l'v of bCliom-ldan hdas (SHA'KYA),... 2647 962 qugq'qw, 24-001 Since he took the religious cha racter, 2619 934 qu'gq'fi'gv Qii/L'gc'a‘p Since he became Buddha, and qgi’rw, 2419a commanded to teach his doctrine (first turned the wheel of the law), 2613 928 g'qrgmfiq'fil'rrngiv'g'fiiw' Since be displayed great prodi g'QIQ'Q'iKl'IIBQI'QN, 2km)? gies and overcame the six Tir t/u'ka teachers, (2) ' 259l 906 SN'fi'Ql'ill'sl/TISQN'Q‘V, Ql—Nvu Since he taught the Kala Cha kra (religious system), (3) 2567 882 fi'RQ'QIN'Q‘R‘V'QN, do. Since he was delivered from a pain (or from his death), do. do. QN'E'WQ'QW'fi/‘a'qW-TBEW' From the time that the rum sgs'agw'w, . . miss rgyud (S. Mala Tantra) was col 182 ) lected (or compiled) by Zla-bzang, a. c. the king of Shambhala, (4) 2566 88l g'mtcmfiqw'w, anew From the death of Zla-bzang, 2564 879 “'N'QgR'KHW'QQGN'QNMH RLHWQ From the birth of Padma hbyung g,nas (pron. Padma jungné, S. Padma Sambhava), (5) 2563 878 s'm's'i'ngq'qsarssw'é‘ga' From the birth of the revered is'alw'qgw'w, was master hjam dvyangs (6) (S. Mary'u ghos’ha) in China, out of the Trik s9ha tree, 2523 3 ' gm ' QIAW ' W. ... 3 Wu From the birth of kLu-sgrub (S. Nagarjuna), (7) ... 2167 482 aa'g'sxrim'ss'snvwm' Since Rigs-ldangrags-pa(8) suc wrimvw, assa ceeded to the throne,in Shambhala, 1963 278 V a v \l V C\ Aft. ns's'sm'u'a'a' 'Kras'rtiq' From the birth of Tho-tho-ri Chr QQl-‘N'JN, . Was gNyan-btsan, the king of Tibet,... 1433 252 V \ V V V V 0“ us's'z-at'wwnw'a ' Q' Since a chest with the treatise unls'q'qw'w, new Zamatog (a religious book), &c. fell from heaven into the court of Tho-t/w-ri, (9) 1354 331 risq'qéwsilw'w, ms From the death of gNyan btsan (or Tho-tho-ri), 1314 371 ststi'rtvt's's'nvfi tgsl' Since the doctrine of endeavour qd'qss'q'gnw'w, 7km; ing perfection succeeded to that of fruits (immediate consequences of good morals), (10) 1067 618 V \ nat'g'qlré'mit'fiat'éwwqwl Since rgya-mtsbo rNam-rgyal at'uno'e'aitq'an'ésm V“ V at'ru' (11) (a king) arrived at Shambhala. a'ill'ssw'w, use: Since the period of403 years, call ed Mekha gya-tso, commenced, (12) 183 ) And since the infidels (or Mu hammadans) entered Makha (Mecca), From the birth of Srong btsan 1063 622 ut'qifiv (swuyzygsiv'w. " was (sgam-bo), (13) 1058 627 \l \l V \ ns's'ris's'mw'w, 7..» s Since the arrival of Kong-elm (a Chinese Princess) in Tibet, (14) 1046 639 si'vq'ng'ss'a'aém, q§nvw, 9015 (or vihar, was built at Lhassa, (15) 1034 65 l V us'é'fi's‘fc'i'uiwrtsaw'w, Ql-l'U From the birth of Khri srong ldé btsan, the master of Tibet or king, (16) 957 728 qR'Qgs'fi/R‘S' 13111611“, G38 From the arrival of Padjtmg (S. Padma Sambhava) in Tibet, 938 747 aww'wvaiéew'w, 0324': Since bSam-yas was built, ... 936 749 fi's‘fs' (ig'uit) IiFiIW'w, goo From the decease of Khrisrong (ldéhu btsan), 899 786 us'Qgc'e'm'simvw, ssa Since Padjungreturned toIndia, 883 802 qul‘i‘é'a'a'slrw,as'srriivw,li'mrqlgsvw, w From the beginning of (a new period or) astronomical calcula tion, 881 804 From the birth of gLang-dar or Langtarma, 824 861 From the birth of Khri-ral (or Ralpachen), 821 864 as'sréiv'ai’w'rtyw'w, Ufl~b Since gLang-dar abolished the (Buddhistic) religion, ... 786 ms'srasvw'w, 899 'UKH Since gLang-dar was murdered, 785 ew's'w'w'sw'qfi’re'm's' Since the Kdla-ehakra (religious WWW, so. 'Uio system) was introduced intoIndia, (l7) 720 184 ) fi‘vququqvgvalva/qvuvgzv Since the beginning of the last “I, 1.17% propagation of the Buddhistic re ligion in Tibet, (18) 714 971 w'im'agcvw, voH From the birth of Atisha, 705 Qfi'u'fi’q'qggcu'w, ssa From the birth of hBrom-ston (or Brom, the teacher), 683 l,002 lwsrewas'ase'a'wwwnm' V \ “ \/ Since the monastery of Great 5N, ... 41110 g,Sol-nag Mung was founded, 670 1,015 u'araq'swasa'ew'm'gmv \ V V From the end of the Me mk/ui w, as? rgya nits/10(or period of 403 years), 66l 1,024 SW'QII V L'qs's'wrw \. \ urr Since the Kala Chakra was gs'e’nw'éw'w. ss introduced into Tibet, and since the lst year of the cycle of 60 years began, 660 1 ,025 a‘tm'xw'u'qigcvw, sew From the birth of Mi-la-ras-pa, 647 1,038 sv'ii'e'sliwv 1 as'i'as'q' From the decease of .dtisha and ng'w, sea the birth of g,Lang rithung-pa,... 633 1,052 rfis'fi'sléq'mwas'qfirt' Since the college (or pillar) of q”: ... \‘vfio Ru sgreng was founded, 630 [,055 m'gq'a‘ee'iw'm'qygw-w, sat From the birth of bLo-ldan shes-rub, the interpreter or trans lator, 628 l ,057 nws'lsfi'a‘s’w'irsc' t N'g'qaq' Since the monastery of g,Sang 'IN, , , , 4,7» phu and that of Sa-skya was found ed, (19) 614 1,071 he's/'s'e'agsvw, 4mg From the birth of Tagpo Ilia rje, ... 608 1,077 Q'as'sil’e'u'rmlrw, sue Since the Gra thang monas tery was founded, 606 W‘as'lt'qlgsw'w, 4-»: From the birth of Ras-chhung Pa: ... 603 (185) N'iQ'flfi'RIIQ'fiq'ill'Qfll-W' was From the birth of Kun-dgah w, Snying-po, the Great Sa-skya (Lama), 595 1090 fié'gs'iw'rw qfiqw'w, I-rufl From the decease of bLo-ldan shes-rob, 578 1107 mn'a‘f'gq'u'qygs'v'w, va From the birth of Phag-mo grub-pa, 577 1103 gn'ua’c'é'wv l fis'aéfllfl' Since the period of ‘more-seeing’ ufi'éqzv'aw, Hen.) being finished, thatof‘deep medi tation' commenced, (20) 567 1118 Mason's-sway. LN" From the birth of gYu-brag-pa, 564 1121 flashy-sway, us» From the birth of Shakya Sri, 560 1125 uuq'ngn'qc'qgcww, I-m (2') From the birth of Nyang, the prince or lord, . . 551 1134 *v‘ets'nimw 1 risq'tv'asr From the decease of Sa-c/llzen, é'a‘a'rv's'narrw, Has (the great Sa-skya Lama,) and since the The! or gDan-sa the! monastery was founded, 1156 at-é'a‘siv'g'nsq'w, L112 Since the monastery of Tshal was founded, 1173 Q'i'ss'rmq-w, a“ Since the ltBri-gzmgmonastery was founded, 508 1177 \1 \ swarm-ram“, a... Since the Stag-lung monastery was founded, 507 1178 "'ii's’r'h'ssavw, sit-1 From the birth of the Great Fa-skya Pun’a'itd, (22) 505 use ss'as'rmq'wv, q... Since Gung-thang (a monastery) was founded, 500 1185 (186) wa'up'a‘sq'fi's's'firlm Since the great Cashmirian nirurg'algsvw, esa Pan’dita (Shukya Sri) arrived in Tibet. And since Kar-ma Paks’lu' was born, 483 l 202 _ v v fibl'fi‘l'fl'b'fiW'RHR'QBfiN' From the birth of g,Tcr-ston q”! - ' $'U'-i Guru ckhos-dvang (the prince of religion, the LAMA teaching hidden treasures), 475 1210 as'as'a‘s’w'ig'mql eqra' Since the gLang-thang mo wq'qil’q'Q'ngr-W'w, eve nastery was founded, and since rGyel-va yang dgonpa was born, . . 474 1211 Qq'i/L'Fléifl 5' is’lv a ism Since the two monasteries at ‘94)2 Byang (Chang) and at rDor were founded, . . 462 Qfi'wl‘i’n'qaniv'q'algsvw, we From the birth of 1161-0 mgon hphags-pa, . , ‘ 452 Qs'atm'qanw'u'rls'rww' v V V Since (as before) he became WCN'Q'E'IIL'QL'QN, V 0 \ V was the Master of the whole Tibet, aw'ac'tilw'uq'aw'a' V V a \l \ Since the Claims-lung ts’hogs Hfiq'w, was pa monastery was founded, . . s'aa'olgcsrw, . sou From the birth of Bu-ston, a'fi'ss'swem'atémgw' From the birth of Ta-si byang MI, 'ifll-l chhub rgyal mtslum, am'a‘sn'a‘siv'em'qgw i vii'r‘t’s' From the birth of Theg ell/ten Marvirii'firgrw, aag ch/zos rgyal; and since Tasi be came the Master of Tibet, 1347 iw'ac'fi' aiw'ir' away, as Since the rTses-thang monas tery was founded, the incarnation (or 1349 ic'e'a'qawy'a'v, sac From birth) of Tsong khapa, (23) 1355 (187) au'ig’s'em'fi’egsw'w, -- a“ From the birth of Tlumg slang A.D~ rgyal-po, 302 1383 sii'st'gq'u'QigW'W. 2134': From the birth of dGe-hdun grub-pa, (24) 1389 V \ QI'JM' D! w'm'is'ats'agw'w, 2&4 From the birth of Shes-rub rin-chben, the great Lotsiiva, (translator or interpreter,) \/ \ V V \ V ic'il'u'as'w'as'am'ass'ar Since the great Tsong-klza-pa fiéKWiRKIQ'HWIWU'JW, 27A established the feast of the great supplication or prayer (to be yearly celebrated at Lassa) ; and since he founded the dGa-ldan monastery, _ 278 1407 Qisat' assw'gw' éw'qsvgrw' From the foundation of the fi'sii’s'u'aw 1 nfi'u'mi/s'u'i’s' hBras-spungs monastery (or con_ as'Qgsw'w, 2”? vent by hjam-dVyanga ell/ms rjé , and from the birth of Karmapa mT/umg an den ldan, , . 271 1414 suw'a‘ss'é’y'évirxd'ai'w'i' Since the foundation of the mu 1 é'ic'a'u'lifilw 151161" Séra monastery, by Byams cbben is'ats'sm'iis'drfiqw'w, Res chhos [7%. The death of the Rev. Tsong-kha-pa; and since Dar ma rin clzhen succeeded to the chair at dGah-ldan, . . 263 1417 “I‘Vi-T'ieliv'wru'é'gvé'qslr Since the gSang siiags mklzar 'I‘V, Ree monastery was founded, 266 1419 SW'QQW'ii'qHs'e'thQgcv From the birth of Du: zhabs qw, -. . 2 {5% nor bzang rgya mts’ko, 264 1421 I vV v q ,V \' “I 8 =1 e awe away, as Since the Nor monastery was founded by those of the Sa-skya sect, 258 (188) sfi'deiw'suw'ee'smq'ewfir' Since dGé-legs dpal-lllan, suc imw'w, 2% ‘ ceeded to the chair at dGah ldan, . . 256 1429 ‘gds'sfi'a‘s’w'é'rma'w, 2'42 Since the Ntilenda monastery was Since founded, the Cit/tab mdo byams 252 I433 tan-81s” 'eatw'fic'miww, 21-10 gling monastery was founded, 250 1435 Q'Q'QMW'Q'em'aée'an'aq' Since Zha‘lu legs-pa rgyal tiriirww, 2&(5 mlshan succeeded to the chair at dGah-ldan, 249 l 436 sqa'QrZ'rgw'i'mE/s'fie'afiaw Since the dPal-hkhor monas IIN, Reg tery’smchhod-rten (S. Chaitya, a shrine or fane), was built, 248 1437 Jim'gwy'ufl'irqgsv Since the birth of Lo-tséua 246 w. We, chhos skyong bzung-po, , , l 439 ne'iiw'us'sm'ewac'qxav Since the astronomical work Wt iw'g’s'maQ-rsfi'iw'u'aésr titled Pad-(lkar zhul lung was Q‘iA'a‘s/N'em'qlgwsfi'm sq' written by leg pa pa, &c. to as aq'fial'sa'fiw'gairnm' certain the lunations and the five WV; ... 26o planets. Since chhos rGyal, the great Lo-tséva was born; and since dGé-hdun grub founded the monastery, called bkra-shir l 445 lhun-po, 240 st'awgs'ésravs'qm \ V \ Since the hBras-yul skyed 238 1447 ""1, 22s tshul monastery was founded, \I \/ V \1 Q Since bLo-gros cbhos skyong E 'EIN'NV'Q‘G'RKIQ'QQ'QL' succeeded to the chair at dGu/t fiqw'q‘v’ 23.2) 1448 ldan, q'w'aw'élrsm'we'mr V\/ “ Since Basso chhos rGyan succeed. l 461 Zaqqu’ 32a ed to the chair at dGuh ldlm, ... (189) :szm's'w's'sss'w, 223 Since the Gong dkar monas tery was founded, 223 1 462 nirrai’n'ss'é'a‘éwfiraarr Since the gSer-mdog-chan w, - - 21s monastery was founded, . . 218 l 467 c. v \ sflw'ac'awg'mfl'i'v, 29H Since the Byams-gJing monas tery was founded, ... 215 1470 it"iz’v'afis'a‘sm'as'ril' Since bLo-gros brtan-pa suc imvw, 27» ceeded to the chair athah-ldan, 214 1471 sfi'qss'gn'aeorv'w. 292 From the decease of dGé-hdun grub, . 212 1473 sil'st's'ari/nguvw. 279 From the birth (incarnation) of dGé-hdun rgya-mtsho, (25) 211 1474 s'sa'sn'rrss'wem'qw Since the rTa-nag thub bstan 'w. Ron) rnam rgyal monastery was founded, 209 147 a’s'ww'susrsm'ss'rir Since seven-lam dpal suc irrrv'siv, 2w ceeded to the chair at dGulz-ldan, 207 1478 iL'SQ'Qfgl-W'w, 98H From the birth of Tslzar Ch/lt’n, 185 1500 gw'qui'gm'qbtl'fitv, 92A Since the Ck/zos-hklaor rGyal monastery was founded, 178 uaw'gq'sua'é‘avc'fi'qgw' From the birth of meas w, 914° grub dpal-gyi Sefige', 150 Rfi'Qsa'Q'wei'qfimw'w, 9% From the decease of dGé hdun rgya-mtsho, 145 1540 ns‘is'swv'sué 'Qgcvw, 7:518 From the birth of bSod-nams rgya-mtsho, (25) 144 1541 wm'as'ssrfi'tv'nss'ssvw, 77° Since he was invited byAlt/nm klum (a Mongol prince), 110 1575 é’iv'qdi'sis'nfiwwv, 70!» Since he erected (or built) the Claims hklwr g,ling monastery,m 109 1576 (190) qa’quo'gwg‘iqanw'wan do From the decease of bSod- "D' nams rgya-mtsbo, 99 1586 fi’q'nq'a'atg'q‘gaw'w, as From the birth (incarnation) of Yon-tan rgya-mls/lo, (25) 98 1587 {Q'EQ'Q'NSI'QSKI'V'QM 1.17 From the demise of Yon-tan rgya-mtsho, 71 1614 Gn'g‘qq'figaq'awg'q'gww From the incarnation of Nag aw, 1.!» dining blo bzang rgya-mtsllo, (25) 70 1615 fiwngvfi’aq'u'é/KIN'JW 1581' Since the period of deep me fiatw'fi/N'NKY'Q‘W, 4w ditation being finished, that of morality (or good moral con duct)was begun, see note, (10)... 67 1618 rq'gmrtg'fililq' Kl' "I! Since, in the beginning of the iwqq'ae'im‘irqu'w, ~50 eleventh cycle, Rigs-ldan Sefigé succeeded to the chair (at dGak ldan), 60 1625 q? arqé‘q. gwfiwfi’yé‘éqtfi’ 1' Since bStan-hdsin c/zhos rgyel grqw, we became the king of Tibet, 46 1639 Gn‘q‘fifiqaqtav ugvfi’evaq' Since Nag dvang bLo bzang fi/cw,§.£.fi’1vglqu, w-l rgya-m tsho became the master of the whole of Tibet, 45 1640 fiéawfiéwwqqq'qw, e2 Since he founded the Potala (residence), (25) 42 1643 / I anvaqué’quqvqug'a'qq' Since Nug-dvang bLo bzang Fin-(@6N, an rgya-mlsliowent to (arrived in) China, (26) 35 1650 gl'fi’q's'tfi’q'fiqlv'qw, ... '4» Since he again returned to (arrived in) Tibet, m 34 1651 (191) fi'qw'df'sil'qr'q" qsiv'q'rq'gi' Thence thirty.four years be- A D' UQ'KI§N'U5'8\l/Kl'N‘H'Q'Qf'fifl'ir' I ing elapsed, in the beginning of acid/N'QI'EI'dsé'fi’ql'il/a'iivllfi' ' the twelfth cycle, in the year, uéq'fi’n 11 (called in Sans. Prabliava, (in Tibetan) Mé-mo Yes, (this) Bai ’durya dkarpohi rtsis dzlii (ground work on computation) was written, 0 1686 Nous To run CHRONOLOGXCAL TABLB. (1.) For the character of this regent vulg. Tieri) see the Alphabetum Tibetanum, by the P. Georgi. He was both a fine scholar and a great politician. He wrote several excellent works, as the Baidu'rya sri'on-po (figqéviq-J) on medicine ; which is the best commentary on the rGyud sde’ bzbi (g? a large volume, translated from the Sanscrit. This work has not been introduced either into the Kali gyur or the Stan-gyur compilation; the contents of both which, in an English translation, Ihave had the honour to present to the Asiatic Society, through Mr. H. H. Wilson. This author compiled the Baidu'rya Karpo, a work on Astronomy, Astrology, &c. (from which the present Chronological Table has been taken; from the Pad/tar Zhal lung (qg'qiql'qq'gq') a work written by Phug-pa-pa mkhas dvang llum gray rgya-mlsho, and Nor bzang rgya-mtslto (quq'q-mnv's-qcvgavg-[pguggcw {1.qa-G.Q.Ni). One of Tunis other works is entitled: gYah-sel (Eth’Q'tGQI) " th: Efi'acer of Stains,” in which he an swers the objections of several learned men,’ who criticised his works. He wrote also the hBe‘l gtam (qfiqyirmaq) political discourses, and some other works. But be distinguished himself especially, as a good politician, in the administration of Tibet, by visiting, sub-incognito, several provinces, and afterwards remu nerating or punishing the officers according to their merits. He concealed also the death of the Dalai Lama for 12, or as some say, for 18 years. He is generally believed, in Tibet, to have been the natural son of that Lama Nag-dvang bIo bzang rgya-mstlto (gxl'g'qq'g'qqq'g'flgv') the 5th of the great Lamas, that are now styled, rGyelva Rin-po cliht‘ (gq'q'iq'fi'g), “ his precious (or holy) Majesty,” or as some call them “ Dalai Lama." The Dalai Lama, upon an invitation to Pekin, from the first Emperor of those Manchus who had (192) conquered China in 1644, paid a. visit to that country, in 1650. His ambition had been gratified with the kingdom of Tibet, as a donation to him from that Mogol prince, who had conquered it in 1640 ; afterwards the Manchus endeavoured to acquire influence in the country through him, which brought so many calamities over Tibet, that the regent had good reason for concealing his death, and thus delivering the kingdom from a continuance of the pernicious domination of the Hierarchy. (2.) At the first rise of Buddhism in Central India, the great antagonists of that doctrine are styled in the Buddhistic works, Tir-thi-kas or Tir-tha-Ira-ras, in Sans.; Mu-slegs-chen or Mu-stegs-pa, in Tib. (g'§|:]a;' 53, or Q-§1r| Ka'h-gyur. (3.) The Ktila Chaltra, religious system, to which so many volumes of the Stan-gyur and other works are devoted, is not mentioned in the really ancient Buddhistic works of India, with the exception of one. This system in fact was first introduced into India towards the end of the tenth century (in 965), and afterwards, via Kashmir into Tibet. See Journal As. Soc. of Bengal, vol. ii. p. 57. (4.) The K a'la Chalcra doctrine of Adibuddha was delivered by SHA'l(YA, in his 80th year, at Shrt Dhanya ltataka, (Cattak in Orissa,) called in Tib. dPal-ldan hBras-spungs (§L1Ql"H 3l'Q§‘V'§'Ci\I, “ the noble city, called accumulated rice,”) upon the request of zla bzang (3'-q'3;',) pron. vulg. Ddzdng or Da'va' Zdngpo, S. Chandra Bhadra (or Soma Bhadra P) a. king of Shambha la, a. fabulous country or city in the north beyond the Jaxartes, who in his 99th year visited SuA'xYA there, in a miraculous manner. Upon his return home, he compiled in thecourse of thenext year, the rTsa-rgyud (g'%1;, S. Mu’la Tantra), in accordance with what he had heard from SBMKYA, and two years afterwards he died. This work is the source of all the subsequent voluminous compilations, increased modifications and interpolations. In the M Illa Tdntra, SHAIKYA foretels to Dazang 25 kings, who will successively reign at Shambhala, each for a hundred years. The six first of them are called Chhos-kyi rgyel-po i\]'§'§<),]'L\l/, S. Dharma Rajd, a religious king or patron of religion) and the others are styled Rigs-lden, S. Kulilta, “ the Noble or Illustrious." He foretells also that after 600 years from that date, (or of that of his death) Rigs-ldan Grays-pa (;i:K]&j'l§a;'15|l:|i\]'q,) S. Kulika Kirti, “ the cele bl-Med nuble one ;” (the Epiphanes of the Greeks P) will succeed to the throne at Shambhala, and that 800 years afterwards, the kla klo grill vulg. Ldlo, S. Mlechha, or Muhammadan religion, will rise at Makha (Mecca). There are in the subsequent interpolated and greatly increased compilation many stories on the rise, destructive progress, and final decline of Muhammadanism, and the glorious re-establishment of Buddhism in (193) vthe north. It Would be interesting to ascertain how the doctrine taught at Cuttack in Orissa, was brought beyond the Jasartes to Shambltala, or what reason the Buddhists had for inventing this story. Since in the Ml'da Tantra (8g!) SHA’kYA explicitly declares, in the prophetical form, that the above-men tioned Rigs-Man Grays-pa, 810., will be of his own Sba'lrya race, and of the nation of Da'za'ng, the natural interpretation is that they both were of the Scythian nation, or of the Sacse of the ancients. Two of the principal slokas, touching upon this important historical point, are here inserted in Tibetan, verbatim as they have been quoted from theg'gjgg rTsa-rgyud, by Suresltamali, in the same work from which the 13 dates for thevdeath of S‘hakya have been taken. See Surcsltamati’s qgaygiw, &c_ 51 figs, g'q§'%§,qpv I QEN'EWQR‘V'QWI so 11 61"Q5'W'8'y1'nsfi'51’1 11 sc's’s'mw'é'iis'i’a's 1 st'sssrv'a‘i'rtsrrsrrv'u'i 11 eu'g'q'div's'nrogc' 11 Qi'il'fibl'fl's'ai’si 1 1sv'3'qs'Q3s'QEK1'is'snc' 1 Wire, si'isw'sgs's' 1 1 gs' (or ‘13?) =1' a'rtss'li’s'iqw'md’ 11 Literal Translation. From this year, after 600 years, for the maturation of the hermits, (S. Ris’ln's, or of religious persons,) will be born, at Shambllala, hJam dvyangs mi bdag Gags-pa, (a king, or lord of men,) called the celebrated one (an incarnation of) Manyju Gbos'ha, (he with a sweet voice.) The lady (Tib. sgrol-ma; Sans. Tara) of this (king) is (or will be called) the great goddess (Uma, i. e. an incarnation of that goddess,) his son or the young prince is (or will) (be an incarnation of) Pad-hdsin hjig-rten dvang, (S. Padmapa'ni Loke’shvara.) “ the lord of the world, holding a lotus in his hand ;” they will be born in my own Shdlrya race, and in your own nation, Dazang ! (5.) This is the first record of Padrna Sambhava's incarnation, who, in the 8th century after Christ, was again born, in a miraculous manner, out of a lotus or water-lily, at O'dlleyana, in the western part of India, as a celebrated Guru. Upon an invitation by Khrisrong déhu tsan, the king of Tibet, and a great patron of Buddhism, he visited that country in the beginning of the 9th century, and remained there for many years ; he wrote several works, that are still extant under his name. His memory is greatly respected in the present day by the Tibetans, who call him Urgyen Rinpochllé (y'aq'iq'fil'g), and the most ancient religious sect in Tibet, after his name, is called Urgyenpd (g'gq'q), followers of Urgyen. (6.) This hjam dvynngs, (Q5u'ggqav; S. Manyju Ghos’ha, “ sweet voice,”) is the same with hjam-dpal, (qgar'gqm ; S. Manyju Sri, “ the mild noble one.") He is a metaphysical personage, a pattern or beau-ideal, of wisdom ; also a spiritual son of Sluikya. (7.) 111.14 sgrub, (7,1 'gq', S. Ncigmy'una, that forms or makes perfect the Nu'gas or the serpent race) ~v ~a (194) is a real personage, born 400 years after the death of Shakya, from Brahman parents, in the country of Béla or in Bidarbha. He turned Buddhist, and was educated in central India, in the Nalenda convent. He was a spiritual son of MANYJU Sm, the God of Wisdom. The first philosophical system of Buddhism is attributed to him. He is respected as a second rGyelva, (qu'q S. Jina ;) he is the founder or parent of the Madkyamilra philosophy. There are many works, under his name, in the Stan-gyar upon several subjects. (8.) For Rigs-ldan Grays-pa, (iqiv'lfiq'lgxltv'q,) see note 4. (9.) Thothori is stated, in the rGyel rabs gsal-vahi mé-long, ( Q; Qi'rqtq'lqwqpqa'i'cfi’c, “ a clear mir ror of royal pedigree," a historical work,) to have reigned 500 years after gNya-kllri tsan-po, (qqufivq 3 8'17, the first king of Tibet, who originated from the Sha’kya Litsabyi race at Vaishdli, (Tib. Yangs-pa-chan, wqtqvq'5q, the ample city,) the modern Allahabad, or the ancient Praydga. He kept his residence at Yambu lha, (or bla) sgang, UN'B'Q (or fl'flc‘), where there are still some plastic images of the ancient kings with some other antiquities. Under his reign. there fell a chest from heaven, containing a small volume of a religious tract on Buddhism, (part of the Kah-gyur,) a holy shrine, and some other sacred things. No one could read the volume ; but a voice was heard from heaven that after so many generations (in the 7th century) the contents should be made known. The king paid every respect to that heavenly gift, and, by its blissful, influence, he lived 120 years. (10.) The duration of the doctrine or religion established by Shdkya is difl'erently stated in different works of the sacred volumes. As for instance, 500, 1,000, 1,500, 2,000, 2,500, 3,000, and 5,000 years. The first (500) has been applied by some to the time of Kam'ska, 400—500 after the death of dekya, when the Buddhists had separated themselves into 18 sects, under four principal divisions, when there arose among them many disputes about various points, and when there was made a third compilation of the Buddhistic doctrine. The last (5,000 years) is according to the speculation of Dans’hta Se'mz, and other Indian Buddhis tic writers, in the Stan-gyur volumes, in the 8th, 9th, 8tc. centuries. They calculated the duration of the End dhistic religion thus : 1, QQN'Qa' ways; or Qgiq'ga'szv, hBras-buki bstan-pa, or hBras-buhi dus, the time of the wonderful effects of the doctrine for immediately becoming perfect or possessed of supernatural powers. This period of 1,500 years commenced with the death of Shakya, and was again divided into three smaller ones, each of 500 years, according to the three different degrees of perfection. In the first period, upon hearing his doctrine, some became immediately possessed of superhuman powers, or overcame the enemy, became a dGra bChom-pa, gay'qgu'q ; S. Arhan. In the second, many, though less perfect, proceeded unhindered in (195) their course to perfection, so as not to turn out of theright way, i.e.they became phyir mikongva, gl'fi'élq'q S. Anligrimz', that turns not out of his commenced race or course. In the third, though less perfect, yet there were many that entered into the stream, i. e. became rGyun-du zhugs-pa éq's'gmq'q, S. Shrota panna, one that has entered the stream (that will carry him through life to felicity). Q, gq'qfi'ngq'q or go'q'qa'fbw, sGrub-pahi bStan-pa, or sGrub-palu' dus, that period of the Buddhistic doctrine, in which yet many make great exertions to arrive at perfection. This period contains again 1,500 years, and is divided into three smaller ones, each of 500 years, according to the three diminishing degrees of diligent application. They are called rgq-aré'q' yfiqvfi'ng'Rz. I aq.[3uw.§vfi’u.u, "my mthong, ting-ge' hdsin dang, tshul kbn'ms kyi sgom-pa, the exercise or practice: 1, of high speculation ; 2, of deep meditation ; and 3, of good moral conduct. 3. gags“ Lung-gi-dus, i. e. that period of 1,500 years of the Buddhistic doctrine, in which the sacred volumes are yet read and explained, though the precepts which they contain are little followed. This period, according to the contents of those books, (read or studied in each respected period,) is sub-divided into the following three = l, wi’ am i 2' NQ/‘ér I 3, Qs‘rl'n'nsfl'ss'fi'sw, 1, "INN-P“; 2’ m1”, "’4; 3 hDul-va, gsum Lung~gi dus, i. e. l, the period, in which the metaphysical works are studied; 2, in which the Su’tras or common aphorisms ,- and 3, in which only books on the discipline of the religious men, and on the rites and ceremonies are read. 4. fiqw'éaq'Q‘EQ'qfi' 51v, rTags tsam hdsin-pahi dus, that period of 500 years, in which, though learning and good morals have declined, yet some signs of the Buddhistic religion are still to be found, as the dress of priests, holy shrines, relics, offerings, and pilgrimages to holy places. (1 1.) This pretended king's arrival at Shambluzla, in 622, has some coincidence with Yequjird, the Persian king’s taking refuge in the same country; for it is aflrmed, that this prince, upon the fall of Seleucia, and the conquest of Persia by the Arabs, in 636 retired into Transomna or Fergluma. (12.) How these terms: mé, Ink/Mb, rgya~mlsko express the number of 403 years is explained in p. 155 of this Appendix. If we add these 403 years to 622, the first yea,- of the Hegira, we have exactly the year 1025, whence with 1026 commences the first year of the cycle of 60 years of the Tibetans. (13.) Srong tsan Gambo is the most celebrated king of the Tibetans, on account of his long and mild administration, his political wisdom, and of his having first laid the foundation of Buddhism in Tibet. In the (196) Mani-kabum, (ar'ih-qiqq'qgar, ma-n'i bkuh hbum, “ a hundred thousand precious commandments,") a histo torical work attributed to him, there are detailed accounts respecting Buddhism, and its introduction into Tibet; the circumstances of his marriages with the two princesses, first of Nepal, and afterwards of China; and of the religious establishments made by those ladies, and by himself. (14.) Kongju or Kongchu is the name of that Chinese princess, whom Srong tsan Gumbo had married. In the Muni-kubum it is told, that, when this Tibetan king sent his plenipotentiary (called bLon mGur, fi’ayaqql) to China to demand the hand of that princess, he met the envoys of several foreign princes arrived there for the same purpose. The princess' father desired that she should be married to the king of Magudhu, the reli. gious king in India. Her mother preferred the Ta'jik (Persian) prince, the wealthy king of the West. Her brother commended the prince of the Hurs (Turks) ; but she by her own accord wished to be married with Qe’mr, (irql, Gésar,) the warlike king of the North. The envoy of the Tibetan king at last succeeded in obtaining the princess by address. (15.) This college (Bikur or Vihur) was built by that princess, whom Srong tsan Gumbo had married from Ne'pul. She on account of her being first married (or having first passed the lintel or threshold) pretended to have precedence before the Chinese princess. There were many disputes between them. (16.) Klm' srong de'hu tsan was an excellent king ; he made many useful regulations, and having invit ed into Tibet Shanta raxitu ,- (in Tib. Zhivuh-htsho, fi'q'Qg/a) but vulg. called Budhisutu, a learned man of Bengal, and upon the recommendation of this Pundit, also the great Guru Pudmu Sambhavu, qg'ng vulg. PMqu ,- he permanently fixed the Buddhist religion by founding Sumyé, (gnu-run], bsam-yag,) and other convents and colleges; by establishing a religious order with munificent endowments; and by making ar rangements for the translation of Sanskrit works, by Indian Pundits and Tibetan Lotsdvds, (interpreters or translators,) whom he caused to be fully instructed in Sanskrit. In the 8th and 9th centuries, under this king, and his sons, Mune' tsunpo and Mali]: tsunpa, and his grandsons, Kbri de' srung tsan, Kkri-ral or Ralputken. this religion greatly flourished, till in the beginning of the 10th century, Lung durmu oppressed, and endea voured entirely to abolish it ; for which reason he was murdered by a priest, (17.) For the Kdlu Chakrui (Dus-hkhor, Squp‘s’ 1,) see note (3) also (4), (18.) There are two periods of the propagation of Buddhism in Tibet, called the anterior and the pos terior; that began with Srong tsung Gumbo, in the 7th century, and lasted till the end of the 10th; this (197) commenced with the eleventh century, and still continues. In the first period, there were no different religious sects. They who still keep the ancient rites and ceremonies, and have some peculiar manual or symbolical works of that age, are now called, in the Tibetan, Nyigmapa, (axl'q'gw a follower of the ancient Buddhistic religion, or Urgyenpa, a disciple of Urgyen or Padma-sambhava, and they are very numerous, especially in those parts of Tibet that lie near to Népal and other part of India. In the second (or posterior) period, in the llth century, in the time of Atisha, (called by the Tibetans Jovo or Chovo Atiska, the lord Alisha.) a learned man of Bengal, by the endeavours of Bromston and some other zealous and learned Tibetan religious persons» Buddhism, that had been nearly abolished in the 10th century, commenced again to revive in Tibet. This celebrated Pundit, upon repeated invitations, at last visited that snowy country, going first to Guge' in Kari, (5'51' in aqq' £31,) and afterwards to Utsang, where he remained till his death, in 1052. Bromston, his pu pil, founded the Rareng (:35: Ra-sgreng) monastery (still existing), and with him originated the Kadampa sect, from which afterwards issued that of Gélulrpa by Tsoiikbapa. About this time there arose several religious sects, in Tibet, for the names of which see p. 175 of the Grammar. And for the date of the foundation of several monasteries or conveuts, see the preceding Chronological Table. (19.) The Sa-skya monastery and residence, in the province of Tsang (alga), founded in 1071, is now also celebrated for its library of ancient works in Sanskrit and Tibetan. We will make hereafter no remarks on the birth or death of any religious person or Lama here recorded; or on the foundation of any convent or monastery; they will occur frequently in the following pages. It is sufficient to have given here their names in Tibetan and Roman character, with the corresponding Christian dates. (20.) For this term, see note (10). (21.) Sha'kya Shrz', a celebrated Pundit of Cashmir, who, in the beginning of the 13th century, about the time of Mahammed Gori's conquests, was in Central India ; but afterwards retired to Tibet. He remained there, wrote several works, and assisted the Tibetans in the translation of Sanskrit books. (22.) This is the celebrated Sa-skya Pandit, of whom there are many works. He, and his successor (a nephew) Grogonplmgs-pa, (QISY'NIEI/JI'QUKW’UJ were greatly patronized by the Emperors of the Mongol dynasty, especially by Kublai Khan, who granted the whole country of Tibet to Phags-pa. (23.) T sonkhapa (called also blo bzang grags-pabi dpal fil'qzq'wlqw'qa'gqq, S. Sumati lo’rti shrf) is greatly respected by the Tibetans and Mongols, especially by the Ge'lukpa sect, of which he is the founder. There are many of his works extant; the most celebrated is that of Lam rim clihenmo, (may " the large work on the gradual way to perfection.” The great feast of general prayers, or supplication, established by him, is still yearly celebrated at Lassa, in the 15 first days of the new year, (commonly in February with (198) I the new-moon.) There are in the Gdldan monastery, founded by him, now about 2,000 religious persons, and to the chair still continue to succeed the most learned doctors, from the Séra or Braspung monasteries, under the title of mkhan-po, (aqzq'fil; S. Upa'dhydya,) a principal or abbot. (24.) dGé hdun-grub, is a celebrated Lama, whofounded the great convent of Tesln' Ihun-po,(q5]'alq"g q'fi’, bkra-shis Hum-110,) where now also there reside about 2,000 religious persons. He is the first of the Tibetan Lamas, to whom this title rGyelva (Qty-q, S. Jinn) has been applied. The present great Lama of Lassa, Tshul-klzrims rgya-mtsha (iqpfiwq'gvuév, “an ocean of morality") is the 10th among those rGyelvas \9 whom the Mongols and some Europeans call also Dalai Lama. (25.) dGé-hdun rgya-mtslzo is the second among those Lamas styled rGyelva. The names of the others, down to the present Great Lama at Lassa, are as follows; 3, bsod-nams-rgya mlslm, (qu/g'quav'g'aqg» who upon an invitation by Allan Kimma Mongol prince, visited him; 4, Y on-tan rgya-mtslzo, q'gq'g'aqii) 5, Nag dvang bIo bzang rgya-mtslw, (mqququaqgwii) This is that Great Lama, who in 1640, founded the hierarchy of the Dalai Lamas, at Lassa, (four years before the conquest of China, by the Mant chus.) It was upon the solicitation of this ambitious man that a Mongol prince conquered Tibet, and after wards made a_ present of it to him. The ancient palace of the kings of Tibet, upon the Red Hill or moun tain,(dmar-po ri, gang slain) an eminence near Lassa, was now rebuilt, increased with many buildings for a religious establishment, and converted into a residence of the rGyelva Rin-po chke’, (sq'q'iq'zll'§; Hi: precious Majesty,) and was called Potala, from the name of an ancient city, on an eminence, at the mouth of the Indus, (called in Tib. S'Qéq, Gru Izdsin, “ a receiver of boats or ships, a harbour," which is a literal translation of the Sanskrit Potala, now called Tata or Tatta,) where was the residence of Chenresi, lap q§|qiqquwgq ; spyan ras gzigs dvang playug, S. Amlokitéshvara) the great patron saint of the Tibetans, and whence he is believed to have visited Tibet. (26.) For his visit to China, see note 1. After the death of this Lama, under his pretended regenera tions or new incarnations, Tibet has been visited by many calamities. The names of his successors are as follows : 6, Rin-chken Tshangs dvyangs rgya-mtsho, (iq'éq'iqw'ggtw'g'flgg) 7, bLo bzang skal ldan rgymmtsko, (fil.qaq.fiqtqaqvavugv;) 8, bLo bzang hjam dpal rgya-mtslm, ( él'qac'qgu'fiqoygwgg) 9, Lung rtogs rgya-mtsko, (cgq'alqw'g'flgo 10, Ts/lul klirims rgya-mtsho (éqyfgaq'av'a'ygj Note. Their distinguishing names are those immediately set before rgya-mtsho ,- the rgyelva, blo-bzang, and some others, are sometimes added, and sometimes omitted. (199) V.—EPOCH OF THE DEATH OF SHAKYA, According to diferent authorities. § 255. Since in the Tibetan books there occur several passages containing predictions attributed to SMkya, respecting the years of the duration of his doctrine, and of its in troduction into such and such a country ; (for instance, that after 2,500 years from his death, it will be propagated in a country inhabited by red-faced men ; which passage has been applied to the Tibetans, by a celebrated teacher in China, in the 8th century,) several Tibetan learned men have endeavoured,on different occasions, to fix the date of his birth and death. But there are so many discrepancies in the sacred volumes, and in the commen taries, that they cannot be reconciled. I beg leave therefore to add here, in Tibetan and English, the various dates assigned for the death of Shdkya, taken from a small work, consistingof 31 leaves,titled bSlan-rlsis hdod sbyin gier-bum, (nga'ilw'qi'a'gq'nfirgu, “ Reckoning or computation respecting the doctrine of the Buddhis!s,”) or“ Treasure- Vessel yielding whatever one wishes,” written by rlllog hBrug Lha-duang bLogros, (&h'ng'g'sqq'fil'Q/NQ or according to his Sanskrit name, Suréshamati, one of Pndmakérpo's disciples. He wrote in the beginning of the 26th year of the tenth cycle of 60years of the Tibetan era, (commencing with 1026 of the Christians,) which year is called Nanda in Sanskrit, and dGah-va (RKIQ'H) in Tibetan, corresponding to 1591 of on r era; this author computes the years elapsed from the death of Shikya, according to different authorities, as follows: 9 gwgqvg’q'qjq'fiwfi’a' """l’iiiiiiéi’" 1. According to the followers m" “""fié‘ll of 15961 i . QEWQI ] afflqé‘vgqgqug Sron-btsang sgam-po, the religious navgqv ‘ ... $072 king, there have elapsed four thou sand and twelve years, (I) 4012 2422 2 SQ'LI'LIF?'E§'QKIN'QII 2. According to the followers of Qi'sa'i’s'ass'ae' if'rxes' Nelpa Pan’dita, (2) there have $11? I has elapsed three thousand seven hundred and thirty-eight years, 3738 2|48 (Hereafter the number of past years in words, will be omitted in English.) (200) a Iv'g'll i'fifi‘sKW'QITfiW' 3. According to the followers of Years V (l\ V before J . C. s s'nss'ns'srs'ws' I avfiH Sa-skyu Pan’dila, (3) there have elapsed, _ . 3725 2135 s ssv'u'si‘ ‘WQI' ssw' 4. According to the followers of V \ on sfl'ss'qss'qe'sl' Upu losal (dvus-pa blo gsal,) (4) . 3729 2139 ss'ifc' H sfi'st'Qfiwé'swv' I 321219 5. According to the followers of a V V 011 asl'sfi'ss'flé'afl'q'ivq' I 20100 dGé-hdzm hphel, (5) 1310 s iqss's'm'm'giv' \l "a \l 6. According to the (fabulous) slur Q1 1 swig/w as" 115' (3' narration from the Sandal Lord (an Slaw'iQI/§'I Ill 2392 image of Shékya made of that scented wood), (6) 2342 752 v sn'an's'ss'so'ssv V C\ 7. According to the followers Q11 fiw'i’s'iw'qe's'sss' of U-rgyen-pu, (the Grub-thob ; S. rife: . . 22\'¢Q Siddha,) he that has arrived at per fection, (7) ... 2243 653 \ aqei'ss'quc'nfiw'fi' 8. According to the followers QEW'QII fiw's’c' qs' “751w both of Shékyu Slm' and Nam d’s' I 291‘s bzung, 2136 546 o mad/1' urnnc's’m 9. According to the writers on B's/sat W'dmw' s‘s'gru the Kala Chakra system, as gYung ss'fl'wrfifi'qfis's's'fl' stun, Bu-ston, dPul-legs don-grub, SFW'WJW'QIIaW'iIIG'qé" and as Padmalairpo formerly ns'qss's'au'q'fi’s'r .. 2$Uo taught, (9) on 2470 9° guru: £w' sii’m 10. According to the followers m'sm'smv'qss'nswé' of these three : Jo flung-pa, Chhos swan assess mGon, rNum-rgyel grags bzang, fil'Iiss'iv/s' itkv (10) .2427 837 'n aware and? 11. According to the followers of ww'smwats' sliver I dPul-ldan bLumu bsod-nams rgyel deli/K'Iie'i'gs'iv’s'r 274%5 mtsbun, (11) .. 2166 576 (201) ,2 3,1,“? 3’1. “:5. 12. According to the followers 53' av wrrqm'ss'ssv of the Pad-dkar zlzal lung work, on far some" ne'fi’s'afi' written by Pkug-pa-pa nor bzang iii/w 9's r qgn'lrlm'fl'Wrifd' awuu rgya-mtsho, (l 2) 2474 884 13. According to Padmakérpo’s any“. 5.“.chiwwga. final decision, and as Suréshamati lG'QsLKW'Ql l fivi'sgq'qy himself taught, (13) ... 2650 1060 Q'IIQ'QJ'G' l 34-,Ho To the above enumerated dates may be added that of sDé-srid sangs-rgyas rgya-mtslzo, as it has been stated before, in the Chronological Table, §. 254. Therefore, a» fi's'é“ iiiRWW' 14. According to the Bui’dzirya Mr a mid qss' qis'w'a dlcar-po work, written by Sangs sae'vlrfi’fi' seven 13' rgyas rgya-mtsho, the regent of §WII§EI§W ua'flill' 67%,“ Tibet, in the beginning of the first "um I fiw' é'c'sg ns'ge' year, called Fire-hare, of the 12th sensed? r . . 2H4“! cycle of sixty years, (in the begin ning of 1686 of the Christian aera,) there have elapsed two thousand five hundred and sixty-seven years, (14) 2567 882 It may be remarked, that all these dates differ from the epoch assumed for the death of Gotama by the Burmese, the Siamese, the Cingalese, and other nations professing the Buddhist faith. A comparison of these several authorities will be found in the Calcutta Oriental Magazine for 1825. They all agree in making the nibban (nirvan) occur in the year 544 B. 0.; and yet from the several occurrences of the life of their saint, as quoted in their Chronological Tables, it is evident they allude to the same personage whom the Chinese and some of the Tibetan authorities give the date 1027 B. C. It is impossible to reconcile the two in any way, and their discrepancy throws doubt on the real epoch of the life and writings of the author of one of the most extensively difl'used religions on the face of the earth. (202) Notes (to the diferent eras of the death of Shdkya). (1.) This date is founded on the story of the wanderings of an image of Shdkya, from one place to another, commencing with the abode of the gods, remaining in each for 500 years, till it was taken away from Otantrapuri (in Gangetic India) by the Turks, and carried afterwards to China, whence, in the 7th cen tury, it was brought to Tibet, by Kongcho, a Chinese princess, married by Srongtsan Gambo ,- since which time, there were elapsed upwards of 800 years, till 1591, when Suréshamati wrote this treatise. See note 14 of the Chronological Table. (2.) Nelpa. Pandita. N ot stated for what reasons. (8.) This date is founded on a prediction by Shékya, that his doctrine would continue for 5,000 years, and would undergo such and such changes during certain periods (of 500 years each). See note I0, Chronolo gical Table. (4.) This reckons only four years more than the former. (5.) This is founded on a calculation by some religious persons from Li.yul, who visited the seven con vents founded by Mésaktsom ($;1\]'ws]',ia{) a Tibetan king, in the 8th century. (6.) This date is founded on the story of the wanderings of an image of Sandal-wood of Shaikya, according to Chinese records. (7.) This is derived from a calculation made at Samyé (‘q4\]fl"!Q‘R]) two days journey from Lassa, alarge convent, by the Guru Urgyen (or Padma Sambhava), in the 8th or 9th century. (8.) This is derived from a calculation, made at Sol-nag thang pa chhé (§fq'q1:|'az;'fi'vg) a convent not far from Lassa, by Pan’ chhen Shzikya Sim‘ of Cashmir, in the first half of the 13th century. See note 21, Chronological Table. (9. 10, ll, 12.) These are founded on predictions by Shélcya in the Kaila Chakra, Tantra, (Du: h/char ,-gyud (5au'Q|1\s/;_'%g) See note 4 Chronological Table. (l3.) This date is according to Padma Carp0’s latest opinion; formerly he also supported the date found ed on the Kala Chakra system. (l4.) This date is of great authority, from the celebrity and great research of that regent as a writer. (203) VI.—-INTRODUCTION T0 ran LITHOGRAPHED Paces. § 256. That the learner of the Tibetan language may acquire by himself a full knowledge of the syllabic scheme, both in the large and small characters, and of the several kinds of letters used among the Tibetans, the following 40 lithographed pages have been added to this Grammar. From p. l to 29, is contained a syllabic scheme of the Tibetan language, in four columns, being an alphabetical table of the consonants, combined respectively with the five vowels (zi, i, u, é, 0). In the first column stand the Tibetan capital characters, follow ed each by the intersyllabic point or sign. No. 2, contains the same expressed in Roman characters; but here, for brevity’s sake, the dash, comma, or intersyllabic point (-) is omitted. No. 3, is the same in book-letter or small characters, together with the intersyllabic signs. No. 4, the same in running-hand, together with ditto. Note 1, p. 6, No. 3, in the Tibetan character, there is a mistake, gu, phu, bu, mu, being written, instead of gyu, phyu, byu, myu, which the learner is requested to correct accordingly as those consonants have been written in their other respective syllables, or as they have been properly expressed in the running-hand, No.4. Since every simple or compound consonant occurs five times, the student may, elsewhere, easily correct any small error in the shape of the letters. The asterisk or little star (*) added to some of the Tibetan capital characters, indicates that such syllables have not occurred in the Dic tionary. Note 2, for further information on this scheme, see the Gram mar, p. 3, &c., the pro nunciation of the Tibetan letters; and p. 12-l8, the abstract of the orthography and orthoepy of the Tibetan language. The reason why, in the abstract (of the Grammar), p. l2_l6, the general number of letters (preceding the vowel) in the whole scheme, amounts to 209, and here only to 208, is, that in the lithographed scheme, the Z1, &c. rmya, &c. has been left out. But this is of little consequence, since this compound letter occurs only in two or three words. Further, in p. 30, have been exhibited the initial signs, commas, and the intersyllabic points or marks, as they are used with the capitals; ditto with the small characters, p, 3l—35, the Bémyik; p. 36, 37, the Bmts’ha characters, and the Tibetan numerical figures ; and,lastly, p. 38-40, theLénts’lia characters, (or pointed variety of the Devamigari alphabet’ ,~(294) &c.) have been represented, that the learner may see how the Tibetans write the San skrit in their own characters, and may distinguish Tibetan and Sanskrit works accordingly. For a collection of Devanégari alphabets, comprising all the varieties of this character, found in Tibet and Népal, see Mr. B. H. Hodgson’s “ Notices of the Languages, Literature, and Religion of the Bauddhas of Népal and Bhot,” in the 16th vol. of the Asiatic Researches, p. 420. The Tibetan alphabet itself, as has been noticed in other places, is stated to have been formed from the Devandgari prevalent in Central India in the seventh century. On com paring the forms of its letters with those of various ancient Sanskrit inscriptions, particu larly that at Gya, translated by Mr. (now Sir Charles) Wilkins, and that on the column at Allahabad, translated by Captain Troycr and Dr. Mill, a striking similitude will be observ. ed. There are also close analogies between the latter alphabet and the square form of the Pali character which is acknowledged to be the original of the Ceylonese, Burmese, Siamese, and other varieties now used in the south-eastern countries. The Pali is indeed called Magadha, or of Central India, whence the Bauddha religion and literature of all these countries was derived. I abstain from making any lengthened remarks on this subject here, but the circumstance noticed may help to fix the epoch of incriptions in this peculiar‘ type of the Devamigari alphabet. 4 SYLLABICSCHEME or §3=aq| [,9 WM] CAPITAL LETTERS I. .7fie flu)? Jeni/Wk ‘Mz aQ/fiade/ JV‘l. JV"2. "l . N"I 11, . "1 ‘. "I V 1 -_ " a ’“ ' ‘ v. ’ ’ m. rq = Hm [dd [6/111 lulu: lr/m. , . \. 6. \. V __ ' g, ‘\ \r _ I _. _ _, _ g . g . S’- &. R i z "ya "f" nye Info. _-6- 3- g; %- 5 I -_- Mia (1.." (a. an: as... a. g- 5 g I =. r/i/m (Mi c/z/za (Mel all... \5 Essssweeee o \a a ‘0 i .' ‘ .1 e ' a . ‘\.a a . a,‘. 7g y e_ a?“ ’i‘/‘ "ya ' ".1 g 1w i . K.s a . f \. 71 _- ’ a, t " m " "’ . - 10 [0 ‘\ \ . ‘\. . ‘. .‘f _ ‘ . ‘\. - \ - Vi = na, 1142 1141, 711' no. 12 ll i a 1 a a l THE TIBE TAN LANGUAGE \SM] in MR ]A 1%.] sh...” "D a.“ sm M.\ me. A[ C R A C T S E a m a 1. “smelflw [away-1‘71 .r’B. Ma‘s/Ff” book: Jme. ,lituuuhfl hand R» a m 'h .\ \M. m\ as. m sateeeeaaei (a \w a a,( ‘7‘ Q F qqamxswoqmfi? a “\mmflswuxmhv q. \m a... it \@ a dot C Q a 5“ . .\ \w, at 2 ,4< Q 2t an? qs %i q“; film/1w m w 1W. m M w. a M W, m la z.” N M 0 WNW/um .m m M w ,W .4,“ m ,M w, M ,1, 4,. a b a w. [M m m m M w m MM w m a m m M u firm/1m .W m w PM, w w u ,m w n a 1m a ,m. b m m m W 1W W 1m u ,M w m /.w m M M. a mmM/m/Ja 1m I! II‘II.I|||'| III!!! I! vq 5 g 45 “a “5 Va .Y@1 K; vnfi vW {A vm\ we.“ .YN :7 VW m mqu m c\.qh\wh££é\m¢\fi#\wNLTMTWQ 5% w $€€§$w€€m€fivi€Wwfiwwmflfinvw» \q \q 3 \a 3 2 $5 $1me 3 a \w m? \N 3| \N $7 \w q¢¢w£$é.%.fiaw.wxw,nw5w 6 r a’ if V 29‘ 18 a a yuan” 2 v 26‘ awn” [wuflfif/mvwmwwwwwvuvh HILL! NVLHHLL HDVLIDNV'I ' Iv)» 6% nw\) [laws $40101;qu )71 =\_111\ 11 a 151 b'vm n N, H51 )Q .6\ ’6“ )Q)n3\) =3nn gum '9 (5 H) \ID = &vu 5 =‘LYIL mayw I“) am MD wm\) 9 m 3% at; {5g ’9 =11 A '5 ’9» {3p »g$\ \& =‘12L 3’7"!" “W3 »§ Q» s? ,i) ="3-L éé ‘9"v )‘4‘ v2 5% sq) =‘1‘2_ g“? M “9 Q '3 =“li‘1-L g“) i’fi ( a» \E vi )9 vi) =‘uz gm; (a(‘I‘ {D ab m, x.\ \LL = $5» 3 , =""' @pw ( )h1 _ 7Q: )m \&) .94; t; S\ ,1) “i; = 27* am =‘L"’\ 25"" 9 54i 16’ \g/ n) a; “Lb: tip-K“ 59 (W J H" ,Q ,G\ six at) )T‘ “ilk = ‘27?” (*9 z =‘1‘Z\ 1;"? “J (7 )nn vy; aWIR mi) 1h“=\__\ 1n“ [5] SYLLABIC SCHEME OF Capital Letters, 11. The Seven Leda/w f/m/ 3 l 1 1 . 2 ‘\. g . E \ . l ‘f I _ _ kya W ' ‘3”! @6 ' k’y'). 3332 3A g ,_ g‘\.‘\. g _- \ _ v E V I =__ Mya a . Wu a Myv( c', , l7 3/ g), g gr, 3 I yy y! ya J1 1y i Q, . . = lay“ _ c7 35 i ‘\ \ V' - » ' g v g v g ' 3/ ' 3/ I = My (L #7 L / J/ a {I / J/ a? /J / a l" 36‘ 6‘ ‘\ - ' g Q 5] Q g! I g I g I = T (l Q L 4% (l 6 I 8 6 .W ~ 57 7 g . ’R. 381/ g ~ ' g\ - g I = m a a r '9‘ i a“ m y. e' "a" . //1. Thflerkm Leda/'6' Mat 38 7 t 'fi- ' I = in» bi KW: If're' in]. 3'9 2 I‘fi ‘ a ' I‘g ' I3, I = M Pa. ‘1' Mr”. fill/2‘ k/u '1'. 4o 3 HI ' q-I - é - if I = y! 22 yrs? jru ynz’ jru. 4’ 4 . 5 I .KU E . g u \ I 3-7, > I — _ [I e a. Jr; A 1 lra ~ fir s I v [I v. 42 5 . _ *\. \ . ' \ . 'Y‘ = w , 7 . ' 0 g g g) g g I bir l/u'z l/uu [fire l/zr. 43 v' .5 . s‘\. g . 5 ‘ . § ' i = ,{r w 4,; ,1,- “ ./n/ 0%. 44 7 = ,uu 45' 8 Q . '\\. g ‘ g) - " g \ g I = /" m. /' re. / J!‘ a / In" / 171/ - ‘0’ 3 g . i % . g V I -— /J/ {/11 flu ~' /1fizu - /,/ - u"v l /] t~11) - Y [6} THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. Small Characters. lam/ea WW (y, Maia”) '\ r\ 5x _ Q .L \ 2t, 2t Qt 2t 2‘ _ 2c 2c @sws 37k a ‘ a \‘ \‘a ‘ f\‘ a \—-\ 2* -_ a“ Q axe“ :1 ¢\ 2‘ ‘2‘?» ‘ 2 t 2* \ \9‘ ’\ 2 v‘ 2* = 2* 7‘ r <5?“ Es 2 C\ @w‘ \t —\ :9; \ 2* -- 2* a \‘aE‘ @\ 2/ \ 2 ‘\ \q ‘ L-\‘ 2 Es Q = 2 ‘ {=2} \a‘w i 37* (2/ t 26 ‘\ t at % ‘1 i9» = W'Wgfi‘zt ' \T'“ um fiawe/ a, .mé'oéaedl,’ (1; 1h”. ,4) 2‘ as? I\ <\ 2‘ M as = __ ‘ “as \ ,x - ‘\ ., (ljtg \ ‘Cl)( t wit) \dt '- xx 2 1‘ T-Ik T 2\ == g Lk a cs aw s\’\\ d g “s “I ‘71 ‘-. ' 17‘ 2‘ ‘\ s1; 7‘ 2‘“ = " \ Q‘Qr \ i, “ “W a“ St 2~\\e~ s as 2* “C is "= a a x A v“ o is \“J A 4* _ &w” P W a. _ ...... x )\ q _ A ...... _ l \\ l\\ \\-‘El \ a 2‘ \q 2‘\ __ 2\ &‘kg‘ 9‘ g‘ f‘Q (\ I ’\ ‘6 Q - 2,2; _ &\ @\ \L4 s k2 \\ = 9,“N &‘g t \l \ gen . \7\ SYLLABI C S CI] EMF. OF M L mm CvEW m W1 \5 54" ,m Hfi 6!? 5m. m W “fig? big? “I Wm W WAYNva a _ QNNQ M &fira. Wm m 1 sr'e J‘I‘fl , M M I _ km luv 114 TM M 140m” mm VMN Mflwwww Maw/wwwm “.3 Mfimwdfi wwwwbwda 1 ._ .5» 355353 NJ vmw \qu 2 __ 3» “MN A5 “3 3 ._ Q» A3 “Ta VMQ 4 __ .5» Arm VMQ 3 5 __ .TQ L3 VWM afi 6 __ 5.» V. 77w fizflw Leda/'4‘ Lulufilfl VMVMZM iii __ 1W W = __ W .L EIH HQILL MVJJ NV'I 'HDVDD uws 'smwwo T6 s€ $6 {9 \i = ...z = ...... :5 )5 35x a) \E = ‘I 3L1»; v: :5 \vg\\ a“ \£ .-.-. agg} s\-> fix a 5%,? ,2) \Z = kygéfi Q H0 H9 \, MD “6 R \HQ = ya? no ,w \> (o g\ \»T(? ‘2 Q‘x-n % 7: ‘ % “75> ~7a % \I \J \-—\ é:= \ % T» all) Q-n )LD )lD ND % \$1D = w am w a z nu 1n 9w \»6 \, \> k &D ’\_> LL v1) aD )D )D \aT) = DD A; T: 5 v ’- \ )E )E )E DE. X§E = 1E1 YE. )E )E \\E % 1 '2 “Q a “A, ? Q ,r ,r \> ,v- \_> ,r K \J = r; \~=> €%? & 1? -_ \z-Y ‘fia "b *2 “w m _‘ ah )7! ’11 H1 W)" = arr Q»?! 1" 3»? Q fl-Q Q 1 to a a _ ? @Wmumr' Y (.1) ’7' q ,T ’7' \fl' = ‘Ye \% s$\_>\?'\ W“? (6 (a a;\ w (o v \_= *< b \3 ~--\ ’7’ ’7' )T )T \)T = a? v? ’64} 9? \,¢ Z Z ‘(Z\ Z Z 17' gr n' \ n' \rr- = »%\_>»¢ \NF “3 \D _ m (D \ D SYLLABlCi S CHEME OF Capital Letters. {Morris as»: $5 & as 4 flfissaifiifiaxfi w“ W‘ L'yya zyqé 5.97” .\...4 a I .m, = 55¢ 55w pie' 5'50. .\...E .E_.....nq...rv..q.\...:sss {M w W 5 W“ q); .70. amevarv are a 7 "9“ W W“ W’ W w 00 1;!0. \..:1 a m 5...“. 3 5'02 5&1, mé' adv. And. A” u I: 12a 5nd z'na 1,710. A? a m H r56 5611/ 55/ :60. takes, an. 9 72 1,7110 Ijrrui gma. gm ITIIIC as 5M ..s 3 W I am 1:06 new ntre' pm. 3: as .1/ M mfia filbv' Indra zbe' ra’m VI. The Tea Leka [fiat . “was ...s.‘ and. warmww/ means manna, n ..sw 1 $1» = a.qust as Vmsa 2 m “was = .s.» as WW 3 ..sn __ ....2 an; {5 as 4 = asses» ..s ....s: \mE va I .0 7 __ .s. EU \5\ fill 72 / I J; ’2 »0 (\ re or“? Jar..le $0“ “to a fifiwj \Jv: “My “No lN \lev 7v J (JV 0 4 “me J Mafi/ We J "n n“ JIdiJJv z .4” J2 [11] SYLLABIC S CHEME OF Capital Leders \wfiquAWq MSUMHfi a 7WW&& 7 v9.0 wwwwm .30 “MWMW wmwmm www.mw I'll-'2" MMW/wm, = 7 “fin, W5 = s AWN Wm = AWQ 1 “Wq Wm. ..H» = A97 w AS? v.37 .39 .QQ = V11 T/ze Tandy-hon Le/éelv’ *1?me wwuwwwwwwy NW Yfi"! I Wm! wfl I = .gko 2 N9 W13 3WD way = W" AWE 3 VNIE .wa = w ;kro A? Lflw 4 VNm .NWNQWE WQ 'nl'llqlulll‘ll‘l'l = ,d ~29" $3 f uni fig 3 = W .b Q2 #5 55 .uflw = “7"” A? L? 7 qu .N: .wfi = .; £0 Q? 8 #0.! .Vum, .8? .Nfi = w" $6 M80 9. VNF/ .NE» = .f/o a? Mwfi w “NE W5 .1» __ (é: THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE Small Characters \% \w E x wmwwuwaw, wgggg Ex“ A» w, ‘\ a“ Tu w \Ma mu Ta W 3 3 & a/ .far'momé'l‘zy N (6') NW m” w” szmzwmwmlmitmqw “w \ N? 72 >2 g >2 3 \ \W ma Wm y ww m2 m2 & “m2 m2 2 . \W Q “é \W Q 3., m7. .6 [13] SYLLABIC SCHEME OF Capital Letters 92 H N q - “\- ’3 3 v 1i\ - v7i l = j, na J‘, 111' 5, 11a .‘yle J, M. .93 ’2 “g' 3' ‘2 ' g I I = .tnra Jill/‘1' .g/uu Jul/'0 .gru‘rz 34 a ,g‘. 2!). a. g I = am am" 4/” We >70. ‘90' _ 14 Ns , i}.s Ns, _ ail s ‘ Y’3' = gm”, 4177¢ ,5”, .9 6 "f g ' s gN - *Is - gs I = .gfra .n/lri .g/n-a syvre .z/rra. .97 "r g ' .N‘\' N ' dty ' g I = ~55!” J, 51' J; 51» £30 4; 30. q a =1 q ‘98 I] g. 2‘} *N ' ’lg/_ 3‘; l = 4471-. ,géya, ,g%g, 4% g I % é \ g ‘ ~27 I Ns ' 2 ' g ' ‘5‘ ' i. ‘ = .g Zra J,‘ 6”? .9; ha/ .s; he a; lvv. 100 {9 , ~\' _ \ _ v" = . a g a 3 B I J) ma J. nu a; ma/ .9; me Jtmo. lo/ 24' 33/ ' , ii‘\,. g ' X ' s\’ , Vs l _.‘ We my” - a" e “57" "’2 2' g - I g - b ' I = .gml'a .r. mn‘ J'. mru .r, rue .rmra [173 22 vi, ag, g I\%- i ‘ = ' I’m abt' 3M 4;”! 41M. I’ll] 7Z0 [WWW/L'W‘L6fi/Zf 104 1 HI}. H's. I jo/mfi [of 2 "WW "I? "13; air "m Mal» we we we we [14] THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. Small Characters . qa \MR \a F . a QWQNQ» 32; vi aafi/ alt 3 m \w me E \@ we @wwmumémgmwwdmw % .é age \Q Q Q»\ Si g 4M. a . W. n. \a QM. Q in. e may R? Q? We 32 my m2 M2 mg swzwmmemaw \aQw $1 \3 “5%” mi Mqu M91“ mg \m \m “5 we 3 \w0 \we “a mg a was, Q2 m5. \mixw, Kw: a; “gnaw F .t wd‘fi/ uptj) way/yap I“ a .1 N . = M a m .e a ‘7‘ k m5! k I... C\ 7.. E q = M m . .t k ‘7‘3‘ flasg cgqnv mg [fi] SYLLABIC SCHEME OF Capital Letters 10°" 3 WW "I? mg @5' "$1 = W W 1'” 1'“ f“ "” " “15% "I? ":5; =12; = 1,402 fidl fialu fde' ydo. “a s I“? 11'3"] = W“; I”: Jam in; j”. "3” ‘ "14%? 1"? “é; wk' "1 0% 1 = fUa/L ff»? jjau j, be; 1.50. 3.11141» jz/Ll fz/w/ jx/IU 1,110. ’ WWW? m; 4?? AA 111‘3‘ "1512' 1'1} mg; =1} I = fur/z- ],au} in. 4’” ’ law 1w r\ w; W "61/ y = 1M if?” - y» W I jaw 113 10 ‘\ “if I = fyfiak jfio - 3,61% _ fyh , fay/E4. , 11$ 11 ‘\ \ ‘\ . , "WWW? 11113; "IN' a l I = fit” 7'“ 3"“ y,“ 1'” 1X.T/16 kam and fl: 1 5,“. an. 5;“ = (4M (41¢ a“ at: (w. 116' 2 545/. 5‘5. Kg. Si. = (1,94 (£91; my» a}; 42/94 417 3 31;]. 55. Kg. 51" = (ékra/ (4M (Am 4M a”. ""’ " Hui} w fir VT] = J” ‘9’; W W” 4/“ I @- {5- 5g 5:»,- apn W w ‘41?“ W w [91] HILL HELL NVL HSVHSNV'I SJMUBJEIID ,vym mm 01m )Y\lDJ \)Y\D = \VYVQ an ya§w \)y\p \, \3 mu» um KGB mp 53.10 = wvflb “w WV; \ sub \sflb mpm 3&1) »§\n 9&1; \sxw = “,Mb 0,» \QB Q’s” \upb mum = \bafw \v ~ \0 \ saw \»q% mgm aqm vgtn Um A “’Qip $22) \@> 56)“) \afiilb = ~\)\9_>\v “av, &(é‘w \va \, \ wet» \EZLD \ETD sEZLb \D€-\D : \Ngw \E% 3% \EVQ \)z% 8" b 's-Q n,an 3Q“) “up \mha \in = §\)H\b \v-nw ab Sww \rww ‘__‘ \..\__ '“J—fi “)6'6’ ){flyv )bLD \Q \Ao’i'p = “W 8% ~@ “0"; \\€(Z 4% find» van) 61'?» "-110 \iflLD ‘—\ = “,nu \‘ vuw \Q‘b ‘ \uflb k__-\ \vvflb v799,2)21,9.,a/£/q7971)]9'110129 r/é ‘2 (71) \, ¢._-‘ LA nnfi MC“ ‘6‘? \(60 596‘ = \»\¢\ “(A s 1 nm "\sl‘l \, \ “‘6 = 'fi\ #60 ,6 m. \@0 \, \ ,2: a2: 9@ 931' Na = E. ,.>5. \ “Ant nos v6? shm fivh’fl = \ku “b0 1 s s\b\ “\“b0 \, \ 76’. “(9,3 \ \ w/g\ “,5 = ~€. {£1 a. \ [4'7] SYLLABIC SCHEME OF Capital Letters. m 1; RE. * 5%. g figI’ I = “gym a]... do”... (Lyn; dyr... 121 7 HQ? "a. a; I = .1541, 49;." .45.. .45; .45.. 12.2 8 {HI}, ' R‘q SKI = (QM; “4),; 4,... 04,0; 01,0... 423 a 55 I 55‘:- Q‘g- 33 qu = We (We we we 4/!“ 424 ... as . 'g. I ___ dpw (éfm. 4pm “If”, 40.... ’2’ 4‘ 51w: 35" 513 521/] = “4M '4” ‘55; “M ‘2‘? 426' ,2 ‘2‘ g I = ,1, W “by. a”... 0.39.: .49... .1; .. 35. 5‘5. {g g aé’I = .4... a... am. .4... aim. 428 14 SN ,2. {by 5%. - I = time); time draw ‘17.”? alma 1? 1’” 5g 52 I (ins/e dmyb' ‘4’?” 4% 41”!“ X. T/ie ngfi‘l/é Jam/1k, fimgh M 1”” 4 saw sq; lid all/1 = Z'M' 5'” W w W ,3. z :12}, QB. q'g. :22. mg I = My, 4 515,... as); My... '13: 3 all, ma. CIA. qfi qu’I = 5,0,1, db; 5km ékm’ dim. my . cm. 5‘2}. [I'ZI- gII‘I gIZ’I’I = m. 1.11.- M11. #1.; 1.1.1.. [48] THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. Small Characters. tita \\T\. m \ j i ‘ f\t 21 Q \ k “at Ea luv see st; (\u We \k‘\\ 0&5 0k.“ <'\ ____..-, Tbs Tag .umk cut. 0; gun Oqu tutu tut be i9 ea ‘\ . a» .2“ tbs“) O is. 12/" '2) \h? K\ >123 of f I \ g‘i gas; \ Lg ‘2‘ ‘2‘ \49‘ Q) 2\ game gas , s .a& l“‘\ t a a k a‘ J t s tax PEI—id *2» i“ i9 '37“ '2» 6'? Vs t2; 11L \tgc &3‘94 R €\ tau“ ‘MSk $GJ‘\‘ $a4& wk i}, we... \MA& “M; as \J <\ ‘W “y‘ L‘Z‘ 39/ @R ‘w ‘2‘ c; '7‘- 1.71 infk Lefleratlab {a} be :1 (5) arr w/jrfiw. <\ 9&9ng av)“ a a LAOV‘H LN)“ (19); u 9\ k qr)“ g “21/ <\ e”; a\Q/~ etasx a 2\ £21 , Eu 3‘) 'a\ 09” O-t‘)\)\ 021‘ 02‘} “23* ‘v, ‘h// V [19] SYLLABIC _SCHEME OF ' Capital Letters. .134 64-h» az-h my 5:} =11! “E érka 51; kt; brM'u. 1.9! 42; éfifi i%' 551 W» W h/gw 5any 436‘ >“'1 W 'q‘\ 9} q 3, ' W2 438 UN' £5Q' q ' 19;, 7am 51M Jill-w Adv-é 6.51m. .1 ,2 l5 {0 5w? "9 qua-33' =qi @m& éyé 440 qy q} 1%. 14%:“51%32‘f'@<'1%S?" 4w 44/ I21 I my @- ug 4 D‘fl 1; 4 @ (In, 45 qm. ga= éfi; 5:: 443 4i rgg 1 qg, .‘\u zyg v ll @, ¥ 4M 4.4” QN' 5E3' 32: 155*@521£5 ‘ 444” 46' uN'gig/- cfig'a; q~~ 140" ’7 54a, E 41 447 18 X $17741 q:' £3? QE' H:H! I”, H I" 148 “2' 55' “i; q!fi?’ D 44] EN 15$ I] Zola/L [2"] T HE TIBE TAN LAN GUAGE Small Characte 2.. w' I40 14* 8 6 J [~166 J 6 J 6 1 m f (38(éfi(gs63$45 56 Rfig31~ ‘ @WiviWM JJ 37393?#y39 I?) [W38[3&1M? E&WWENfé MW0%6%“ (W/ 21%s&m:“Q X!\( g XX J JJJ 1%wW55*)@{5%{‘5[is5%[w[5“w$5 (6 66pU§6 z:1 ' 4g 4" \: am J QMM‘MM 1414‘ isiisiiiJJE J' J J a“(MW:WA(d 3‘ (g\136a?136*(3%1?(W?~43m a“) Cl (§ K f JqJ-IJJJJé g» awwwwww3"; Cl W0%wNmyW MW WWW VIi“L?“F?a$cgv[aI?W? : 1* (36(W36[MWA(3°(é’;“ I XS .3.Jgl3a3J ®@®®W§W@ MW95 HM M \J L211 SYLLABIC SCHEME 0F Capital L'eum “1’ " QE ‘2' =15 ué' =15] = by" W W 151 :2 qqu, a? 2% 21%. qq?‘ = M 5,9,; 57,5,“ 571,7; 67,7154. 1319“2 u” anIn; :3},51?," :43],Lu QB.qg' =15};UYI I I: = kwW 41;541% 5W“5/” 5WAm m. m 2, qg. ‘} a; Q‘s. q?‘ = 54*, 54¢ hm M Ma. 11/ w mg. 5?. mg. mg. a?" = Mm m- m 54¢ 54h. 456 z; :3 mg. “in = M, M- AM ha 54w. "7 ”‘ mm; a} “'5; q}; "if! = M“ M M” M M m 2, mg. a? ma qt ti} = ma, ha 5% M, Ma, 11, 3; mg. 5%. :13. m: qg‘ = 51,14 54¢ m1 élda am, we ,1 mg. a? mg; mg. mg" = 5M» 51,4» am” 5w; Add 16; ,2 n3 Hi ,3; 2,3" = 5,“ 5W 5W 5W &W. m a: a? 5;. Q3 :35. “$1 = AM hm- hm AW' 5W. 103 a“ :13“. mg. a :13" = 5,61% (51“; ém 5/1.; gm. 16% a! 235'. :5 q Eli?" = 5m), hm hm A we; km. 46‘! as q a} a mi; :1. g = Aim hm 5m“ h, m' haw. f [12] THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE . 3:(W737?if?»(2"fl[5(2‘(2K(3+[3 M 1%ré{itPa5%35}[3*I?[3i? Small Character g)5;’gg“auE“auu6uamyaa wmwmwmvavwavgwmé; W W%% asu 3“éfi UK 53; g / J CoV,J0 J 40 J v [3w/§w /3( mz1rzr1mXm~ 4"“gur"( E by 5*);w$9 66 \3 ;( I ‘‘ 25* “A “at [.211 SYLLABIC SCHEME 01‘ Capital Letters 1.512 ‘\ my Ll D éG/(r (1"? m} 22 D )1 L1 hay“ 152 1'! 311’wea: II 2 kw 101’? 2k 5, to. as!)it;.321?).2;#2a;£2 ; D 4.../. M. 1.4% mil 54*» info D be: 1!! “2.1QB‘J.114 Ma Ma. 54:4 51,0. 1] 61,171. #6 1'! km be. he; 1] a”. #1 28 5M 5.11; an édé Lab. 1:39 5x14. hi. ha. hah’ hie. 80 54.6» 64.11; 54.1.. H, 115 5; th. .1] 12.74“? 1% £1 54d} an Age/.3 54.1.: 16; 32 713.7 h”... hm' 5,... hm; km. 16'2 J! “’5 5:, na. Jet/u; haw AMA D 403 3‘ 5,1345 6,6“; é/io. 10"4 3! 51/6441. km 5565a l a... 51:630. 46'! 13.2?ti; 5.1; (m. law-4' $5, Ba. $5. [w' k, w. [12] THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE . a.. {6 at i is, iévlurh; <_\ CS=5a6 (at[r[a[5‘ = “a fix 34; raF? Wmat1 westernsmaaamw ¢\ a t fit 3( J 11‘. 21a er “a k. a 4%"4W?(21tz;(W? cm x e. s vl ‘— aR\ :2“ “a ‘4‘i k 3 6‘A\ “LC lrlii“ 6U6 :NX (tfl[r JgJ k U is \___-\ = ayqx ate 6s ate d\s\_ a S J [5 J itI?laIlei 33j J \aitit5'95“)ii QW’Q grggs Jr‘“'< (gr/g(EA-'3 (qr/5Keir/3"“ Jr ‘J' I 4 4 flflfifir/ g.g,it y; if:r 95'atppt 5! tittit [3’[i‘(t[a/t(i Gg\\ = ab 05 c-\ t a ‘ll is :\ 5) Q aegis a- Q s 026% 3% \__/ Q \ “a ‘U @ = 3b; .75 are“ we [23] SYLLABIC SCHEME OF CaPital Letters. 1625' ,7 QB. q‘E}. qg. Eng. 5'?‘ = 1%, FM 56% Mn; 6mm. 46/ 38 qfiq- a} QQ- qh' q‘fif] = Ma» Ma 15m Mi éz/b. Ms 3} qalz. a}. qé- qg‘ = 41‘» 5a éw éw' in. My 40 as. mg. :53. 135‘ = 1% M Mb kw 52424 470 41 :15 q‘é qé = M» M 5m hk' M1 4p 4z qfiwq}. ma. the}. tug," = 4M lav/10' é-Jiw 3%,; 472 1,3 mm. a}. 5%. q)“. qu/Y = gm], 5“; 5;“, 44¢ 473 4/, my a}. qg. ch. :15 I = gm, &m‘ 5m; ém' 4/1» 11%,. air :51 = M» M Au M XI. Tbiym M 47/ 4 mm. um. mg" = Mum)” mHul mm my“; 470’ 2 ing]. “g. “a. iléj‘ = "kg/5,0, "5W "5%", “by; 47/” ’ wa' xii" wig; 11% £5! = "bk/WWW MM "W"; 47’ 4' my: 1411' 5431‘ A?!“ = "val my“ "bf" m-yé 47) ’ 1152/ £15} 1.1% irily 3459;] = "7w "WV' "271‘" "*f!“ 3”“ [24] THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. Small Characters @1 ¢ ‘3” “4‘ “‘L:.\\ 025 )9 “1 5 (A (q ‘\\ Q%\ (18‘ E; 06¢\ aéru. Mk fi/ mar“ aas s‘E* (5 / Cl 2, C Cl $3 ( use“? (i Q i) a I! \2 Q? 7 Q 0-4 \ a} (14¢ a ‘ 9 t 2 b r Q Q? Q. l / ClQAx wt ll 9 a a .0 “a; 19‘ 6 K p A UH"\\ UH‘ “MC X19 35‘ ; a \ C:\€ a (eb& V, W 2 4‘; 2 flz‘\. )5 @5 Mi Ufa \ CUJ\ GHQ 9 HG ans 0 1.. 044* an» a Q? @ wk <31 c-I/ \cg Q? 623*" Ldfins' M law 14 (mJa: a/Prfzm ‘\ Viv Q <-\ \__, ancwvcuou 319‘ cud-u WG‘X mflaxma; wk m@\ “Q\\ MY» “‘3‘ “a? 1% “9% “yfi? “sag 727* by “Ma. Q U“ LX \\ 159$ ?\ \\ b-fi matru man 819‘ CMCIH 04mm man way» 6:270)!- wmk Wk ~———1 (It? 0:5 32“}? 04 n \ m2; @ war“, 6&2“; [15] SYLLABIC SCHEME OF Capital Letters V nay-m myr'u 12ger Wayne} 180 6' “3' a}. ‘fi. as I :84 7 . :\. ‘ . '\. _ _ . _ _ , 11m 1!? Us, “G an nag-m1. m,/u m,ru1 175M v 182 8 “if? a}. ,4 Ni; m-xvf/ial "ac/Ml. MIcMa, m,th Inc/“a llél I 183 9 gas. :1}. NE; APE. my}; mja. m, raj/'0. / I 14 . “\. ' . \. 8’ am .11er J43, MI 111/, 771.1% merge, Ill/W 1.9)” u warm \- s13 J12 \. II midi 171.041» will wet/L1 18/; I2 , :\, , ‘. 343‘: 113‘ 34%, JJR II m, (2’; wads. may "1.4.70. / 1 “\ " _ ‘\‘ 8’ 3 manor *5, .4qu m,7u' mpw. 1&9,j,(as 15' ,1.4 alga. JJIEQ . a .‘\_ .‘\ 34 \_ m/a‘la/i ' mefi fish-M main. "ya/6d 'm;&11/ 1n, fie: nyé'o. The Arlfifliiéfl/ why/[e am! @% QM qr" gr," a!" ma]. are: are. Ma; Ma. 1 ‘\ \. 9‘ ' as; my cg mg, Aifi’qa/ 1551' fluid lilo. j I 2 3 QE' qa' ‘\~ ag ' an \' lei/{m /),, £1171. £4 fire, A, Mm. {yd I qqq. ..‘\ . an}. éyal/ dye. Aye Aye. [26] THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE Small C be meters “‘2‘ “‘3‘ w “2“ ’1 ' \_ <_\ \---» c\ _ m\ax mg 04“ 0*“ ougg 1: “\qx mg mg oskb “wk, \J \J maqqs 04m (1\ (kn m\ au5°1\ = mean max macs asdak my ou§At 0%; ga mic ¢~fi1\ = ad A\ an} unity (Manx Aka 043$ mas 0A8\\ 3 “K‘\\ “7(\ N§fxt mask . \ m2¢\\ mfl\ wt (gt angle = as» 0&2“ asks Mg \ “g Q “a m’mk m‘g (Lg); ms; m’;\ = M’s\‘ “\k M)» “s; M’\\, (,“q’tu dial mist ms m4\’\ = o~§t\\ :Ag “~5fo “gag (\ was“ cu 65c 0462'» de\ wk a nudge $\ m£k M & “dock (ks As an \ 0* =\ m \ “TE? m’=i\\ an. —\ M k ‘7 € i \5> S &\ \ p S \ 5 “‘§ \ lef/emléaé W q (L) ada/er/a'x. “\9‘“ “SK I‘\é>\ fl£\k fléz\, was <\é\e we <\@c “655‘, “\ q "\ __._. “w if}- rgu a? \fie. \y .\3\ ~\9& ‘\?\ r\2\ .22» @s E ‘\Zz\, = mgs‘ 6\§Q2K new“ ?\mats wk “av nm‘\ = 'vv“ § an“ 39* (us m\ [la] OIQV'I'LLS HWHHOS .210 [EQPII'BO :49an ll P”? W? (95%;? var/'7 76'! fib m .23» @b @b . \, \ 211/? 1746‘? [67 .Eb .Eb .Eb Eb l§u,. \ \ 4’77"? "W"? .96" .b‘Yb sen §b .an "WW-’7 7””? ;9/4/ 167 .832! {a 30 him W? 6’67 ' .sz .Bb \a Eb .52, \ I V”??? m? 1%? m7 \v \ 6'67 01' W7 7"? r12”? "7‘"? .zbz, .52, E2: 5:, \v \ 1’9"? .44"? “'7’? 7‘7"? “7’7 M1 5b Sb Eu 2. . \, \ W47 paw/’7 M7 {P .blvb .sz Er, .m WW”! W7 /II1/l/'IY \, \ -,,/;y/'4/ f‘f/V W7 mm El 5:. fl??? fib '1 MW W1"? \, \ . 1111/11"? 717/7 ,4/21/7 "WI/’7 m If .Ez, .Ea .Ez. \, \ 7?? ’77 792 [r .ua .Bb .nz, 7’77 4?? “7'”! \, \ i4? @7 103 j! fir, fin a . 1M 74/? ”%1/ \. \ T”?! “"17 911x .Eb $8 .55 “f7 4‘77 "‘2’"! 20: a 3 . 9b . a. \ m? W/ “7‘77! WW PM? m @2, Ex. .gz, 4w"? WW W7 97’? “7”? .J J J / .J .J I .3 I» \f/» @( '1' F, 1% )JoOll/v Jafilv .Jmm/u 6,» 1&6 JW JNB JJlN/v l I» ‘J@/» J11. JNIM a”. J8/- JV/(b n l/lv /L Ja Jun/Viva. h JflJmm/ ( I» 4W4 1% JA/v Jil/(Ma/Jv p4? » film/j» NO JflvM/J 1!. J3! W64 J”: ,2») Mk?» ilv 4&1» J“! J“! a? f J 6 , 41' \ (04 1.4!“ m¢ J J .J J 2E.me Luv] /v V1» ml» 7“ r, 44% JNAUJI» JKWAC Jaw/y J-rglu 1.“? J.NW. Jaan/w .JaJWwf- 4 $2. € if “WM a? 401?. V/f.» fl ¢flv / vfiv W /L \ 01 49 Aw» 4W1!» a Jflvfill flaw 6" 4%” 4w 7 a/ Jada ,m,/. 4 A /\/. /~ (\ 4G #Nfi ¢WC if. /. 1%» I“! \m/u awe 5. Judy/NC 18¢ 4N4. i C9 a :2 (86 Lu?» {Nay JJLJ» g Nab (LU/v x? ¢W€ ‘ ‘19an wavy! l 55 I OIHV'I'LKS HWHHOS n10 X 71/ @WwfiwMW7 79mm mfiwjaemxfi'swjv/anz/mmlq/a any) 11 a/yrylf- vadvo ‘Qean “THUS 'QJQ'IOBJ‘EIK) £2 » lh = 4%; \,LD : \ava on! .2 mi. = .../....4 \) \yvm—Mhb ( 1’8 9? is - 4;. \fi = "\B 2/5 7 1N5 = \n1\ sy§ - .\\\A 67K 1‘ s l - ...,- \»l = \w\ f}? .9 ll» - .. 33,19 = \\,b 1% [ 1S1» ...... \fljo = \tho fl? 8 1:: = We \an = 39v 11.: a 1M: ___ ...... 1 \srno II on» \svv— 3/5 0; lbf . ... \3m = ‘\-$vwa 612' I! 1er = M. \srrm II —svn~, m 3v~ 052 z; it. . ., \‘U = “\w\ '3’; s" is - -. \\$ \r» ZZZ W 1% = 7...]. \vly ll an I! In. = 7 \‘YU = ‘5?» 75; .9! 15"“ = 77%”? \t‘NI = \vlm f2; 11 in . \sr‘l _. )% \‘v_ [30]“ THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE. India! (wanmgaadbt/MWMM Mal MWW WIM/[fie/ ymall Odd/"aeer , \9 ll \w'[ 18 WA}. aTaTTi'cbm lid—{(\ 2 l 1.9 \_9é>$\\ 3 l ‘\ ‘\ 5., \uuuq'u queue!“ mums\ ‘\ 4 a” \900] ] iv “T‘Eiar'std'aNH War/i I “&m\ mscgeo-sm\v~\m\ 6 gig/Li" 13" 3t M as &as szka ~\_ ufiwihrizigfl'zia'ssrgawfii oucfl‘keggus 7 1m % fiaas'sss'a iaslbfiwfit‘lew‘fi \ \“GCUQ‘LLmfldl\SL_Q\L\ 8 u us‘d'sflsi 22 ‘\ r\ Y l lulfi‘Tllr‘lRl 23 k 9“ U41 (\ (“&cusw‘ ck 1" l Qa'ws'! t (bk “\a“ t \xvgd“ 24' " ii >>9§as~~is’§'s%s~asi \M ‘\ “\k ‘\ m k is} m c k ">5 ‘9? u i' Wow- hair 77w wide!» .TVTM/.2.3.4.5 at Wye Chlnduv‘. 5%040 m f'é' 01mm”,me ., 7 bulb! in M 01km 10 “WwPad/na. Guru. av 1) ‘ ,. 8,0,” (10/er f2M¢160mnuu or/wmfit .. Il— {fa-swam: qumlimflhlllq “1,9,10) " ; jea'wsfi'rir'wsi .. 46' M: comma. qf Myyacfaa'ma’slookf » it» - . 17 denote/Whip, middle, andnnaflialauyllaéw 1f 7 - x “I . arises} I f\. . was! I . 18,19, 20 Jamie 150 imb'aljt'y/L; and [re/ore Moaflnld (wkm Mb: 17M W/ {#01 buxnch/Qaracémgxln ' 16' a %€N/:§8"H§E'llb¥zhlffi'llfi€l fraud/gland. . 21 fourwmmal Wei. O ,. 12 [h 2 wmmao' Mafia/71.9%». . 23 [/40 comma/1'10 Jae}. ’7 e e 'Jéa'gyy'sgs'wiw'aaw . 24' 17:! mWEzMMJ/fitM-ldluk'mmmfy llam/ . (st 'I‘IBE TAN ALPHABET U“: in the Baimyik ("11"! (“34-th) Character k Isl. Ck (91% IBM l Ulllllfllflll r at .1 n. /. f7. 5 m/ (liEHI (jlfllfllldll a 49'6'9'1 a M .1. w WWW-iii! 1]» z A j r fibule I la bda. ya. 7111. I 0111. 61/111. 17¢ fu/ éa. 77111,» .Afira. Y'Iiazduyr War w and 1h [22 wrl/e {Z0 11— md ijal/ alum-(imp TIBETAN ALPHABET _' in the Bdmjilt (QIJJJ":I\I|) Character {3'11 [ll-410 a/Ja wa £410 to Alb j“ ’ - u Hill I w fa In .rfiu/ .ra' £1” a, ,9 1 m aa/tzy“_J"/“W % ’7‘” % gasseswe II H l Ill ([llfllll w l [331 TIBE TAN ALP HABE T in the Bémjik (QQJH'JGI) Character Ullllllll jm/ Du Hu'w (1m mu .r/n‘w [0er 13m, $51 Jig/ME u fa zz “\VX' HUI ZIIWIZZHW'HI' Qiq; @_ >c-4Qi/ T; y; w u w M, ’HQIUIEHHUI M [Mp yd; M1, 2Z0 ’rh yé/ 1% ‘l‘l l I 'l‘lfl4l ’lfillifiU J y 7’ 037 a) m 7'! 7m /' c%% mlrul filial | I‘M'ITI fa 1~ & -- f m 17L;er [A 9 [34] T IBE TAN ALPHABE T m the Ba'myik “matrix?!” Character |'%|§ H1 lmlfldlmul | rul [/2 [a5v k 21;) éa AZ lb 3 CTWWT“? M qfizwy;“ “I” “HI”! ll“ly|“l“l_l;|| l lh’l“l“-éfil s7» “ILLILIITI :3 .rr);) :1 “GMT? ,7; .y/ .7»- I“ :Zjém “I {I “\\ In; %J A? $1 l‘ f Bll I I7" m“ UUIUUI IUU “fill l 44 J44 quwjé a/ ; \JJI [IUHUI l HIU‘HJI [35] TIDE TAN ALP HABE T in the Bar'nyih (Qqa'w'TlI) Character Qq ‘\ (\Smml 1mm “mrquiJTlEIl 7;. mi. - .rbn. may we?) 17. - ,1! I I in nunm I am flaws/h 4M7- y.. ah _ [w | Plow (ullllml 34147 My _ . .7... _ r _ .1... yams} Wig)“ ll] llllfll lfllfllUl‘lly IT) lll 0%, - m k7uuz. 7.. the»)..- J} 4... 90.. (\ Q_ Ullll I "UUJIlU I I Ina/'11)». “M " 17 f“ [.98] NHL-TELL ‘LHQVHJYV a; 91p BILSQILIQ: (f.Eb) lg) an; .1910 Wu WWW/4Wwame “WWWWWWY‘?” We 10 W/fi'wfl" “WWW "’2 no "/vys-Jmhm arr/6 wrrm/ "1m" ’4me 62mm yvmwvw/w fiat/W tom .ng.Lo¢1.t£ 1.99%,» In \Jltuhle Tim-5.00.“ 1}.l.a.ll 1m.o.m.o [An/a ’21 “Qt/WM!" W7”??? ‘wMfl/d \.-v.§1.m.g 1.m.b.E.l>J l.o.bTm.\{ \.an.‘¢ ’nwmsyrypq I‘f/yzyz 9797.4 '47,? Ti/lpigligii’mlb \»\‘)\\Ta\€;iir>\' Wigigigai? M‘BFAEWF err/"ram? “fewer We Wise/ch “WW/"1417 \\$\€fi?~u? WfiEéBXQiE \igiirigri} \»$\?\$6? ’M/mp/rrymmy ’mf/rry‘nzwfz Orv/174'qu mm»? \%./z»a»~»?é/Z>¥Zt \.%.%,€/z% \, \_ /\ We? rhea/Meaa waawaawa v‘gv?’cg\¢§a%\§\% \ ‘ \To )2) Cg i7 :é l? Cd»; 1332;. \K 44y 4JJW 4%.u/Ju .nu Kg by? \g hwfi?\fi$§\ 3 Ax n5 \iLé 73¢: my ran/yum: 4114' Owl/y 7y 7! fl 11 7-1" (74' 7:” 479 {7% (W \a%\g(fivgvlivév¥wévrfégiéi$ \., it? __/(_ \ng .1” 61¢ 5.1 gt 4¢6az3¢¢ p; w {.1 40.4 17¢ '57)? wad 791:1. Ins/.2 991.2 ‘oq/i [37] TIBETAN ALPHABET in the Bruts'ha (q 531‘) Character %(%€Qagl‘g\glgtolfx(x(k 6‘, co wt%(3gq&'t%tk ‘\ *‘\ ->/ AbQZé/c/Ié'ltldgaléw mguméwao 31%‘1"? \Lnu(u\u&\zs i”¢%%31"’%23 t \d‘ \d¢ \\ 33> n \ dsgjshywyrwwymm$wgor Mséishsm .‘\ \Dt)7fi&\ Lg??? (137‘57(\ \/ chqul t .‘k Qfl(§n\yu¢ouquqqqug‘R‘é/JLS‘ZZFQK élnu-M Ala/r Ajj'a/m/ cyan/4&0 72km J/‘mzerak \9tg aflwu'uUQLn-l &Q-an-uk f) 2 1 e, A $ 1/ g [c pa 2° 2° “,0 no ‘50 0° 4 z 3 4 .4' 6' 7 8 _9 ~10 20 30 40 50 6'0 70 40 KO 000 IIQOO 170600 “2 QQ ge; "A 30 yo 100 {000 40000 11 zz 33 4% '3"! ~56 1’11 <4 flfl 1704 227. aaaa @Q-Q~@ 6.6. 77 88 9.9 111 222. .5333 4¢¢¢. m; LANTS’HA CHARACTERS 01? POINTED mm; TY 4 [£12, DE VANA 0,4111 dwiadw used 5] Me Baa/512w m [flai'a/ a/ut TJeé. V0 WELS 5'1 Elmzbfilggni'éé'lllilalal'llé \M m 3 §Qiggfifi&fiv¥w&wg ’wLZrZrZEEeZmQJazl/Wall CONSOJVANTS illllllé‘l lilglllill @655 wwwgcv éaééquyy asae, but]be bandidldiqy ¢péqla dll (11%11l &ZIIJHIH E1 EEK-g5] 11 =1 q§u‘ 1, fiM/JJ/z/n/ fiflzznm lllélil @212“! at WA";°=TI 4%”‘1! ’r'll -] 1' Var-W 56% s 1, £09 {laiglil MaglMifiliii‘iiiiil§ qqfiiqgfiggéfi*fifi%fis M "M “H H MALI/Zirzwwfiwfifiaafimyid/ we] LANT S'HA CHARACTERS 1* assaseeeeefiséleas F" 13.; :5 u. we» 8 'l "(i a a alr— Ti 8' '10 ya a” re re 1“)” 1" reward/P @121 “amiss a 3 a. s g . i i i a. :1 1’” 1’“ a” a 1* ab ale W 17%?!” A a A % A A a;< c. \ l jna/ fry/Z 2 ya]; W" yrs; ymu'. yua— fnaa. yam/L ' .lle Jr'amfler r/wea' r110 [In/LIA“ C‘onaorw/afiwi/fi/Mewodwdy, 1',le orW. nasal sunset Islam 3:23 sass 33;; nasal asset mast I [4"] LAN 'r S'HA CHARACTERS mam asset-l 111mm marl 2555161 5555! 555? 2/2-22l lir'fiy fair A‘Zl {Ilia $1 Zvv' dll dw (My Jfllr (by ceru Izzy ry- nyw C amwmmnw¢a¢a¢w It ‘7’“ aware“ flow [10 ml ass-at ° (11) 13' any/raved before it; rat/Jealle cecal cth astgiaasgi EEl-Eg‘ alibi/15, wilt WWLWWZ at at 1”!de fililiil film‘lll 2 '2 2; s s s a1 we ltd/mind fivrao'waqu/Q'HZZ fial‘lnlzlléil Aégt‘fllfl Egéiqu "124' 2355531 gigging] U, My, ’7 11;, 5;; MM» 11m?! dffidfiz ryrg f€flfi4¢.."c l a aim 11111111 I 13 aa, 5 2| it a ’l Ifll Mgw lam pfiova/ M We r1 1% 1%, 1'] Mafia Hamill [2mm nauga'ii'ciéw FINIS " “kw ___; - I ' . v~'O‘l3‘ l_ I}, 95-5. J"! ‘N.